JP6551034B2 - Pachinko gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to pachinko gaming machines.

  The pachinko gaming machine generally acquires a random number value for lottery in response to the game ball entering the starting opening, and temporarily stores it as an operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Each such operation holding ball is sequentially digested one by one every time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and whether or not it is a big hit is determined. When the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, after displaying the symbols in a plurality of lines in a variable display, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the big winning opening, which is normally closed, is opened. Special game (big hit game) is established.

  On the other hand, in recent years, prior to the determination of whether or not it is performed, a pre-determination is performed on an undigested operation holding ball, and predetermined notice information is notified to a player in advance based on the pre-determination result. It has been known. As one of them, there is a so-called on-hold in-line continuous-play effect that notifies that the next big hit is included in the operation holding ball waiting in the special game (for example, (See Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-33892 A

  Since pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration already exist in large numbers as conventional models, in order to differentiate them from conventional models, it is required to improve the amusement of games by so-called on-hold in-line effects. .

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a subject, and it aims at providing the pachinko game machine which can aim at the improvement of the interest property of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, a first starting opening provided in the gaming area and in which gaming balls can enter, and the game A random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port, and a second start port that is provided in the area and changes between an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter. a first random number acquisition means for a second random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number in response to ball entrance of game ball into the second start hole, first on the basis of the random number value acquired by the first random number acquisition means a first advisability judging means for performing the spruce determination, a second advisability judging means for executing a second spruce determined based on the random number value acquired by the second random number acquisition means, provided in the game area, the first Opened according to the result of the first determination or the second determination result. Multiple times a winning opening game balls capable ball entrance, when the first spruce judgment result or the second propriety determination result is big hit, the unit game with the opening of the special winning hole Te Special game execution means for executing repeated special games , a low probability state in which the result of the first success / failure determination and the result of the second success / failure determination are big hits with a predetermined probability, the result of the first success / failure determination, and A lottery state control means for performing a control to shift to a low probability state or a high probability state having a high probability state in which the result of the second success / failure determination has a higher probability than the predetermined probability and is a big hit; A ball entry state control means for performing control to shift to a normal ball entry state or a ball entry easy state by the state and the ball entry easy state in which the second starting opening can be easily entered compared to the normal ball entry state If the random number value by the first random number acquisition means If acquired, the first hold storage unit stores the acquired random number up to a predetermined upper limit number as hold information until the first validity determination permission condition is satisfied, and the random number value by the second random number acquisition unit If the second random decision permission condition is satisfied, the second hold storage unit stores the acquired random number value as the hold information until the predetermined upper limit number is satisfied, And the effect display device on which a predetermined effect is displayed while the symbol shown on the display is changed, and the symbol change effect content determining means for determining the effect display process of the symbol change effect for causing the effect display device to change the symbol display; In the situation where the result of the above-mentioned judgment of success or failure based on the random number value according to the hold information becomes a big hit, the specific hold information in one or more hold information scheduled to be digested after the execution of the special game according to the random number value In the preview game control means for deciding whether or not to execute the pending internal connection effect to suggest or notify the possibility that the information exists, and in the specific gaming state, the result of the second success or failure judgment will be a big hit When a special game is executed, during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute the on-hold extended resort effect, and the special game is executed when the result of the second success / failure determination becomes a big hit in the specific game state. If it is, during the execution of the special game, an effect type selection effect capable of selecting an effect form of the symbol variation effect scheduled after the end of the special game is executed, and in the specific gaming state, the second When the effect type selection effect is executed during the execution of a predetermined number of unit games in the special game executed when the result is a big hit, the predetermined number of unit games are executed during the execution of the unit game. Suspended extended game presentation is Te is not executed, wherein a first special play as the type of special game that is executed by the first spruce determination result is big hit, the second propriety result of determination The second special game is included as a type of special game that is executed by winning a big hit, and the execution period of the special game is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game Demo period, unit game execution period from the start of the first unit game execution to the end of the last unit game execution, and waiting period from the end of the last unit game execution to the end of the special game execution Including a certain end demonstration period, and in the low probability state and the normal entry state, the low probability state and easy entry after the end of the first special game executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes a big hit Transition to state In this case, the first time is set as the end demo period, and the high probability state after the end of the second special game executed when the result of the second success / failure determination becomes a big hit in the low probability state and the easy entry state. And, when transitioning to the entry easy state, the second time which is longer than the first time is set as the ending demonstration period, and the result of the second success / failure determination becomes the big hit in the low probability state and the entry easy state. If a second special game is executed at the second, even if the specific hold information exists in one or more hold information that is to be digested after the execution of the second special game, the second When the second special game is executed by the result of the second success or failure judgment being a big hit in the high probability state and the ball entering easy state while not executing the pending inside consecutive residence effect during the execution of the special game , Execution of the second special game When the specific hold information exists in one or a plurality of hold information that is scheduled to be digested after the end, it is possible to execute the in-hold extended game effect during the execution of the second special game .

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment. It is a control block diagram of a pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and effect control board of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol equivalence lottery table based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern table based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the pending renzo production based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the production image of the reserved in-rensou production based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 10 of the main control side main processing based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting port monitoring control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol variation start monitoring control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start monitoring process in FIG. 14 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control general-purpose processing in FIG. 16 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change in Drawing 17 concerning this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a special symbol stop symbol display in FIG. 17 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 20 of the special symbol stop symbol display process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 22 of the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process following FIG. 23 of the special electric accessory control process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reset start process based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process based on this embodiment. 27 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing in FIG. 26 according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation state transfer process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production content determination process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding villa rendition effect A determination process in FIG. 29 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit rendering content determination process in FIG. 27 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | reserved in-range resort effect B determination process in FIG. 31 based on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit rendering replacement process in FIG. 31 based on this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production control command reception interruption processing concerning this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a production control side timer interruption processing concerning this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the image control command transmission interruption process based on this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of a special continuous presentation based on this embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the relation between reservation inside row villa production and special continuation production concerning this embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining a relation 1 between a reserved inner consecutive villa effect and a special effect according to a first modified example of the embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining relations 2 and 3 of reservation inside consecutive residence effects and special effects concerning a 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special production determination processing based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production A determination process based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production B determination process based on the 1st modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the consecutive villa production pattern table of the reservation inside consecutive villa effect based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit rendering content determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production button monitoring control processing based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a production | presentation state transfer process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production A determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the on-hold extended resort production B determination process based on the 2nd modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image of the on-hold extended resort effect B based on the 3rd modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the consecutive villa production pattern table of the reservation inside consecutive villa effect based on the 3rd modification of this embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 2nd big prize opening based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize mouth concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit production contents determination processing concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the success / failure prior determination table based on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol equivalence lottery table based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol variation pattern table which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the extended villa production | presentation pattern table of the retained renso production in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect A determination processing based on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | prescribed inside consecutive villa effect B determination processing based on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating an effect | action based on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of acquisition prize ball number alerting | rendering effect based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of on-hold consecutive villa production based on 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram where it uses for description of a reservation picture concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of the on-hold consecutive villa production based on 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine concerning a 7th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 7th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize opening concerning a 7th embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship of big hit classification and promotion production based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of presentation of a probability variation promotion production based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the probability variation promotion production pattern table which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of round promotion production based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the round promotion presentation pattern table based on 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize opening concerning a 8th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize opening concerning a 9th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big hit symbol table which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the big hit rendering pattern table based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the big hit presentation pattern (hard fight bonus) based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the big hit presentation pattern (phantom bonus) based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the big hit presentation pattern (a matchless bonus) based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the big hit rendering pattern (seven star charge) based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the start demonstration effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the completion demonstration effect table based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the end demonstration effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of production mode concerning a 9th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol variation pattern table which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation production pattern table based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of the probability change promotion effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of a round promotion effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production | presentation of the on-hold consecutive resort production based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a 7-star charge production effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the execution process of the character selection effect based on 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 10th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize opening concerning a 10th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol table per special symbol based on 11th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the execution process of a special game based on 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation pattern of big winning a prize opening concerning a 12th embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (the first special symbol game) and the second game It is possible to develop (the second special symbol game).

First Embodiment
A front view and a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment are shown in FIG. 1 and FIG.

<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine PM is, as shown in FIG. 1, configured in the form of a rectangular frame according to the opening front of the outer frame 1 forming a vertical fixed holding frame configured in the outer rectangular frame size, and is mounted open and closed The front frame 2 forming the frame is mounted so as to be able to open, close and open laterally and releasably by upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3a, 3b disposed at the front left side edge of each other, and is called double lock provided at the front right side edge By means of the locking device 4, it is always held in the closed state engaged with the outer frame 1.

  The glass frame 5 and the ball unit 6 are assembled on the front side of the front frame 2 so as to be able to open, close and releasably by using the hinge mechanisms 7a, 7b and 7c provided on the front left side. It is always used in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2. A game board 20 is detachably set and held on the upper part of the front frame 2 located behind the glass frame 5, and a game area PA in front of the game board 20 through the double-layer glass of the glass frame 5 that is always held closed. To be visible.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, there are provided a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the game development status, and a speaker 11 that generates sound effects according to the game development status. The ball dish unit 6 is provided with upper and lower ball dishes (upper ball dish 8 and lower ball dish 9) for storing game balls, and a player performs a pressing operation at the front center of the upper ball dish 8 A button 15 is provided, and on the front right side of the lower ball tray 9 is provided a launch handle 12 for launching the game ball.

  The game board 20 is configured based on a board formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin. On the front of the game board 20, an outer rail and an inner rail are fixed in a circular arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA where the game balls can be rolled is sectioned, and a windmill and a large number of games are formed in the game area PA. Along with the nail, in addition to various winning ports such as the first starting port 61, the second starting port 62, the operation gate 63, the first large winning port 64, the second large winning port 65, the first special symbol display device 71, the second Various display devices such as a special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a general symbol reservation lamp 76 are provided. A center ornament 22 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center ornament 22. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an out port 29 through which the game balls that have tumbled down without entering each winning port are discharged to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 20 will be described in order.

  The first start port 61 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first start port switch 611 for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Entering a game ball into the first start port 61 triggers the first special symbol lottery.

  The second start port 62 is provided as a start winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second start port switch 621 for detecting the entrance of a game ball. Entering a game ball into the second start port 62 triggers the second special symbol lottery. The second start port 62 includes a normal electric accessory 622 and a normal electric accessory solenoid 623 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 622. The ordinary electric accessory 622 changes between a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 62 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than this state. Here, the second starting port 62 has a structure in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter unless the ordinary electric accessory 622 is opened. On the other hand, when the ordinary motor-operated part 622 is opened, the ease of entering the second start opening 62 is enhanced.

  The operation gate 63 is provided as a start winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an operation gate switch 631 for detecting passage of a game ball. Note that the passing of the game ball to the operation gate 63 triggers the normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to expand the normal electric accessory 622 of the second start port 62.

The first big winning opening 64 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is open when a big win or a small win is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The first big prize opening 64 includes a first big prize opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special electric accessory 642 called a so-called attacker device, and the first special electric combination. A first large winning opening solenoid 643 for driving the accessory 642 to open and close is provided. The first special electric accessory 642 is variable between a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter or difficult to enter the first grand prize opening 64 and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter.

  The second large winning opening 65 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape which is opened when a big or small hit is made in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The second large winning opening 65 is provided with a second large winning opening switch 651 for detecting the ball entry of the game ball, and also the second special electric combination 652 called as a so-called attack device, and this second special electric combination And a second big prize opening solenoid 653 for opening and closing the accessory 652. The second special electric accessory 652 is variable between a normal state in which a game ball cannot enter or difficult to enter the second grand prize opening 65 and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter.

  The first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 are provided in the area on the right side in the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game state, when firing the game ball toward the game area PA, it is easy to hit one of the big winning openings 64, 65 by performing a so-called right hit to hit the right area. It has become.

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 61. The first special symbol display device 71 is constituted of, for example, seven segments of LEDs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of each segment, and the blinking of the segment is stopped and switched to lighting display. One special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The stop symbol of this first special symbol is formed by numbers, symbols, etc. represented by the combination of each segment.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs a variable display and a fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the second start port 62. The second special symbol display device 72 is constituted of, for example, seven segments of LEDs, and the variable display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of each segment, and the blinking of the corresponding segment is stopped and switched to lighting display 2 Special symbols are finalized. The stop symbol of this second special symbol is formed by numbers, symbols, etc. represented by the combination of each segment.

  The first special figure reservation lamp 73 and the second special figure reservation lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is indicated by lighting / flashing display of the lamps. Express (up to 4). The number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is the number according to the random number value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 61 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicates the number of holding the acquired random number value, that is, the number of the judgment that the judgment of acceptance is temporarily held until the condition for judging the acceptance of the judgment (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. The number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is the number according to the random number value acquired based on entering the second starting opening 62 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicates the number of holding the acquired random number value, that is, the number of the judgment that the judgment of acceptance is temporarily held until the condition for judging the acceptance of the judgment (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value.

The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs normal symbol variation display and confirmation display by lighting and blinking display of the lamps. In the present embodiment, for example, the normal symbol variation display is expressed in such a manner that the two lamps are alternately turned on and off, and depending on which lamp is finally turned on and stopped, Report the lottery results. The ordinary figure holding lamp 76 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and represents the number of reserved balls (up to four) for normal symbols by lighting / blinking display of the lamp. On the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, there is provided a round indicator 77 for displaying the number of round games in the special game (the number of rounds: the number of times that the special electric accessories 642 and 643 are continuously operated). .

  The effect display device 70 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner and stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a notice effect, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol Hold display. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, the first special symbol is synchronized with the decorative symbol display unit 700 on which the decorative symbol change display or the notice effect display is executed, and the first special symbol hold lamp 73. The first special figure hold display section 701 that executes the hold display of the second special figure hold display section 702 that executes the hold display of the second special symbol in synchronization with the second special figure hold lamp 74 Is provided. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 70. The decorative symbol display unit 700 is provided with three rows of display areas (a left display area Z1, a middle display area Z2, and a right display area Z3) serving as a decorative display variable display area on a predetermined effective line (not shown). The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left display region Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle display region Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the right display region Z3 are respectively stopped and displayed. The In the normal display mode, while the special design retention ball is activated, a special circle retention image is displayed on the special display reserve display parts 701 and 702, and the special retention feature is displayed when the special retention ball is digested. The reserved image is lost. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order in which the special symbols actuated on-hold balls are generated (the order of entering the balls), and a maximum of four can be displayed on each of the on-hold display units 701 and 702.

  The center decoration 22 is installed around the effect display device 70, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the screen of the effect display device 70, and decoration. The center ornament 22 is provided with a movable character 24 for executing a rendering operation according to the development status of the game. The movable accessory 24 includes a driving source such as a stepping motor or a solenoid. Further, the center decoration 22 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light in accordance with the development status of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are collectively referred to as a "production lamp LP".

  Subsequently, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, a back set board 30 having a window that communicates with the front and rear at substantially the center and formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2 is detachably attached. Each part of the back setting board 30 is connected to the storage tank 31 for storing a large number of gaming balls, the tank rail 32 extending with a gentle downward slope from the storage tank 31, and the right end of the tank rail 32 The ball supply passage 33 extending in the direction, the prize ball payout unit 34 paying out the gaming balls guided by the ball feed passage 33, the prize for guiding the gaming balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper bowl 6 A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM in an integrated manner, an effect control board 200 for controlling the overall effects, image display according to the game development, control of sound effects An image control board 300 or the like is attached. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 constitute a liquid crystal unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device (liquid crystal display device) 70. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, the payout control board 400 that performs control related to the launch and payout of the game balls, and the power received from the game facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. A power supply board 500 or the like is attached. These control boards are assembled at a predetermined position on the back of the game board 20 or the back setting board 30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin base case having a caulking structure and a sealing structure to prevent tampering. Arranged. The control board and the electric / electronic parts of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are mutually connected via a harness (connector cable), and the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Control configuration of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area and buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, a peripheral board, A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 including an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting and outputting signals to and from the device is mounted, and the main CPU 101 executes a game according to a control program stored in the ROM 102 It is configured to carry out the main control of the progression. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and is reset when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out. Operates as a separate system from the WDT circuit that recovers to a normal state, the CTC circuit that enables the occurrence of real-time interrupts and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101, and generates a predetermined random number (internal random number) A random number generation circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 executes various processing related to main control of the game by reading various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performing arithmetic processing based on detection information and the like from each switch. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a nonvolatile storage unit that is backed up by a backup power supply (VBB) generated in the power supply substrate 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of the power shutdown when the power shutdown occurs. ), The state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before power-off based on the information in the backup area.

  The main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first big prize port switch 641, the second big prize port switch 651, and the like. The detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. The main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol hold lamp 73, a second special figure hold lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a general figure hold lamp. 76, and is further electrically connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 623 and the special electric accessory solenoids 643, 653, and is controlled by the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Signals are transmitted to various display means and various solenoids.

  The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. The various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, which are connected as possible. Data cannot be transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to game effects based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores an effect control program and various data, a work area that is a temporary storage area, Equipped with a rendering control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 that includes a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. The sub main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control relating to a game effect according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. Other, production control board 200
Although not shown in the figure, a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and when the sub-main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs away, it is reset to return to a normal state Equipped with a WDT circuit that outputs, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and a serial communication circuit that inputs and outputs serial data These are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 is an effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command for instructing the image and sound to the image control board 300, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and image control commands related to images and sound are transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 is transmitted via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the production control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronized serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions in response to a lamp control signal for LED driving transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off the switches in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Thus, the drive current is supplied to or shut off from the effect lamp LP to perform control to turn on or turn off the effect lamp LP.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching on / off the switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for the accessory drive transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, control is performed so that each movable accessory 24 is operated by being shut off. The data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processes related to image effects based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, and a work area that is a temporary storage area. And an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 that includes a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control related to the image effect according to the control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the image control board 300 has a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301 and an effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and transmits a video signal (image data) generated by image processing to the effect display device. The VPD is connected to a high-speed VRAM used for developing / processing image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the audio ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by synthesizing the data to the speaker 11 via the amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 mainly includes a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. The payout payout unit 34 is driven based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out a prize ball. The ball feed mechanism 13 and the launch mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the amount of operation of the launch handle 12 to execute control of the launch of the gaming ball.

  Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used by each control board based on a primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility of the game island, and a backup power supply. A backup power supply circuit for generating (VBB) and a power cut-off monitor circuit for monitoring a power cut-off due to a voltage drop are provided, and they are used for electronic and electric parts such as control boards and gaming machines. Supply necessary power. The power supply substrate 500 is connected to a power supply switch for activating a power supply circuit, and assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, the power supply substrate is turned on when the power supply switch is turned on. A predetermined power supply is supplied from a normal power supply circuit 500 to each control board or the like. The power supply substrate 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device on the gaming island has been cut off, and when the power supply is disconnected, the power control signal (NMI signal) notifying that effect is used as the main control substrate 100. , And the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged when power is supplied from the power supply device on the gaming island to the pachinko gaming machine PM. The power supply substrate 500 is also connected with a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control substrate 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500, for example.

<Basic operation of pachinko machines>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the gaming island of the gaming facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, the bowl unit 6 and the like are closed and locked. The game is started by storing the game ball in the upper ball tray 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is turned, the gaming balls stored in the upper bowl 8 are shot one by one by the ball feed mechanism 13 (see FIG. 3) disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. It is sent out to 14 (refer to FIG. 3), and is launched into the game area PA by the launch mechanism 14.

  When a game ball rolling down in the game area PA enters one of the first starting port 61, the second starting port 62, the first major winning port 64, and the second major winning port 65, the type of the winning port The award ball corresponding to is paid out to the upper ball tray 8 or the lower ball tray 9 by the prize ball payout unit 33. When a game ball enters the first start port 61 or the second start port 62, a lottery random number value of a special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as a reserved ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. And when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the success / failure determination of special symbol, the symbol determination, and the change pattern determination are performed on the lottery random number value related to the first holding ball, and in the mode according to the determination result, 1 The special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The variation display of the special symbol and the decoration symbol is synchronously stopped after the lapse of the variation time according to the selected variation pattern.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined and displayed in the stop mode indicating a big hit, it shifts to the special game which is a game state advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first large winning opening 64 or the second Opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65 is started. The stop aspect of the decorative symbol indicating a big hit is, for example, an aspect in which the types of three symbols match. In the present embodiment, as special games, 16R special games set to 16 rounds (16 rounds), 8R special games set to 8 rounds (8 rounds), and 2 round games 2R special games set in (2 rounds) are provided.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether the transition is made to the 16R special game, the 8R special game, or the 2R special game, the probability variation of the special symbol after the special game ends until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined end number. The function (also called "probability") operates uniformly. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine called a so-called “ST machine”, which is a time-changing probability changing machine with a probability changing entry rate of 100%. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol does not continue until the next big hit, but a period until the predetermined end number (also referred to as “ST number”) is reached (also referred to as “ST period”). ). When the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the special symbol lottery jackpot probability shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (special game) occurs relatively early. Become.

  On the other hand, after the special game is over, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "time saving") may be operated together with or independently of the probability variation function of the special symbol. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time is improved (per jackpot per unit time). Can increase the ease of acquisition).

  Furthermore, when the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the electric chew support function is activated. In the electric chew support function, the probability of entering the second starting port 62 is improved by the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the normal electric accessory 622 opening extension function being activated. This is a state (also referred to as “easy entry state”). Note that when the probability variation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is reduced. When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 622 becomes longer than the normal state. In this easy-to-enter-ball state, the possibility of increasing the number of times of fluctuation of the normal symbol per fixed time more than usual is increased, and the ease of entering the second start-up opening 62 is also improved. The possibility that the number of balls entering will increase. Therefore, as a result of the chance to obtain a winning ball by entering the second starting opening 62 during that period by the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chow support function, the number of holding balls is hardly reduced. The game can be continued.

<Main functional configuration of pachinko machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly, the main control board 100 / the effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG. 4 additionally.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 is a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, an advance determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, an ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145, The special game control unit 150, the symbol display control unit 155, the electric role control unit 160, the game state control unit 165, the error monitoring control unit 170, the main information storage unit 180, and the command transmission / reception unit 190. The above-described units in the main control board 100 are constituted by the main CPU 101, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the hardware such as the electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 102 or the like. Is a functional representation of things.

  The ball entrance judging means 110 is each based on detection signals from the first starting opening switch 611, the second starting opening switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first large winning opening switch 641, the second large winning opening switch 651, etc. Judgment of game balls entering the winning opening.

  The game lottery random number generation means 120 is used for the success or failure lottery of the special symbol by taking in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding the soft random number per special symbol described later to this. Generate random numbers per special symbol. The game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. As this software random number, a soft random number per special symbol added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to make a random number per special symbol, a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining an initial value and an end value of soft random number per special symbol, A special symbol per symbol special symbol used to determine a winning symbol (combination of symbols that will activate the condition device) as a stop symbol of a special symbol Special symbol for determining the initial value and end value of a symbol random number per symbol special symbol per symbol special symbol The initial value random number per pattern, the special pattern variation pattern random number for use in selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the random number per ordinary symbol for use in the lottery of the normal symbol, the initial value and the end value of the random number per ordinary symbol Includes initial value random numbers per normal symbol to determine, normal symbol variation pattern random number to use for selection of variation pattern of ordinary symbols, etc. That. These software random numbers are updated once every time timer interrupt processing occurs, and the remaining time of the interrupt cycle is maintained even when timer interrupt processing is not being executed for the initial value random number (during loop processing). Update using.

  The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132.

  The special symbol hold control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to special symbol games, which is a random number value per special symbol, per special symbol, when the game ball enters the first start port 61 or the second start port 62. The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means that combines the action holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (4) with the entering order of the holding balls. The first special symbol reservation storage area of 180 or the second special symbol reservation storage area is temporarily stored.

  In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), the hold 2 storage area (2 A first pending storage area), a pending 3 storage area (third pending storage area), and a pending 4 storage area (fourth pending storage area) are provided. Each pending storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a special symbol random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set of operation pending ball information. The operation holding ball information is stored in order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area, holding 3 storage area, holding 4 storage area, while holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area, holding 3 storage area, holding 4 storage Digested in order of area (first-in first-out principle). In addition, when the holding ball information of the holding 1 storage area is digested, the holding ball information stored in the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area is shifted to the lower number storage area, The contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

  Further, the special symbol hold control means 131 has a first special symbol hold ball number counter for counting the number of active reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol for counting the number of active hold balls of the second special symbol. It has a symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol hold control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one special reserved action ball is acquired as an update process of the number of special reserved action balls. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

Also, when the special symbol retention control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, an effect control command ("symbol storage") including update information of the number of pending balls. This is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information of both the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. In addition, as a general rule, although operation reserve balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entering the ball, in this embodiment, the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed over the first special symbol In order to adopt so-called preferential digestion, while there is an operation reservation ball related to the second special symbol game, regardless of the presence of the operation reservation ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reservation related to the second special symbol game It is configured to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, if there is an operation retaining ball of the second special symbol, even if there is an operation retaining ball of the first special symbol, the digestion of the operation retaining ball of the first special symbol is Will be put on hold.

  The normal symbol hold control means 132 is triggered by the entrance of the game ball into the operation gate 63, and is a lottery random value related to the normal symbol game. The random number value is acquired, and the random number value is normally managed as the operation pending ball information of the symbol. The normal symbol holding control unit 132 stores the normal symbol operation holding ball information in the normal symbol holding storage area of the main information storage unit 180 in a form combined with the order of entering the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (four). Temporarily store. Also, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one normal operating symbol holding ball is acquired as an update process of the number of operating normal symbol holding balls, and one operating holding ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  The pre-determination unit 135 executes a pre-determination for a pre-reading notice when the operation holding ball having a special symbol is acquired at a predetermined pre-determination timing. As an example of the pre-determination timing, (1) when waiting for hitting and when the action holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for hitting and When the support function acquires the operation reserving ball of the second special symbol while operating, (3) when the operation reserving ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or small hit, either of the conditions It is time to be satisfied. Specifically, the prior determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation reserve ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the lottery for winning or not Pre-determination (pre-determined / unpredictable), symbol lottery pre-determination (design pre-determination), and variation pattern lottery pre-determination (variation pattern pre-determination) are sequentially executed. Although the preliminary determination table used in each preliminary determination is not shown, it is equivalent to the total number of random numbers in the same manner as the lottery table (special symbol pass / fail lottery table, special symbol per symbol table, variation pattern table) described later. The area is divided into a plurality of areas, and a lottery ID is assigned to each area (number of determination values). As this lottery ID, a number indicating the result of prior determination (also referred to as “preliminary determination number”) is set. Then, the preliminary determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a “preliminary determination command”) including information on the preliminary determination result (preliminary determination number) and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. Store.

Special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes special symbol suitability determination means 141, special symbol stop symbol determination means 412, and special symbol variation pattern determination means 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, per random special symbol stored in the first storage area (pending 1 storage area) of the special symbol holding storage area in the main information storage means 180 The numerical value, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number are read out and stored in the special symbol judgment area, the special symbol judgment region, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment region of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, "a variation start condition of a special symbol is satisfied" means, as an example, (1) not being in a big hit or a small hit, (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation It is when all the conditions of being inside, (3) presence of the operation reserving ball in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied, and as a result, the special symbol can start fluctuation It is determined that the situation is not correct.

  The special symbol compliance determination means 141 reads out the random value per special symbol from the special symbol compliance determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the compliance determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of big hit, small hit, and off Decide what to do. The result of this success or failure judgment is temporarily stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, off data “00H”), and used in the subsequent processing After that, it is cleared when the special symbol changes. The special symbol propriety judging means 141 holds a special symbol propriety lottery table which is referred to at the time of this propriety judgment.

  Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol acceptance lottery table, (A) is referred to in a normal state (low probability state), (B) is referred to in a positive change state (high probability state) The In this special symbol success / failure lottery table, random numbers per special symbol and judgment results of big hits, small hits, and losing are associated with each other, and the winning probabilities for big hits and small hits according to the associated random number range Is determined. As can be seen from FIG. 5, in the success or failure lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), it becomes a big hit only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”. On the other hand, the jackpot range is expanded in the probability change state (high probability state), and not only when the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, but also when it falls within the range of “164 to 1639” Become. In other words, when the probability changing function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from the low probability state (1 / 399.6) to the high probability state (1 / 39.96). As described above, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is equal between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In this example, small hits only exist in the first special symbol winning lottery, but for example, small hits are also provided in the second special symbol losing lottery, and from the second special symbol losing lottery However, the winning lottery of the first special symbol may be configured to be a small hit with a high probability.

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs based on the result of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Do. The special symbol stop symbol judging means 142 is a symbol table per first special symbol referred to when deciding the stop symbol and symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the lottery is a big hit It has a symbol table per second special symbol.

  FIG. 6 (A) is a view schematically showing an example of the symbol table per the first special symbol. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the random number of symbols per special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot contents (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of special symbols are activated, first grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouth 64 are associated with one another. The numerical value “100” in parentheses means the number of operations of the special symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function, that is, the ST number. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of jackpot.

  Specifically, symbols “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” have symbol group A (16R specified short-time symbol), symbols “5”, “6” have symbol group B. (8R specified short-lived symbol) is associated with symbols “7” and “8”, respectively, with symbol group C (2R specific short-lived symbol). In this embodiment, the “specific symbol” is a symbol that activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game, and the “normal symbol” refers to that the probability variation function is activated after the end of the special game. There is no symbol (the same applies to the second special symbol described later).

The symbol groups A and B are so-called "perceivable variation hits", which shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to a definite variation state (high probability state), and the number of times the variation of the special symbol is within the ST number A special symbol probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chew support function are provided only until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. Will be. For the symbol group A, the specified number of rounds for the special game is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group B, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 8 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  The symbol group C has the opening count and opening time of the first large winning opening 64 different from the above-mentioned "certain hit", but the gaming state after the end of the special game is changed to the special symbol (high probability state) It is a specific symbol that indicates so-called "sudden probability variation hit" to be transferred, and the next big hit will occur in the ST count while the variation count of the special symbol is finished without generating the big hit in the ST count or In the meantime, a special symbol probability variation function, a variation time shortening function, and an electric chew support function are provided. The specified number of rounds for the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds.

  On the other hand, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a small hit, symbol determination based on random numbers per special symbol is omitted, and symbol "9" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol. A symbol group F (special power operating symbol 1) is associated with the symbol "9". In the case of a small hit, there is no trigger for changing the gaming state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, power chute support function) and fluctuation pattern selection state, and the gaming state is maintained before and after the lottery. Is done. In addition, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss, the symbol "0" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol.

  Subsequently, FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing an example of a symbol table per second special symbol. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the random symbol value per symbol special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol is activated, the second grand prize The operation patterns of the mouths 65) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols "11" to "18" of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups D and E according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, the symbols "11", "12", "13" and "14" indicate that the symbol group D (16R specific short-time fixed symbol) has symbols "15", "16", "17" and " 18 ”is associated with the symbol group E (8R specific time short symbol).

  The symbol groups D and E are special symbols indicating so-called “perceivable variation hits”, which shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to a definite variation state (high probability state), and the number of times of variation of the special symbol is a large hit within the ST number A special symbol probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chew support function are provided only until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. Will be. For the symbol group D, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 16 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 65 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group E, the specified number of rounds in the special game is 8 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 65 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

  On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a small hit, the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol is omitted, and the symbol “19” is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol. The symbol “19” is associated with the symbol group G (special electric operation symbol 2). In the case of a small hit, there is no trigger for changing the gaming state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, power chute support function) and fluctuation pattern selection state, and the gaming state is maintained before and after the lottery. Is done. In addition, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss, the symbol "0" is uniquely assigned as a stop symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, three types of big hit classifications are provided: 16R big hit (16R specific short main symbol), 8R big hit (8R specific short main symbol) and 2R big hit (2R specific short main symbol) ing. The expected value for winning a prize ball in the special game (the expected value for winning a prize ball) is 16R big hit> 8R big hit> 2R big hit. Therefore, hereinafter, the 16R jackpot is also referred to as a “high profit jackpot” having the highest prize ball winning expectation value, and the 2R jackpot is also referred to as a “low profit jackpot” having the lowest prize ball winning expectation value. In addition, even if the same number of execution rounds, when a long open unit game (30 seconds) and a short open unit game (0.05 seconds) are mixed, the big hit with many long open unit games is “high” "Large profit". Specifically, special games that have a common number of execution rounds, such as unifying the number of execution rounds to 16 rounds, may include special games that change so that the mode of unit games differs in a predetermined round, In that case, a special game of a type consisting only of short opening unit games in which the opening times of the big winning openings 64 and 65 are relatively short, and the opening times of the big winning openings 64 and 65 after a predetermined number of execution rounds are relative. The game may include a special game of a type that switches to a long long unit game, and the latter constitutes a "high profit jackpot". Further, even if the same number of execution rounds is a big hit, the substantial profit, that is, the expected value for winning a winning ball may be different depending on the difference in the big winning opening opening pattern.

  Here, as can be understood from the above description, when the big win in the first special symbol lottery, 16R big hit is selected with a probability of 50%, but the second special symbol If you get a big hit in the lottery, the 16R big hit is selected with a probability of 75%, so it is better to win the second start opening 62 than to win the first start opening 61, more balls coming out It is advantageous to the player in that it can be earned. In the present example, the special game for opening and closing the first large winning opening 64 is executed when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol success or failure, and the second special symbol if it becomes a big hit in the second The special game for opening and closing the 2 large winning a prize opening 65 is to be executed, but it is not limited to this, when it becomes a big hit in the judgment of the first special symbol, the 2nd large winning opening 65 A special game for opening and closing may be executed, or a special game for opening and closing the first large winning opening 64 may be executed when a big hit is made in the determination of the second special symbol. Also, in this case, the special game for opening and closing the second large winning opening 65 is executed in the case of becoming a big hit in the second special symbol's success determination than in the case of the first special symbol's success or failure. The rate at which they are Also, at this time, the player may be set to have a higher degree of advantage for the player to enter the second large winning opening 65 than to enter the first large winning opening 64, for example, per round It may be set to have a high count number, a high winning ball acquisition expectation value, a high number of winning balls per ball entering ball, and a high entering ease. Further, even when there are a plurality of jackpots with the same number of special games, the substantial profit (expected ball winning expectation value) may be configured to be different due to the difference in the opening pattern of the big winning opening. The count number (regular count number) is the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the big winning openings 64 and 65 in a unit game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 selects any variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the acceptance lottery. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of types of variation patterns. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a decision value (range of random values) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. The variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation pattern random value belongs to. As for the various variation patterns, the variation time is determined for each variation pattern as an end condition of the symbol variation, and it is assumed that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of multiple symbols is also executed at the variation time. Defined as In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of variation patterns are described as an example, but there are actually 100 or more types of variation patterns.

  FIG. 7A is a view schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for big hit / small hit. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a probability variation variation table, and the lower (A3) is a special variation pattern table. In this example, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to be different according to the fluctuation pattern selection state or according to the jackpot type even in the same fluctuation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table (A1), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, the variation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the variation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected and the variation is 8R big hit Either pattern PY2 (normal reach A) or variation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In this normal variation pattern table for big hits / small hits, non-reach variation patterns are not selected, and only the reach variation pattern is selected when a big or small hit is made in a normal state. obtain.

  In the probability variation pattern table (A2), when the big hit type is 16R big hit or 8R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of 2R big hit or small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ6 (normal reach B) or the fluctuation pattern PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. In this probability variation pattern table for big hits and small hits, non-reach variation patterns are not selected. Can be selected.

  In the special variation pattern table (A3), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX9 (non-reach C) is selected, and when the big hit type is 8R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected. Is done. On the other hand, in the case of the 2R big hit or the small hit, only the variation pattern PZ10 (Super Reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PX9 of the non-reach C mode is configured as a super-shortening variation time (2 seconds), while the variation patterns PY10 and PZ10 of the super reach C mode are configured as relatively long variation times (120 seconds) Is done.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a variation pattern table for loss. Upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, middle (B2) is a probability variation pattern table, and lower (B3) is a special variation pattern table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set differently depending on the variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), any of fluctuation pattern PH1 (non reach A), fluctuation pattern PH2 (normal reach A), fluctuation pattern PH3 (super reach A), and fluctuation pattern PH4 (super reach D) is selected . In the probability variation variation pattern table (B2), one of the variation pattern PH5 (non-reach B), variation pattern PH6 (normal reach B), variation pattern PH7 (super reach B), and variation pattern PH8 (super reach D) is selected . In the special variation pattern table (B3), only the variation pattern PH9 (non-reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PH9 in the non-reach C mode is configured as a very short variation time (2 seconds).

In the above description, the variation pattern table for outliers is expressed as a single table in any case, but when the result of the lottery for the result is out, the number of operation reserved balls of the special symbol ( Different variation pattern tables may be selected depending on 0-4). In other words, by using the variation pattern table according to the number of actuation reserved balls of the special symbol, the larger the number of actuation pending balls is, the higher the ratio for which the relatively short variation time is selected. As a result, a relatively long variation time can be selected.

  In addition, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the variation pattern of the special symbol, and then instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, thus including the variation control pattern information of the special symbol ( Generate a production control command (referred to as a "pattern designation command") including information on a special pattern (design group) and a game state (hereinafter referred to as "variation pattern designation command") (collectively from these production control commands) And stores the command in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The normal symbol lottery processing unit 145 includes a normal symbol success / failure determination unit 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination unit 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148. When the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing unit 145 reads the normal symbol random number value and the normal symbol variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol holding storage area, The main symbol storage area 180 is stored in the normal symbol suitability determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area, respectively.

  The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 reads out the random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180 and executes the yes / no determination, and the determination result corresponds to either hit or off. decide. The result of the success or failure lottery is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, and after being used in the subsequent processing, cleared when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. The normal symbol success / failure determination means 146 holds the normal symbol success / loss lottery table to be referred to in this success / failure lottery, and in a normal state (low probability state), for example, a hit normally with probability of 160/283 For example, in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the normal symbol with reference to the symbol success lottery table, for example, with reference to the normal symbol success lottery table which will be hit with the probability of "282/283", execute the regular lottery of the normal symbol To do.

  The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and assigns a predetermined hit symbol if the result of the success or failure lottery is a hit, but assigns a predetermined lost symbol if it is an offset. It has become.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148 reads the normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, and refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table to display the variation display of the normal symbol in the normal state. In, a relatively long variation time is selected (for example, seven types of “4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds” are uniformly selected). On the other hand, a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, "0.5 seconds") is selected in the time-shortened state of the ordinary symbol (the ball entry easy state).

The special game control means 150 relates to the start demonstration effect and the end demonstration effect that are displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the special game according to the determined type of jackpot when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Determine the demonstration time. In addition, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute a start demonstration effect (referred to as a "big hit start demonstration command") and an effect to instruct execution of an end demonstration effect. A control command (referred to as “big hit end demo command”) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Note that the jackpot start demo command also serves as an opportunity to determine the contents of a series of jackpot effects (start demo effect, round effect, end demo effect) developed during the special game on the effect control board 200 side. The special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the special game. This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on detection of the big prize opening switches 641, 651, and the like.

  In addition, the special game control means 150, when the result of the success or failure lottery is a small hit, during the small hit game demo demonstration time according to the small hit start demonstration effect and the small hit end demonstration effect displayed on the effect display device 70 etc decide. In addition, special game control means 150, production control command ("small hitting start demonstration command") which instructs execution of small hitting start demonstration production, production control command which instructs execution of small hitting end demonstration production ("small hitting An end demonstration command “) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and confirms and displays the first special symbol after the variation display. Let Further, the special symbol display control means 156 displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operation states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage unit 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the decoration symbol when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (that is, when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). An effect control command (referred to as “variation stop command”) is generated. The normal symbol display control means 157 variably displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 75 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol, and displays the regular symbol after the variation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

  If the result of the special symbol winning / losing lottery is a big win, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoids 643 and 653 as a special game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed. The motorized components 642, 652 are opened in accordance with a predetermined operation pattern. In the special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652 is set as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for the specified number of rounds (16R, 8R, 2R in this example). It is. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a special winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessories 642 and 652 (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, when the type of jackpot is a so-called 16R jackpot (symbol group A, D) or 8R jackpot (symbol group B, E), the first grand prize port 64 or the second grand prize port in one round game. Allow 65 to open for up to about 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the big hit type is so-called 2R big hit (symbol group C), the first big winning opening 64 is opened for about 0.05 seconds at the maximum in one round game. Here, the closing condition of the special winning openings 64 and 65 in the special game (unit game ending condition) is a lapse of a winning period for a predetermined number of game balls or a predetermined number of seconds.

In addition, when the result of the lottery of special symbol turns into a small hit, the electric role control means 160 controls the special electric position solenoid 643, 653 as a small hit game processing after the final display of the special symbol. The special electric combination 642, 652 is opened only for a short period. A small hit game is distinguished from a special game consisting of a plurality of round games in that it is comprised of a single round game. Here, when the 2R special game and the small hit game described above are compared, although they are internally different, the point of the same opening / closing time (0.05 seconds) and the number of times of opening / closing are the same (the former is Since one opening and closing is common to two rounds of two rounds and the latter is two rounds per opening and round two rounds), the game of an open time and opening pattern similar in appearance is unfolded.

  In addition, when the winning combination of normal symbols is won, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 623 to open the ordinary electric accessory 622 for a predetermined opening time. Here, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the ordinary electric accessory 622 for an extremely short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, whereas it is normally electric in the easy to enter state (electric chew support state). The accessory 622 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) compared to the normal state.

  The game state control means 165 determines the game state after the end of the special game based on the type of the symbol group pertaining to the big hit, when the result of the lottery of special symbols is a big hit, and after the end of the special game Switch the game state of. In the following, among various functions relating to the special symbol and the normal symbol described above, 1) the gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the power chew support function operate is referred to as "probable variation state", 2) A game state in which only the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chow support function operate is referred to as "time saving state", and 3) a game state in which only the special symbol probability fluctuation function is activated is referred to as "latency probability change state" 4) A state in which all functions are not activated is referred to as a "normal state". It should be noted that the “probability change state”, “time-short state”, and “latency probability change state” are all advantageous game states for the player as compared to the “normal state”. In addition, in the following, each gaming state, the combination of the operating state of the special symbol game (high probability / low probability) and the operating state of the normal symbol game (with open extension / without open extension) (1) probability variation state "High Probability / Open Extension", (2) Time Short State "Low Probability / Open Extension", (3) Latent Probability Change State "High Probability / Non-Open Extension", (4) Normal State "Low Probability / Unopened It may be called "extension". Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since it is a so-called ST machine that cuts the number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game has a predetermined number of times that the number of changes in the special symbol is counted from the end of the special game, In other words, the probability variation state continues until the number of STs is reached (however, if the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the probability variation state ends with the variation). When the small hit is made during the ST period, the ST number is not reset (revived) to 0, and the ST number is continuously counted before and after the small hit occurs. In the present embodiment, the number of times ST is set to 100, but of course it may be set to another number. In addition, when changing to the probability variation state, the probability variation function of the special symbol, the special symbol variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate simultaneously, and each function will continue as long as the probability variation state continues. Become. In addition, if the result of the lottery of special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the game state before the big hit is either the normal state or the probability change state, it is the normal state during the special game and ST after the special game It becomes definite variation state uniformly to the limit. On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, if the gaming state before the small hit is a normal state, the gaming state in the small hit game and after the small hit game will also be a normal state. In addition, when the gaming state before the small hit is the special symbol probability changing state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the special symbol probability changing state.

Further, when the result of the lottery is a big hit, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type (type of symbol group A to E) of the big hit, as well as the special Switch the variation pattern selection state after the game. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting the above-mentioned variation pattern table. The switching timing of the variation pattern selection state is at the end of the special game or when the number of terminations of the variation pattern selection state has expired. In the present embodiment, there are three types of fluctuation pattern selection states such as “low probability normal fluctuation state α”, “high probability shortening fluctuation state β”, and “high probability special fluctuation state γ”. Here, the low probability normal fluctuation state α refers to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1, B1 in FIG. 7) selected when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). It is a state to decide. The high probability shortening fluctuation state β refers to the probability variation fluctuation pattern table (A2, B2 in FIG. 7) selected when the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol (except for the limited period described later), and the special symbol It is a state of determining the fluctuation pattern. The high probability special fluctuation state γ is the number of times of symbol fluctuation corresponding to the maximum number (four) of the operation holding balls of the second special symbol after the gaming state is the definite variation state of the special symbol and immediately after the end of the special game. (4 times) Over the fluctuation display: In the state where the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the special fluctuation pattern table (A3, B3 in Fig. 7) where selection is allowed only for the "limited period". is there. In this embodiment, even when any of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the variation pattern selection state is (1) immediately after the end of the special game, the high probability special variation state γ only for the limited period of four symbol variations. Stay, (2) after the end of the limited period, and when the number of times of execution is within the ST number (100 times), stay in the high probability shortening fluctuation state β, (3) after the end of the ST number, ie, As the number of times of execution, after the 101st time, it stays in the low probability normal fluctuation state γ. Of course, the period until the first hit occurs is to stay in the low probability normal fluctuation state α. In addition, the gaming state control means 165 generates a production control command (referred to as a "gaming state designation command") including the current gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command of the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

  The error monitoring control unit 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame opening signal, and the like. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command including the error information (“error effect designation command”) is requested to indicate an error state effect to the effect control board 200. Although not shown in FIG. 3, the door opening switch is a detecting unit for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is opened, and the frame opening switch is a detecting unit for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is opened. The back set release switch is a detecting means for determining whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a so-called goto action.

  The main information storage means 180 stores random number value information acquired in special symbol games and normal symbol games, operation holding ball information of special symbols and normal symbols, game states related to special symbol games and normal symbol games (probability change state, time reduction state, Information on easy entry), information on variation pattern selection status, result information on winning / failing lottery (win, small hit, off), information on stop and variation patterns on special symbols and regular symbols, information on special games (round) Number, release time, release mode (number of releases per round game), etc.), status information indicating the operating state of the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 642, production control command It is configured to temporarily store data information and the like, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

  The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. Bit 7 of the MOD data is “1” to distinguish MODE and EVENT. Bit 7 of the EVENT data is “0”. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output for each of MODE and EVENT. In principle, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted for each interrupt period in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 includes an effect lottery random number generation means 210, an effect control means 220, a lamp effect control means 230, a feature effect control means 240, and an error effect control means 2.
50, sub-main information storage means 260, and command transmission / reception means 270. The above-described means in the effect control board 200 are constituted by the sub main CPU 201, the ROM 202, the RAM 203, the hardware such as the electronic circuit disposed on the effect control board 200, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 202. Is a functional representation of things.

  The effect lottery random number generation means 210 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub main CPU 201. These random number counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. This software random number includes the prefetching notice lottery random number used for the lottery of whether or not the prefetching notice effect can be executed, the prefetching notice pattern random number used for selecting the prefetching notice pattern, the decoration design random number used for selecting the stop pattern of the decoration design, the decoration Fluctuation effect pattern random number used for selection of design variation effect pattern, notice effect pattern random number used for selection of notice effect pattern, jackpot effect pattern random number used for selection of jackpot effect pattern, whether or not to execute execution of rendezvous villa effect It includes a continuous random effect production random number used for a lottery, a continuous continuous character effect pattern random number used to select a continuous local effects pattern of on-hold internal continuous effects effects, and the like. The update time of these random numbers is updated using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the production control side main process described later.

  The effect supervising means 220 includes an effect mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a prefetch notice control means 223, a decorative symbol determination means 224, a variable effect determination means 225, a notice effect determination means 226, and a big hit effect determination means 227. Including.

  The holding information display control means 222 is a first holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second number holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the holding information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the first holding sphere number counter and the second holding sphere number counter are based on the information of the operation holding sphere number included in the symbol storage number command. Update the value of the number counter. In addition, the hold information display control unit 222 applies the action hold ball of the first special symbol to the hold display portions 701 and 702 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed to display the number of reserved images corresponding to the number and the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of active reserved balls of the second special symbol. In the normal display mode, while the white-displayed reserve image is displayed when the operation reserve ball of the special symbol is generated, it becomes the target of the advance notice when the reserve change look-ahead notice effect described next is executed. The reserved image can take one of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" as a special display mode (display color) from "white" in the normal display mode (display color) . The above four kinds of special display modes are related to the reliability that the lottery result is a big hit (referred to as "big hit reliability"), and "blue", "green", "red" and "rainbow" It is set so that the big hit reliability becomes high one by one in order. In this example, when the reserved image changes to “rainbow”, the big hit is deterministic in the pre-reading operation holding ball. Note that in the pending change pre-reading advance notice effect, the change in the display mode of the pending image may be expressed not by the display color but by a shape, a pattern, or the like.

Pre-read notice control means 223 determines whether or not to execute pre-read notice by lottery at the time of receiving the pre-determination command from main control board 100. The prefetch notice control means 223 distinguishes the information of the prior determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the prior decision result of the second special symbol, and enters the ball for the operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number (four) respectively. It is temporarily stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 in a form combined with the order. This prefetch information storage area has the same configuration as the pending storage area of the main control board 100, and the pending 1 storage area (the first pending storage area) in the order of ball entry into the starting ports 61 and 62, A reserve 2 storage area (second reserve storage area), a reserve 3 storage area (third reserve storage area), and a reserve 4 storage area (fourth reserve storage area) are provided. Each of the pending storage areas can store information on the result of the preliminary determination of the success or failure, information on the result of the preliminary determination of the symbol, and information on the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern as one set.

  When the prefetching notice control means 223 determines whether or not the prefetching notice can be executed, the prefetching notice control means 223 makes a prefetching judgment (“prefetching judgment”) for the operation holding ball that is the target of the prefetching notice based on the prejudgment result by the main control board 100. (Also called). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading advance notice includes a normal pre-reading advance notice and a special pre-reading advance notice (represented in-president rendition effect described later). The normal pre-reading advance notice is generated as one mode of so-called continuous advance notice effect of giving notice of the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit or reach effect over a plurality of continuous change displays of the decorative symbol. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) is executable, the information of the pre-determination command from the main control board 100 (result of the pre-judgment) and the information of the symbol memory number command (the number of existing operation pending balls) After analysis, an advance notice effect pattern for a plurality of continuous variable displays is determined by lottery for the operation holding ball (referred to as “trigger hold”) serving as a trigger for generating the advance notice effect of this time. Note that there are various variations in the normal advance notice, such as a pending change advance notice effect, a chance eye advance notice effect, and a background change advance notice effect. On the other hand, the special look-ahead notice corresponds to a reserved-in-village production that suggests or informs that there is a possibility that there is an operation holding ball that becomes a big hit when the big hit is won. Hereinafter, an outline of the “reserved in-resort villa production” will be described.

  First, the “holding renrenso” means that, when a success / failure determination result is obtained when a certain operation holding ball has been digested, the winning / failing determination related to the operation holding ball is permitted until the end of the special game. This means that there is an operation holding ball (also referred to as “specific holding”) that is expected to be a big hit in one or more subsequent operation holding balls that exist at a predetermined timing within a specific period. In the following, among the subsequent operation holding balls, the operation holding balls that are expected to be out of play are also referred to as “out of hold”, and the operation holding balls that are expected to be in a small hit are also referred to as “small hit holding”. .

  In the present embodiment, so-called preferential digestion is adopted, in which the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation reservation ball of the first special symbol, and the subsequent operation that is the target of the in-hold extension resort As the holding ball (specific holding), the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is targeted. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the preferential digestion for preferentially digesting the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol is adopted, the pending inside-train unit is selected when the preceding operation retaining ball is won by the big hit. It occurs on the assumption that the gaming state is a specific gaming state. The “specific game state” is a state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal state, and is at least one of a special symbol probability variation function, a special symbol variation time reduction function, and an electric chew support function. It is the state in which the function of In this example, it is a condition that at least the electric chew support function (the easy entry state) is activated as the specific gaming state. Here, in this embodiment, during the ST period after the end of the special game, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate (the operation starts simultaneously and the operation ends simultaneously). Since it is configured, it can be said that it is always in a specific gaming state during the ST period. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the result of the determination is a probable big hit (when the special game is finished, the situation is shifted to the specific gaming state), the subsequent Even if the specific hold exists in the operation hold ball, it is configured such that the hold inside row effect is not generated during the special game.

  Subsequently, the “reserved-in-ream resort production” is an effect for suggesting or notifying that it is a reserved-in-ream resort. In this on-hold renso production, there are a first on-hold renso production (referred to as “on-hold renso production A”) that occurs during symbol variation and a second on-hold renso production that occurs during special games. It includes an effect (referred to as "pending in-line consecutive effect B"). In addition, in this embodiment, although both the 1st on-hold consecutive villa production and the 2nd on-hold consecutive villa production are provided, you may provide either one of the on-hold consecutive villa production. .

  Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort production A can be executed is determined by lottery when the first execution condition is satisfied at the timing when the preceding operation holding ball is digested. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and the specific hold that becomes the high profit big hit (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball is the first specific hold. If included, the first execution condition is satisfied. In other words, even if there is a specific hold (scheduled to be a big hit) in the subsequent operation hold, if the big hit type related to the specific hold is not a high profit big hit, Not run. Furthermore, “In the situation where there are multiple specific holds in the subsequent operation hold, the jackpot type related to the first specific hold is not a high profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the next specific hold is a high profit jackpot. Even in the case, the on-hold consecutive resort production A is not executed. Therefore, in this example, when the on-hold extended villa production A occurs, it becomes deterministic to perform the on-hold extended villa with a high profit big hit (16R big hit). Even if a specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the hold scheduled to be digested before that specific hold is “lost. Even in the case of a specific variation pattern (if it is a variation pattern for a predetermined time or more, for example, a variation pattern other than the shortest variation time or a variation pattern related to reach) is to be selected, A may not be executed.

  Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort production B can be executed is determined by lottery when the second execution condition is satisfied at the timing before the start of the special game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the preceding operation reserving ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), and in the subsequent operation reserving ball except that the specific reserving is included in the subsequent operation reserving ball, Even in this case, it is assumed that the second execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, it may not be determined that it is the on-hold consecutive villa production, and a so-called gasse production may occur. Similarly to the on-hold consecutive villa production A, when the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, a configuration in which the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definite may be adopted. Similarly to the on-hold consecutive villa production A, when the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs, a configuration in which the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definite may be adopted. In addition, also in pending U-Ran effects B, as with the pending U-R elements C, it is premised that the preceding operation holding ball will be a high profit jackpot (16R big hit), and high profit within the subsequent operation holding ball The second execution condition may be satisfied when a specific hold that is a big hit (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold. In other words, even if there is a specific hold (= hold scheduled to become a big hit) in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type pertaining to the specific hold is not a high profit big hit, then the pending internal connection effect B is Not executed. Further speaking, "under a situation where there are multiple specific suspension within the operation suspension, the big hit type related to the first specific suspension is not a high profit big hit and the big hit type related to the next specific suspension is a high profit big hit Even in the case, the on-hold consecutive resort production B is not executed. Therefore, in this case, when the on-hold extended resort production B occurs, it is definite to perform the on-hold extended resort with a high profit big hit (16R big hit). In addition, even if a specific hold that will be a high profit jackpot (16R big hit) is included as the first specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, the reserve scheduled for digestion will be "the loss before the specific hold" However, if it is a specific fluctuation pattern (if it is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time or longer, for example, a fluctuation pattern other than the shortest fluctuation time or a fluctuation pattern related to reach) is planned to be selected " It is good also as a structure which does not perform B.

The prefetch advance notice control unit 223 refers to the information of the prior determination result stored in the prefetch information storage area (pending 1 storage area, pending 2 storage area, pending 3 storage area, pending 4 storage area) of the sub main information storage unit 260 Then, the prefetch determination is performed in the order of the pending 1 storage area → pending 2 storage area → pending 3 storage area → pending 4 storage area, that is, from the first one among the subsequent operation pending balls, In the case where a plurality of specific holds are included in the operation hold ball, the prefetch determination of the on-hold extended game effect A only targets the earliest specific hold, while the pre-read determination of the on-hold extended game effect B Let's target multiple specific holds. In other words, while the number of specific reservations notified in the reservation internal arrangement effect is always one, the number of specific reservations indicated in the internal arrangement effect B is not limited to one and a plurality There are also possible times.

  Subsequently, the content of the rendezvous renso production effect (referred to as “renso rendition pattern”) is determined on the basis of the rendezvous production pattern table. In this example, a plurality of types of consecutive-village effect pattern tables that are referred to when determining the consecutive-village effect pattern are held.

  FIG. 8A shows the extended villa production pattern table to be referred to when selecting the extended villa production pattern of the on-hold extended villa production A, and FIG. It is a consecutive resort production pattern table referred when doing. A plurality of continuous play effect patterns are defined in each continuous play effect pattern table, and the contents of the effect and the execution timing are determined corresponding to each continuous play effect pattern. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining the villa effect pattern according to the villa effect pattern random value Is set, and based on which judgment value the continuous rendering effect pattern random value belongs to, the continuous rendering effect pattern is determined. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, effect images AX and BX are prepared as specific effect modes of the on-hold consecutive resort effect, but the “effect image” is composed of a still image. An effect image, an effect image composed of moving images, and an effect image composed of both still images and moving images can be exemplified.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of effect patterns PA1 and PA2 are defined in the effect pattern table of the on-premises consecutive effect A effect. When the consecutive pattern effect pattern PA1 is selected, a special effect image “AX1” which does not appear in any scene other than the reserved in-line consecutive condition effect is displayed during the change of the decorative symbol. As shown in FIG. 9A, the effect image AX1 corresponds to, for example, an effect in which a shooting star crosses the screen while the decorative design changes. As shown in FIG. 9 (B), a special jackpot symbol “S ····, which does not appear in any other scenes, as a final stop symbol of the decorative symbol, when the“ Ren-so effect pattern P2 ”is selected. An effect in which “S · S” is displayed is determined.

  In addition, in this example, in the reserved in-rendition zone effect A, the preceding operating reservation ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit), and the high profit big hit (16R specific big hit) in the subsequent operation holding ball. Occurs only when a specific hold is scheduled. Therefore, it is determined that the high profit jackpot is continuous at the time of the occurrence of the pending inner row effect A.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, a plurality of effect patterns PB1 to PB9 are defined in the effect pattern table of the pending internal connection effect B. When the effect pattern PB1 is selected, a special effect image “BX1” which does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold in-place effect is displayed during the start demonstration effect. As shown in FIG. 9C, in the start demonstration effect, character information "bonus" is displayed as the effect image BX1. When the effect patterns PB2 to PB7 are selected, a special effect image “BX2” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold consecutive villa effect during the round effect is displayed. As shown in FIG. 9D, as the effect image BX2, for example, an effect in which one image imitating a copy book appears on the screen corresponds to the effect image BX2. When the effect pattern PB8 is selected, a special effect image "BX3" which does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold in-line consecutive effect is displayed during the round effect. As shown in FIG. 9E, as the effect image BX3, for example, an effect in which two images imitating a mystery book appear on the screen. Note that this effect pattern PB8 may be selected when there are a plurality of specific suspension within the subsequent operation suspension ball. When the production pattern PB9 is selected, a special production image “BX4” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold Renren production is displayed during the end demonstration production. As shown in FIG. 9 (F), in the end demonstration effect, character information "Omoku-no-Rusetsu" is displayed as the effect image BX4.

As described above, the on-hold consecutive villa production B occurs in any of the start demonstration production, the round production, and the demonstration end production in the series of the big hit production. In addition, there may be a case where only one time (a single round) occurs and a case where a plurality of times (a plurality of rounds) occur within a plurality of round effects. In addition, in this example, on-hold consecutive resort production B is a case where a specific hold is included in a subsequent operation hold ball on the premise that the preceding operation hold ball is a high profit big hit (16R specific big hit). In addition, it may occur even when a specific hold is not included in a subsequent operation hold ball (that is, only a hold off). That is, the production patterns PB1 and PB9 that are selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the start demonstration production and the end demonstration production can be selected only when specific suspension (one piece) is included. For this reason, the production patterns PB2 to PB8 that are selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the round production correspond to the production that informs the confirmation of the on-hold consecutive resort. Not only when 2 pieces are included, but because it can be selected even when no specific hold is included, it corresponds to an effect that indicates the possibility of holding inside a row. Therefore, even if a mystery book (one or two) appears as the reservation-in-rensou production B, the reservation-in-rensou is not necessarily fixed, and when the reservation-in-rensou production B related to the mystery book occurs. In the following operation hold ball, there is a specific hold (when the notification of the on-hold consecutive villa is true) and there is no specific hold (when the notification of the on-hold consecutive resort is Gase) It can occur alternatively. In addition, the production patterns PB2 to PB7 selected as the on-hold consecutive resort production B that occurs during the round production can be selected when one specific hold is included or when no specific hold is included. Therefore, the effect image BX2 corresponding to this can notify only the possibility that one specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball, whereas the effect pattern PB8 has a plurality of specific hold As it may be selected if it is included or not included in the specific suspension, the corresponding effect image "BX3" may have a possibility that a plurality of specific suspension is included in the subsequent operation retaining ball. It can be informed. That is, the number of specific holds included in the subsequent operation hold ball is suggested to the player in a form corresponding to the number of secret books.

  In addition, when the on-hold extended game effect occurs, that is, when a big hit occurs in each of the preceding operation holding ball and the subsequent operation holding ball, a plurality of special games may occur in a short period of time. When scheduled, a special continuous effect for making these special game states appear as one special game state in appearance is generated. In other words, the special continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the special game continues during the symbol variation effect, even though the special game has actually ended once and has shifted to the symbol variation effect. It is. In this example, for convenience of explanation, two jackpots are assumed as a plurality of jackpots. Here, the big hits and special games based on the preceding active holding balls are also referred to as “first big hits” and “first special games”, and the big hits and special games based on the subsequent active holding balls are called “subsequent big hits” and “after” Also called "special game of".

  The special continuous performance is at least the end demonstration effect in the previous special game ("special end demonstration effect") and the symbol variation effect ("special symbol variation effect") that occurs between the previous special game and the later special game. ) And a start demonstration effect ("special start demonstration effect") in a later special game are continuously connected. Specifically, the special end demonstration production, the special symbol variation production, and the special start demonstration production are executed as a series of continuous productions, and the production has a consistent storyline in the production from the previous special game to the later special game. By setting the content, the relevant presentation content, or a series of moving image display, it can be shown as one special game continued by the first special game and the second special game. For this reason, unlike the normal end demo performance, the special end demo performance at the big jackpot does not display a message to announce the end of the special game, and similarly, the special start demo performance at the subsequent big hit Then, unlike a normal start demonstration production, a message telling the start of a special game is not displayed. In addition, as the above-described modification, the special continuous effect is configured by continuously connecting the end demonstration effect in the previous special game and one or more symbol change effects until the symbol change effect related to the subsequent jackpot. It may be.

In this example, the execution condition of the special continuous performance is that the previous jackpot is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) and the subsequent jackpot is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), that is, the preceding operation holding ball. Is that the 16R jackpot is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball. In addition, when the subsequent operation hold balls are all out of hold, or when the 8R big hit is included as the earliest specific hold in the subsequent operation hold balls, a special continuous effect is produced as a so-called “gasse effect”. End in the middle.

  The special symbol variation effect which constitutes a part of the special continuous effect is generated within a limited period immediately after the end of the special game. Therefore, the content of the special symbol variation effect is based on a variation effect pattern (referred to as a “special variation effect pattern”) selected while staying in the special effect mode. In the present example, the special variation presentation pattern is selected only when the lottery result is the 16R big hit or the loss. That is, in this limited period, when the 16R big hit or lose, a special variation effect in which the variation time is set to 2 seconds shorter than the average variation time (the shortest variation time in this example) occurs. The special variation effect pattern is selected even in the case of a loss, because the earliest specific hold (16R big hit) is not necessarily the earliest in the subsequent operation hold ball, and there is a gap hold between them. However, it is because it is necessary to connect by special variation production until the first specific hold (16R big hit) is digested. Specifically, on the main control board 100 side, there is a transition to the high probability special variation state γ within a limited period after the special game, and the special variation pattern table is referred to in selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. In the special variation pattern table, when the 16R big hit or miss, special variation patterns PX9 and PH9 that both have a very short variation time (2 seconds) are selected. On the side of the effect control board 200, while staying in the special effect mode, the special change effect pattern is selected in association with the change patterns PX9 and PH9, and the special change effect is executed. The reason for configuring the special variation effect from the ultra-short variation time (2 seconds) is to shorten the variation effect that occurs between the previous special game and the later special game, This is to connect seamlessly with the special game later.

  Note that if all of the subsequent operation holding balls are off, a special variation effect will occur during the limited period, but the subsequent big hit (16R big hit) will not occur. It ends with (it becomes so-called production effect). On the other hand, if the subsequent jackpot is an 8R jackpot, a super reach effect will appear during the limited period, and the special continuous effect will end in the middle (so-called “gase effect”), resulting in a high profit jackpot. Is also denied. Therefore, within the limited period, as the variation effect pattern, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is 16R big hit, only the super short variation mode (special variation production: 2 seconds) is selected, whereas when the result is 8R big hit. Since only the long-time variation mode (super reach production: 90 seconds) is selected, it is denied that the high-profit big hits will be held at the time when the decoration pattern variation mode has been developed into a reach production. In addition, when all the subsequent operation hold balls are only out of hold, or when the 8R big hit is included as the first specific hold in the subsequent operation hold balls, the special continuous effect is not executed. It may be configured (i.e., special continuous rendition is generated only when the first specific hold is a 16R big hit). In that case, it is preferable that the specification is such that the on-premises in-line arrangement is determined by the occurrence of the on-off in-line succession effects B without including the gasse effect in the on-hold in-line succession effect B.

  In the present embodiment, the special continuous effect includes a pseudo-count effect that occurs in a round effect in a later special game. This pseudo count effect is displayed by adding the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the previous special game to the number of rounds and the number of winning prize balls in the later special game (details will be described later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are the following constraint conditions for executing the on-hold in-line effect and the special continuous effect (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 38).

  1-1) In the case where the on-hold extended game effect A is generated during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation reserved ball, the on-hold extended game effect B is not generated during the special game after the variable display. The reason for this is that if the on-hold extended villa production B is generated again during the special game, the number of on-hold extended villa times (the number of specific holdings in the subsequent operation holding ball) is one. Regardless, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that there are multiple times, and because in this example it is a reserved area rendezvous production B that is not a confirmed notification effect, the player is worried about whether a retained reed resort will really occur. This is because there is a risk of memorizing it. In addition, even when the on-hold extended rens production A occurs during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation holding ball, the on-hold renso production B is generated during the special game after the variation display. In that case, it is preferable to configure the on-hold consecutive villa production B as a confirmed notification production of the on-hold consecutive villa production.

  1-2) In the case where the on-reserved range rendition effect A is generated during the symbol variation display based on the digestion of the preceding actuated reserve ball, the on-hold ranger during the symbol variation display when the subsequent actuated reserve ball is digested Production A does not occur again. This is because, even when trying to show two special game states as one special game state with the occurrence of the special continuous production, the on-holding renja production A as the symbol variation production occurred during the execution of this special continuous production. Then, it is because there is a possibility that the meaning of concealing that it is under symbol change production may be overwhelmed. In addition, when the special continuous production is started in response to the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the variation time when the subsequent operation holding ball is digested during this special continuous production (within a limited period) is extremely short. Since it is set to (2 seconds), the production effect is low even if the on-hold consecutive resort production A is generated within this short time, and both productions are produced by the competition between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production. This is because the effect may be diluted.

  1-3) In the case where the holding-in-ream zone effect A occurs during the fluctuation display based on the digestion of the preceding operation-holding ball, the reservation-in-ream resort during the jackpot effect when the subsequent operation-holding ball becomes a big hit The effect B can occur. This is because even if it is during the special succession production, if it occurs during the big hit presentation, the player feels that the normal on-hold range resort production B has occurred, and it is not possible to create a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the special continuous production is connected to a series of productions from at least the end demonstration production during the previous jackpot production to the start demonstration production during the subsequent big hit production, This is because there is no inconvenience that the on-hold consecutive villa production and the special continuous production compete with each other as long as the on-hold consecutive villa production is generated at the timing after the round presentation in the special game.

  Based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100, the effect mode control means 221 controls the transition of the effect mode in the form of consistency with the gaming state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Run. In this embodiment, the normal effect mode α, the probability variation effect mode β, and the special effect mode γ are included as three types of effect modes, and the variation patterns of the special symbols instructed from the main control board 100 are the same. In addition, the variation effect pattern (details will be described later) for specifying the specific content of the symbol variation effect is set differently for each effect mode. In the effect display device 70, an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image to be displayed on the back of the decorative symbol) corresponding to the effect mode currently in stay is displayed, and the background images are different for each effect mode Since the setting is made, the player can recognize which one of the effect modes currently in stay is from the type of the background image.

Each production mode will be outlined. First, the normal effect mode α is set when the low probability normal fluctuation state α is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection state on the main control substrate 100 side, and “normal background” is displayed as the background image. The probability variation presentation mode β is set when the high probability shortening variation status β is selected as the variation pattern selection status on the main control substrate 100 side, and “probability background” is displayed as the background image. The special effect mode γ is set when the high probability special fluctuation state γ is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. In this special effect mode, stay for a period of four times (limited period) immediately after the end of the special game as a limit, and when the limited period is exceeded, transition to the probability change effect mode β. If the on-premises on-hold effect B is generated during the special game, that is, if the continuous change effect is being executed, “special background” is displayed as the background image. This special background is common to the background display in the special start demonstration effect and the special end demonstration effect, and as the common background display is performed as a series of processes in the special continuous presentation, it is an element of the special continuous presentation Also works. On the other hand, if the on-hold in-line effect B is not generated during the special game, that is, if the continuous change effect is not executed, the “probable change background” common to the probability change effect mode is displayed as a background image.

  The decorative symbol determination means 224 is a combination of the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol (left symbol, middle symbol,...) Based on the information (variation pattern information, character effect number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. The left symbol is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including multiple types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative pattern is formed of, for example, identification elements consisting of numbers or letters. In this example, ten types such as numbers “1” to “9” and characters “S” are set as identification elements. Each decorative symbol is circulated in the display areas Z1, Z2, and Z3 in the order of “1” → “2” → “3” →... → “8” → “9” → “S” according to the arrangement of symbol rows Display.

  The decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. As the plurality of types of tables, there are a stop symbol pattern table for big hit, a stop symbol pattern table for small hit, a stop symbol pattern table for reach loose, a stop symbol pattern table for non reach loose, and the like. The decorative symbol stop symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes “stop symbol indicating jackpot (big hit symbol)” and “stop symbol indicating loss (loss symbol)”. The big hit symbol indicating the specific big hit (probable big hit) is a combination of stop modes (for example, “7 · 7 · 7”) in which three symbols having the same odd number are arranged. A big hit symbol indicating a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned (e.g., "2.2.2"). The off symbols are a combination of stop modes (for example, “1 · 3 · 8”) in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol of a number different from other numbers. Here, out of reach symbols out of reach reach symbols are combinations of stop modes in which only the middle symbol is shifted several frames forward and back (for example, "3 · 1 · 3") with left symbol and right symbol matched. Become. In the case of a “stop symbol indicating a small hit (small hit symbol)” or a 2R big hit symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, for example, a combination of predetermined stop modes such as “3, 5, 7” is used. There is a case. In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, "S * S * S" is provided as a special big hit symbol for alerting | reporting pending reservation continuously. When it is determined to execute the on-hold consecutive-village effect A, the decorative symbol determining means 224, when the consecutive-village effect pattern PA2 is selected, the normal jackpot symbol ("3.3.3" or the like) Replace the) with the special jackpot symbol ("S · S · S").

Based on the information (variation pattern information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, the variation effect determining means 225 defines the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Determine the presentation pattern. In this embodiment, the design variation effect (reach effect) performed after the reach display includes a reach effect with a simple effect content (normal reach effect) and a reach effect (super reach effect) where the effect content develops in the middle. . The variation effect determining means 225 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol is selected from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. Is selected to correspond to the variation production pattern table corresponding to. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random value and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol (that is, the reach type). Here, a basic pattern (for example, “normal reach A”, “super reach A”, etc.) of the symbol variation is determined as the variation pattern on the main control board 100 side, whereas the variation control pattern on the effect control substrate 200 side A detailed pattern of symbol variation (for example, "normal reach A1, A2, A3 ...", "super reach A1, A2, A3 ...", etc.) defining in detail the scenario of the effect display process based on the basic pattern is determined. In this way, the variation display pattern of the decorative design defines a variation display mode of the decorative design, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of variation of the decorative design to the end of the variation. The timing etc. which generate a preliminary announcement production in a stage are also prescribed as a time schedule. Note that the stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variation effect pattern. In this embodiment, in principle, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, in the case of a fluctuation effect pattern with a short fluctuation time, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a specific fluctuation effect pattern, the order of left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol It can also be stopped. At this time, if it is not the stopping order of the above principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the big hit expectation degree tends to be relatively high.

  The notice effect determining means 226 determines a notice effect pattern defining the contents of the notice effect to be executed at each step of the process of changing the decorative symbol along the above-described scenario of the change effect pattern. The preview effect pattern includes an effect pattern for displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, etc. temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable character, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variation display of the decorative symbol and suggests in advance that the jackpot reliability that the symbol variation stops in the jackpot mode is high. The notice effects include a notice effect performed before the reach state occurs (including when the reach occurs) in the process of changing the decorative symbol, and a notice effect performed after the reach state occurs. The preview effects are different from each other in the big hit reliability, and basically, the big hit reliability in the advance effects displayed after the reach occurrence is relatively larger than that shown before the reach occurrence. It's getting higher. The notice effect determining means 226 holds the notice effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting the notice effect pattern by type of notice effect according to the type of notice effect occurring along the scenario of the change effect pattern. It is designed to select the notice effect pattern table. The notice effect determining means 226 refers to the notice effect pattern table selected above and, based on the notice effect pattern random number obtained from the effect lottery random number generator 210, draws a lot of kinds of notice effect patterns. Choose one. Specific types of preview effect patterns include comment preview effect pattern, background preview effect pattern, SU (step-up) preview effect pattern, group preview effect pattern, cut-in preview effect pattern, feature movable preview effect pattern, Etc. are prepared. This notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing one or a plurality of notice effects with the decorative display of the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the variation display of the decorative symbol by the same variation representation pattern, it becomes possible to generate a variety of representation modes by the combination with one or a plurality of advance presentation.

The big hit effect determination means 227 determines the content (big hit effect pattern) of the big hit effect notifying that it is in the special game. The jackpot effect includes a start demonstration effect for notifying the start of the special game, a round effect for notifying that the game is a round game, and an end demonstration effect for notifying the end of the special game. When the jackpot effect determining means 227 receives the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, the jackpot effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect, etc.) based on the jackpot type information stored in the sub main information storage means 260, etc. Pattern, end demo production pattern). In the jackpot production pattern, a jackpot start demonstration production time, a round production time (production time according to the opening pattern of the big winning openings 64 and 65), and a jackpot end demonstration production time are set according to the type of jackpot. A series of production contents are set along the time axis. In addition, the jackpot effect determining means 227 executes the start demonstration effect in response to receiving the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and receives each round effect designation command as an opportunity. The effect is executed, and the end demonstration effect is executed when the big hit end demonstration command is received.

  Here, in the normal jackpot start demonstration effect, for example, the characters "jackpot start" are displayed on the screen to tell the start of the special game. In a normal round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of winning prize balls on the screen are displayed, and various images (such as animation images) that excite the special game are displayed. Then, in the normal big hit end demonstration effect, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen, and the end of the special game is notified.

  In addition, when a special continuous production is executed, the end demonstration production in the previous jackpot is replaced with a special production content (a production content that has a unity with the special variation production) and the character of the big hit end Do not display In addition, when the special continuous rendition is executed, while replacing the start demonstration rendition in the later big hit from the special rendition contents to the special rendition contents (those with the special variation rendition and the rendition contents), the character of the big hit start Do not display Furthermore, when the special continuous effect is executed, in the round effect in the later special game, it is notified in the form of adding the number of previous special game rounds to the number of execution special rounds in the later special game, and A pseudo-counting effect is performed in which the number of winning balls obtained in the special game above is added to the number of winning balls obtained in the special game. The jackpot effect determination means 227 executes a promotion effect (promotion success effect, promotion failure effect) as a jackpot effect in the special game (details will be described later).

  As described above, the image supervising means 220 controls the image control command for the image and sound based on the determined effect contents (prereading effect pattern, continuous effect pattern, variation effect pattern, advance effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, big hit effect pattern, etc.) Are stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  The lamp effect control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for lighting control of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 25), and a lamp corresponding to the determined effect pattern Data is read out and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection substrate 91.

  The feature effect control means 240 controls the drive of each movable role 24 in accordance with the effect contents set by the effect supervising means 220. The feature effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable role 24 and transmits to the motor driver 92 a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern. To do.

  The error presentation control means 250 is configured to determine an error presentation pattern when an error presentation designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify an occurrence of an error condition in the gaming machine according to the error presentation pattern There is.

  The sub main information storage unit 260 is configured to temporarily store information of a decorative symbol, information of a variation effect pattern, information of a notice effect pattern, information of a control command, and the like, and is a predetermined for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, an image control board 300. ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store this effect control command in the effect control command buffer. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interruption based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100 and executes an effect control command reception interrupt process (details will be described later). In this interrupt process, various effect control commands are sent. To get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the effect control command reception interrupt process preferentially over other interrupt processes (interrupt processes with a priority level less than 7 described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the sub main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (the change effect pattern information, the notice effect pattern information, the decoration symbol information, etc.) set by the effect generalization means 220. The image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by serial communication. In principle, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Thus, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative symbol along the scenario of the change effect pattern. The notice effect is displayed in a manner superimposed on the design variation effect at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

<Process on main control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main control side main processing>
10 to 11 are flowcharts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In the main process on the main control side, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by reset at power-on, the program starts and the processes after S1 are started.

  First, as the initial setting necessary at the time of power on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and the access of the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero cleared in S9 described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is judged whether the information of the power-off normal is stored (S6).

Here, when the information indicating that the power is off normally is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The checksum at power on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated at power off processing described later, so if it is backed up normally, the check at power on is checked. Sam is "0". In this way, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power interruption. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70 and the effect lamp LP, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) is requested to the effect control board 200 (S11).

  Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, power-on normal information setting, various error initial settings, and communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power was correctly turned on, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag and the information on the occurrence of power-off is initialized. Turn off the power-off confirmation flag. Next, a data transfer source address, a data transfer destination address, and a transfer byte number are set, and data corresponding to the transfer byte number is transferred (S13). Then, a special symbol game status value at the time of power-off is read, and a power-off recovery process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a transmission request of the effect control command ("power-off recovery command") at the time of power-off recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power failure recovery command includes information on the inspection of the communication line, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability variations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy entering states, the variation pattern selection status, and the error status. The command request for the unsent part before power-off is cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, the information on the number of suspended balls in the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of suspended balls is requested ( S16).

  Subsequently, return setting is performed to return the normal motorized combination 622 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the second start port 62 is in the open state) (S17). Further, return setting is performed to return the special electric combination 642 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 64 is in the open state) (S18). Subsequently, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol at the time of power-off is set (S19). In addition, a special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to start a timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, in order to inhibit the generation of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt prohibition is set (S21). Then, clear word 1 ("55H") is set as preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power failure has occurred (S23). When the power is not shut off, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number updating process, in this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, interrupt permission is set to permit generation of timer interrupt processing (S25), and the process returns to the processing for prohibiting the above-described interrupt (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process to the generation of the next interrupt process is utilized in S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. When there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is activated when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is on in S23, that is, if the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off process described next.

  Next, as the power-off process (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if it is not the power-on normal information (S27: No), the power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, a complement to the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the processing is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control side timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the main control timer interrupt process of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse every fixed time (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned main control side main process. In addition, as a term used below, the terms "condition device" and "character continuous actuation device" mean conceptual control equipment, and "condition device" means a big hit in the special symbol game The “actual accessory continuous actuating device” is capable of operating the special electric accessory 642 continuously a plurality of times.

  First, when the timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, in order to restart the watchdog timer, clear word 2 ("AAH") is set (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset timeout time, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 executes the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are periodically set, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, information of switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, input information such as the first start port switch 611, the second start port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the big winning port switch 641, the door open switch, the frame open switch, the back set open switch, the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. Is read, and after the state is determined, the detection information is stored.

  Next, various random number update processing is executed (S54). In the various random number update processes, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. As for the normal symbol variation pattern random number, 1 is added to the numerical value of the random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to “0” which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

Next, initial value update type random number update processing is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random numbers per ordinary symbol, the soft random numbers per special symbol, and the symbol random numbers per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0". In addition, when the value of the counter makes one turn, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are subtracted by an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, final display time) relating to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like.

  Next, a second start port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In the second starting port effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 62 are determined, and the effective period data or invalid period data of the second starting port 62 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a prize monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, detection of the first starting port switch 611, the second starting port switch 621, the operation gate switch 631, the first large winning port switch 641, and the second large winning port switch 651 in the input process (S53). Based on the information, the switch passing inspection of the gaming ball is performed, and as a result, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed each switch, a transmission request for effect control command including information indicating that the gaming ball has passed each switch, Etc.

  Next, a prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning prize, and the received data from the payout control board 400 is monitored to pay out the payout control board 400. Perform communication inspection with.

  Next, normal symbol operation gate monitoring processing is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 63 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 63, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as the operation holding ball information. In addition to updating the number of suspended balls for a maximum of 4 balls, random numbers related to normal symbol lottery are stored.

  Next, normal symbol control processing is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the ordinary electric accessory 622 is performed, the normal symbol changing process, the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process, according to the value of the normal symbol game status The processing during normal electric accessory operation, the processing during normal electric accessory operation end demonstration, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol change processing, display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to change or display the normal symbol.

  Next, normal symbol variation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, when the normal symbol operating state is monitored and it is determined that the normal symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol operation holding number of balls is digested by one, and the normal symbol variation is monitored. The determination of success or failure, the determination of symbols, the determination of fluctuation patterns, the setting of fluctuation time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting opening monitoring control process, when the winning of the first starting opening 61 and the second starting opening 62 of the gaming ball is monitored, and there is a winning of the gaming ball, the number of holding balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is concerned. Random number storage, prefetching notice effect determination, command memory number command request, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control processing, as a series of processing concerning the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol gaming status, the special symbol variation start processing (S420) described later in detail, the special symbol variation processing (S430) ), Special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440), and the like.

  Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 642, the operation start and end setting of the special electric accessory 642, Update of the opening time and the number of times of opening the winning opening 64, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the setting of the variation pattern selection state, etc. are executed in order.

  Next, a special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In this big winning opening effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the big winning opening 64 are determined, and the effective period data or invalid period data of the large winning opening 64 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of the holding balls is digested, and a command request for the number of stored symbols, whether the special symbol is successful or not is determined. The determination of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time shortening function, the setting of the operation pattern of the special electric accessory, the setting of the demonstration performance time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the open circuit short circuit power source abnormal signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame open signal, etc. Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to request an error display from the effect control board 200, an effect control command ("error effect designating command") including the error information is generated.

  Next, the ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this incoming ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the incoming ball passing time abnormality is set, and an effect control command (“error” A request for a production designation command ") and a request for outputting a security signal for output to an external terminal are made.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special motorized character 642 operates continuously (prescribed number of rounds), the number of operation reserved balls of the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the like are created. In addition, display data for displaying the information on the error state detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

  Next, LED output processing is performed (S73). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display special symbols and normal symbols, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times that the special electric accessory is operated continuously, display an error, etc. The display data created in the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc. are used as the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the normal symbol display device 75, the special symbol hold lamps 73 and 74, and the general figure hold. In addition to outputting to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, etc., the display in these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when no communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or an abnormality in the short circuit power supply is detected, a fire permission signal is output to the payout control board 400, and the game ball is allowed to be launched. Do. On the other hand, if an abnormality in communication with the payout control board 400 or an abnormality in the short circuit power supply is detected, a firing prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special motorized item control process (S66) are performed to operate the respective motorized items 622, 642. Based on the acquired control data, an excitation signal is output to each of the motorized combination solenoids 623, 643.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In the effect control command transmission process, the effect control command designated by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the process described above. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In the external information output process, the operating state information of the gaming machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the main control main process, and the main control main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power cut (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated to turn on the power cut confirmation flag. To do. Then, after returning to the original process, the above-described power-off process (S
26 to S32).

«Special symbol game processing»
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-mentioned start opening monitoring control processing (S64), the special symbol control processing (S65), the special electric character control processing (S66), the special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), etc. Is the case.

(Starting opening monitoring control processing)
First, the starting opening monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the starting opening monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether a game winning on the first starting opening 61 has been detected (S201). If the winning of the first starting opening 61 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number 4 (S202).

  When the operation reserve ball number of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, a special symbol as a lottery random number according to the first special symbol game Fluctuation pattern random values are acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S203). Then, as an update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first start port 61 is completed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a game winning on the second starting opening 62 has been detected (S205). When a winning at the second starting port 62 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). When the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), a random number per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol as a lottery random number value related to the second special symbol game Fluctuation pattern random values are acquired, and each random value is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S207). Then, as the update of the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check at the second start port 62 is finished.

  Subsequently, whether or not there is an update of the number of actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, ie, whether or not the number of actuation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in S204 or S208. It is determined (S209). If there is an update of the number of operation pending balls (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means It is stored in the 180 command storage area (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether it is a prior determination timing (S211). When it is the prior determination timing (S211: YES), the random value per special symbol is read out from the hit random number buffer of the holding n storage area, and the prior judgment is made (S212). Then, a success / failure predetermination command including information of the predetermination result (success or failure predetermination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  Also, the symbol random number per special symbol is read out from the hit symbol random number buffer of the storage n storage area, and symbol prior determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol prior determination command including information of the prior determination result (symbol prior determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read out from the fluctuation pattern random number buffer of the holding n storage area, and the fluctuation pattern prior determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern prior determination command including information of the prior determination result (a variation pattern prior determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol variation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol variation monitoring monitoring control process (S68), of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol variation start monitoring processing described later for the special symbol side satisfying the variation start condition Execute (S310). When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the change start condition, as described above, the process of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is being made (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for change, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both “00H (waiting for change)”. It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls in the second special symbol is “0” (S303). If the number of retained balls is not “0” (S303: NO), the second special symbol is determined. It is assumed that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and after setting the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (addresses of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (S304) The second special symbol side of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310). That is, in the present embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball of the second special symbol, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. It is supposed to be digested. The details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is “0” (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is “0” (S305). . If the number of reserved balls is not “0” (S305: NO), it is assumed that the first special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol variation start monitoring table (hereinafter referred to as “the first special symbol variation start monitoring table”). After setting the addresses of various tables and addresses of the RAM storage area used in the process (S306), the process shifts to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  In addition, when the change start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310).

  In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S310), the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table or the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table set in S304 or S306 described above is referred to The special symbol side process will be executed, but since the method of processing is common to the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except in special cases, in the first special symbol side process Whether or not there is a process on the second special symbol side will be described as a group without distinction.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls on the special symbol side that is the subject of the current fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol holding storage area on the side of the special symbol subject to the start of the current change is accessed, and the random number value per special symbol and the special symbol stored in the first reserved storage area (holding 1 storage area) The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are read out in order, and these random number values are used in the special symbol qualifying process (S320), the symbol determining process (S330) and the variation pattern selecting process (S423) described later. Transfer to the special symbol success / failure determination area, special symbol determination area, and special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, special symbol propriety judgment processing is executed (S320). In the special symbol success / failure determination process (S320), first, a special symbol success / failure lottery table is acquired. At this time, when the gaming state is a special symbol probability variation state, a high probability success or failure lottery table is acquired, and when the gaming state is a normal state, a low probability success or failure lottery table is acquired. Next, a random value per special symbol is read from the special symbol success / failure determination area of the main information storage unit 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol odds lottery table, based on the random number value per special symbol, to determine whether the special symbol success or failure. In addition, the value (the big hit data “55H”, the small hit data “33H”, the outlying data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the yes / no determination is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, symbol determination processing is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol of the special symbol, the type of symbol group, and the character effect number (variation added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the pass / fail determination. Then, the stop symbol of the special symbol determined this time, the type of symbol group, and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. In addition, the character effect number is determined type of symbol group (7 patterns of symbol groups A to G) and operation state of probability variation function of special symbol and normal symbol (probability variation of special symbol / probability variation of special symbol off) Any one of 28 patterns in total is determined based on a combination of (4 patterns of normal symbol probability variation ON / normal symbol probability variation OFF). When the result of the pass / fail determination is an out-of-order, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the pass / fail determination corresponds to a small hit (S341), and it is determined whether the result of the pass / fail determination corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the determination is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S347, and if the result of the determination is out of order (S341: NO, S342: NO), the process proceeds to S349.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), the special symbol is displayed as the gaming state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 (the jackpot type). It is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function (S343). That is, when the symbol group type (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is decided to provide a probability variation function, and when the symbol group type indicates a normal symbol, the probability variation Decide not to give the function. This determination result is stored in the probability variation determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  In addition, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 (big hit type), the number of times the variable time reduction function is activated is determined as the gaming state after the special game (S344), and the number of times the electric chew support function is activated is determined. To do (S345). The determination result (operation count information of the fluctuation time shortening function, operation count information of the electronic chow support function) is stored in the time saving storage area of the main information storage unit 180 and the number of easy-to-enter-ball storage area.

  Subsequently, based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric symbol 642 is set (S346). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, the specified number of round games (in this example, 16 rounds, 8 rounds, 2 rounds), the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 (in this example, 30 rounds) Set the second, 0.05 second etc.

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current gaming state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game or after the small hit game is set (S347). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, a demonstration effect time (a start demonstration time and a finish demonstration time) of a special game or a small hit game is set (S348). Next, the special symbol success / failure determination region and the special symbol / symbol determination region of the main information storage unit 180 used in the above-described special symbol success / failure determination processing (S320) and symbol determination processing (S330) are cleared (S349). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be subject to variation this time is transited from "00H (during standby)" to "01H (variation start)" (S350).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is inactive, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is “00H (waiting for winning)” (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 642 is not operating (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402).

  When the second special symbol game status is not “00H (standby)” (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the processing related to the second special symbol. The addresses of the various tables and the addresses of the RAM storage areas are set (S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is “00H (standby)” (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processing) is executed to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The addresses of the various tables to be used and the addresses of the RAM storage areas are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general processing (S410).

  In the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in S403 or S404 described above is used, and the special subject to change this time is used. The process on the symbol side will be executed, but the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, so is it the process on the first special symbol side unless otherwise specified? The second special symbol side processing will be described collectively without distinction. Details of this special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S410). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

  In this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410), branch processing (S411 to S414) is performed to shift to processing according to the value ("01H", "02H", "03H") of the special symbol game status. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side subject to the current variation is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). If the special symbol game status is “01H” (S412: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol variation start process (S420). The details of the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “02H (changed)” (S413). When the special symbol game status is “02H” (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). Details of the special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. If NO in S413, it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "03H (during stop symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440). Details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol change start process)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

First, the special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the success or failure lottery and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Subsequently, a special symbol variation pattern random value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (S423).

  Next, a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a special symbol variation start setting, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the change start command, in order to start the symbol change effect in the effect display device 70, the change pattern specification command and the symbol specification command are sequentially generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used to determine the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from “01H (change start)” to “02H (change)” (S428).

(Process during special symbol change)
Next, special symbol variation processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation process (S430).

  First, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed in order to perform a special symbol variable display (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to change or display the special symbol.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). When the variation time of the special symbol is finished (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be determined and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a change stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decoration symbol is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, “500 (ms)” is stored in the special symbol game timer as a fixed display time (S435). In addition, "determination display time" is time which makes a stop symbol stop display definite at the time of the fluctuation | variation stop of a special symbol. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from “02H (fluctuating)” to “03H (stopping symbol display)” (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display processing)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described. 20 to 21 are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the finalized display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). When the special symbol fixed display time is over (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stopped symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the success or failure determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 is the big hit data "55H" (S443). When the hit / fail judgment data is jackpot data (S443: YES), the special symbol probability variation function is deactivated (S444), the special symbol variation time shortening function is deactivated (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, the special symbol mode flag is set to "00H (not operated)", and the hour reduction counter and the ball entry easy state counter are set to "00H."
Set to “00H” and clear to zero.

  Next, as a start demonstration setting process of the special game, a start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (big hit start demonstration command) for instructing start of the start demonstration effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Further, the special electric role thing game status is transited from "00H (waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, “00H” is set to clear the contents of the success / failure determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, when the success / failure determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation (S451). When the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), 1 is subtracted from the probability variation counter of the main information storage means 180 as the digest of the current special symbol variation (step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). If the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455: YES), the time-count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digest of the current special symbol variation (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). If the time saving number counter is zero (S 457: YES), it is determined that the number of times of ending the special symbol time shortening state has been reached, and the operation of the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is stopped (S 458). If the time-count counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

  Next, it is determined whether the electronic chew support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chew support function is in operation (S459: YES), 1 is subtracted from the easy-to-enter state counter of the main information storage unit 180 as the digest of the number of changes in the special symbol this time (step S460). . Next, it is determined whether or not the easy-to-enter state counter is zero (step S461). If the easy entry state number counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the end number of easy entry states has been reached. If the easy-to-enter state counter after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage means 180 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset number of ends. If it has reached, it is switched to the fluctuation pattern selection state defined next. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current gaming state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-described S451 to S464 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, setting and updating of the effect mode are executed based on the information of the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When the small hit data is stored (S466: YES), as the start demo setting process of the small hit game, the start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (small hit) that instructs the start of the start demonstration effect A start demonstration command is generated (S467). Subsequently, the special electric accessory game status is changed from “00H (waiting for winning)” to “02H (small winning game)” (S468). Then, “00H” is set to clear the contents of the success / failure determination flag (S469).

  On the other hand, when the small hit data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, when the shift data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, S467 to S469. To skip In addition, when the special symbol determination flag is outlier data, the reason why the process of clearing the content of the flag is not performed is that “00H” is originally stored as the outlier data.

(Special electric role control process)
Next, the special motorized product control process (S66) will be described. FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 are flowcharts showing the details of the motorized prize control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether the special electric role thing game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). If the special electric accessory game status is “01H” (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In the special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric combination 642, 652 is in operation (S502). If the special electric symbol 642, 652 is not in operation (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric symbol 642, 652 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric actors 642 and 652 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric actors 642 and 652 is started in each round game.

  When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. Store in the command storage area (S504). In addition, on the effect control board 200 side, the round effect corresponding to each round game in the special game is executed based on the information (information such as the current number of rounds) of this round effect designating command. Then, the operation of the special motorized components 642, 652 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as the processing during the operation of the special motorized components 642, 652.

  As a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum number of winning prizes 64, 65 (S506), and the special electric accessory 642, 652 is activated. It is determined whether the time (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game balls have won the maximum winning number 64, 65 in the maximum winning number (S506: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has passed (S507: YES), the special electric The operation of the accessory 642, 652 is stopped (S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessories 642, 652 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (S509). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric symbol 642, 652 is incremented by one (S510).

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, and the end demo display time is set as the special game hit end demo setting process. Is set, and an effect control command (big hit end demo command) instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction number information set in S344 is stored in the time reduction number counter (S512). Further, the easy-to-enter-state number information set in S345 is stored in the easy-to-enter-state number counter (S513).

  Subsequently, with reference to the contents of the probability fluctuation determination flag set in the above S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation with a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). If it is the operation of the condition device by the specific symbol (S514: YES), the data at the time of operation "7FH" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter of the main information storage means 180 and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started (S515). On the other hand, when it is not the operation of the condition device by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operation data "00H" is stored in the probability variation number counter, and S515 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variation time shortening number information stored in the time reduction number counter is variation time shortening function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S516). If it is the variation time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the ball entry easy state frequency information stored in the ball easy entry state frequency counter is the electric chow support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is the electric Chu support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric Chu support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation start of the probability variation function of the normal symbol (S519), the operation start of the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol (S520), and the operation start of the open extension function of the ordinary electric character 622 (S521) are sequentially executed. On the other hand, if it is not the electric Chu support function operation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 is switched to (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated and stored in the main information storage unit 180. Store in the command storage area (S523). In the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S524).

  On the other hand, when the special electric accessory game status is not “01H (special game)” (S501: NO), the process proceeds to S530 and whether the special electric accessory game status is “02H (small hit game)”. It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric accessory game status is “02H” (S530: YES), the small hit game processing is executed in the subsequent processing.

  In the small hit game process, first, it is determined whether the special electric combination 642, 652 is in operation (S531). When the special electric combination 642, 652 is not operating (S531: NO), the operation of the special electric combination 642, 652 is started (S532). On the other hand, when the special electric symbol 642, 652 is in operation (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

  Subsequently, as a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 642, 652, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the maximum winning number at the special winning openings 64, 65 (S533), and the special electric accessory 642 is determined. It is determined whether the operation time (opening time) 652 has elapsed (S534). At this time, if the maximum number of game balls is won in the big winning openings 64 and 65 (S533: YES), or if the operating time of the special electric accessory 642, 652 has passed (S534: YES), the special electric The operation of the accessories 642, 652 is stopped (S535).

  Subsequently, an end demonstration display time is set as an end demonstration setting process for the small hit game, and an effect control command (small hitting end demonstration command) instructing generation of an end demonstration effect is generated (S536). Subsequently, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state determined in the above-mentioned S347 (S537). Then, the effect control command (gaming state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 ( S 538). This gaming state designation command is used on the side of the production control board 200 for determining the production mode transition trigger, specifying the migration destination production mode, and the like. Then, the special electric role thing game status changes from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting state)" (S538).

<Process on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the side of the effect control board 200 is reset start process (including main process on the effect control side) which is executed when the sub main CPU 201 is reset such as after the power is turned on, and the effect control side timer interrupt activated every predetermined cycle. Processing, reception interruption processing of effect control command activated due to strobe signal from main control board 100, and lamp activated with arrival of predetermined occurrence time specified in time schedule of variation effect pattern It is configured to include the effect interruption process and the transmission interruption process of the image control command activated every predetermined period.

  In each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating a priority when multiple interrupt processes occur is set. In this example, "Reset start processing by power reset (Fig. 25): highest priority", "Reset start processing by various abnormality (Fig. 25): highest priority"-> "Interpretation processing of effect control command (Fig. 34): Level 7 "→" Reset start process by WDT (during runaway detection) (Fig. 25): Level 3 "→" Interrupt process of transmission of image control command (Fig. 36): Level 2 "→" Timer interrupt process for effect control (Fig. 35): Level 1 ”and so on, the priority levels are ranked. Note that the “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities” is, for example, when the CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, when the CPU 201 tries to access in an illegal area or by an illegal method, and during DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer It starts when an error occurs. In the present embodiment, the above-described plural types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

  In the effect control side main processing, basically, the processing is advanced after being set in any state of all interrupts inhibited or interrupts inhibited other than the effect control command reception interrupt. After that, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is started in the form of interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process during execution of the interrupt process (multiple interrupts are generated), in principle, if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt process has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt process being executed. That is, each interrupt process is performed in a state in which other interrupts with the same priority level or lower priority levels are prohibited. Then, each interruption process returns to the effect control side main process in a state in which all interruptions are permitted. Note that the priority order (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by register settings of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<Reset start processing>
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, the power is turned on, the reset caused by various abnormalities, or the reset caused by WDT (due to runaway detection) is activated, and the security check of the sub main CPU 201 is performed. , The program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting necessary at power-on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set to a variable with an initial value, and initialization is performed by clearing 0 to a variable having no initial value. Further, the sub main CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the production control command reception interrupt process are prohibited (S605). Next, among various errors set in advance for each model, a process for setting the type of error to be valid for the model is performed (S606). Further, a turn-off request is made to put all of the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 25) in the off state (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is activated to monitor runaway of the sub main CPU 201 (S 608).

  Subsequently, an effect control side main process is executed as the main process of the game effect (S609). Details of the effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. Note that when the process shifts to the production control side main process in S609, it is not normally possible to return from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event that the process returns to this process due to a program bug or the like. The mode is shifted to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is lower than that during normal operation.

<< main processing of production control side >>
Next, the production control side main process (S609) of the production control board 200 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

  First, in the effect control side main processing, an address (head address where the program is developed) for acquiring a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

  Next, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting). In order to control the operation of the movable accessory 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information required for At the end of the initialization operation, the movable part 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset time-out period, so that the watchdog timer It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, an input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, monitoring of reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in port input / output processing S912 in timer interrupt processing described later is monitored at each interrupt generation, and monitoring is performed several times (for example, four times). The signal level is “1 (H level)” if all the input port states are “1”, “0 (L level)” if all “0”, otherwise the signal level is Do not change (this determines the input signal).

  Subsequently, an error presentation management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Furthermore, in the error presentation management process, the error management timer is set to an initial value (error presentation time) to manage the progression of the error presentation. The error management timer is decremented and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, if the error management timer has timed out, the error presentation is ended.

  Subsequently, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when a button notice effect is incorporated during symbol variation, the input state of the effect button 15 within the operation effective time is monitored, and a plurality of preset values are set according to the button notice effect. The content of the production according to the input state of the production button 15 is determined from the types of production content.

  Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern (noting the contents of the notice effect occurring at each stage of the change process of the decorative symbol) along the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620) The notice performance number) is determined by lottery. The notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. In addition, an image control command for designating the notice effect number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260. At this time, when an accessory announcement effect pattern (an accessory announcement effect number) is selected as the announcement effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the movable accessory 24 is obtained in the subsequent device management process (S619). The drive pattern of is identified. In this example, not all of the multiple types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative symbol are drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop process efficiency is improved. In order to make it perform, it is divided into every occurrence time (for example, fluctuation start stage, reach generation stage, fluctuation stop stage) of advance notice effect, and it is the composition which draws the lottery over plural times main loop processing. At that time, the notice effect that occurs at the beginning of the decorative symbol change stage needs to be synchronized with the start of the decorative symbol change (send the image control command immediately). It is supposed to be done.

Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there are operation requests (lamp request and feature request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, plural types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 Among them, the pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, feature preview effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for the drawing process of one frame when drawing etc. at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) in the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable part 24, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at fixed intervals, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the effect lamp LP is turned off, or the operation of the movable part 24 is stopped. , End control of the target device.

  Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read out, and the effect control command that has been read out is read out. Execute the effect control process corresponding to the type of. Details of the command analysis processing (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of effect control command) has been executed during the current loop processing (S621). If the command has just been analyzed (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 to shift to the next loop process. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), the effect lottery random number update process is executed (S622). In this effect lottery random number update process, effect lottery random numbers such as a pre-reading notice lottery random number, a decorative design random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process (S620) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis process (S620). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and an effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of changing the effect mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command. The details of the effect state transition process (S632) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold related commands include a symbol memory number command and a prior determination command. If the hold related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In the hold information management process (S634), a symbol storage number command or a pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, a pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and the hold display of the effect display device 70 A process is performed to update the display number and display mode (display color etc.) of the hold images displayed on the units 701 and 702.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related command includes a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the routine proceeds to variation effect content determination processing (S636). In this variation effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, processing for starting the symbol variation effect is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is a variation stop command. In some cases, a process for ending the symbol variation effect being executed is executed. Details of the variation effect content determination process (S636) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a big hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot production related command includes a jackpot start demonstration command, a round presentation specification command, and a jackpot end demonstration command. When the big hit effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the big hit effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed. Details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a small hit effect related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit production related command includes a small hit start demonstration command and a small hit end demonstration command. When the small hit effect related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (S640). In the small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). When this error effect designation command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to an error effect content determination process (S642). In this error effect content determination process (S642), an error effect designation command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and an error for notifying the error state by the image display of the effect display device 70, the light emission mode of the effect lamp LP, or the like. Determine the presentation pattern.

  What is the case when the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO) The command analysis process is ended without doing anything.

(Production state transition process)
Next, the effect state transition process (S632) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the details of the effect state transition process (S632).

  First, the contents of the game state designation command from the main control board 100 are analyzed, and information regarding the variation pattern selection state included in the contents of this command is acquired (S701). Subsequently, based on the information on the variation pattern selection state acquired in the above-described S701, it is determined whether a transition trigger of the effect mode has arrived (S702). When the timing for transition to the effect mode has arrived (S702: YES), the transition setting to the predetermined effect mode is performed in S703 and thereafter. In addition, the transition trigger of the production mode is in principle linked with the transition trigger of the variation pattern selection state, for example, when the special game ends or when the end number of the variation pattern selection state expires. Note that the final number of times of variation pattern selection state is the number of times related to the number of variations of the special symbol.

First, it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side is the low probability normal variation state α (S703). When the transition destination is the low probability normal variation state α (S703: YES), the normal rendering mode Mα is set as the transition destination of the rendering mode (S704). When shifting to the normal effect mode Mα, a normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S 705). Then, in the normal effect mode Mα, for example, a normal background image of “wilderness” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, if the transition destination is not the low probability normal fluctuation state α (S703: NO), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high probability time short fluctuation state β (S706). When the transition destination is the high probability short fluctuation state β (S706: YE
In S), the probability change effect mode Mβ is set as a transition destination of the effect mode (S707). When shifting to this probability variation effect mode A, a probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S 708). Then, in the probability variation effect mode Mβ, for example, a probability variation background image of “Citadel” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  When the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is not the high probability short variation state β (S706: NO), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the variation pattern selection state is the high probability special variation state γ (S709). ). If the transition destination is the high probability special variation state γ (S709: YES), the special effect mode Mγ is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (S710). Subsequently, it is determined whether the special continuous effect flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S711). The special continuous effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special continuous effect is executed. If the special continuous effect flag is on (S711: YES), a special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S712). In the special effect mode Mγ, for example, a special background image of “starry sky” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, if the special continuous effect flag is off (S711: NO), a probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S713). In the special effect mode Mγ, for example, a probability change background image of “Citadel” (substantially the same background image as in the probability change effect mode Mβ) is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. Subsequently, an image control command for instructing display of the effect content (background image) determined in the processing is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 (S721).

(Change production effect determination process)
Next, the change effect content determination process (S636) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the fluctuation effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a change start command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S731). If a variation start command is stored (S731: YES), the contents of this variation start command (variation pattern designation command, variation additional symbol information designation command, character effect number designation command) are analyzed, and the contents of this command are analyzed. As a result of the winning / losing lottery included, information indicating a symbol group, a variation pattern (variation time), a gaming state, etc. is acquired (S732). This acquired information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

  Subsequently, a variation effect pattern selection process is executed (S733). In this variation effect pattern selection process, based on the variation pattern information acquired in S732 and the effect mode set in the effect state transition process in S632, the variation effect pattern table is obtained, and from the effect lottery random number generation means 210 A random effect pattern random number is acquired, and one of the variable effect patterns is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of variable effect patterns. The fluctuation presentation pattern constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol, the type and time of occurrence of reach effect, the type and time of occurrence of the notice effect, and the like are defined. The variation effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Further, a lamp effect number corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

Next, the decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (S734). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection process, combinations (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped are respectively drawn based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in S732. decide. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  Subsequently, as the update of the prefetch information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is changed. It clears to zero (S735).

  Next, special effect determination processing is executed (S736). In this special effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the special effect with high rarity (so-called ascension effect) displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the so-called continuous state. The predetermined condition is, for example, that the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative number of specific big hits in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, the accumulated number of winning balls in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, There may be a case where a specific effect (specific effect during symbol variation or special game) is generated during the quiet state. Details of the special effect determination process (S736) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41 in the first modification.

  Next, the on-premises-in-place effect A determination process is executed (S737). In the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production A is determined, and when it is determined that the on-hold consecutive villa production A is to be executed, a consecutive villa production pattern is selected. The details of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, when executing the on-hold extended villa production A in S737, a process of replacing the contents of the symbol variation production selected in S733 and S734 according to the content of the on-hold extended villa production A is executed. (S738). For example, when the consecutive house effect pattern PA2 is selected, the normal jackpot symbol selected in S734 is replaced with a special jackpot symbol “S · S · S” as a symbol change effect replacement process. The decorative symbol combination number (big hit symbol number) replaced here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. In the present embodiment, the target of the prefetch determination in the on-hold consecutive villa production A is the subsequent operation reservation ball that exists at the time when the previous operation reservation ball is digested (when the variation start condition is satisfied). It is. For this reason, even if the operation hold ball generated during the change is specified hold, the on-hold consecutive resort production A determination process (S737) and the replacement process (S738) are not executed, but specified during the change. In the case where a hold is generated, it is configured to execute the in-hold extended villa effect A determination process (S737) and the replacement process (S738) even during the change, and to change the change effect data set at the start of the change. It is also good.

  Then, based on the effect information acquired in S733 to S738, an image control command (change effect start command) required to start the decoration symbol change is generated, and this image control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. The setting is made (S739).

  On the other hand, when the change start command is not stored (S731: NO), it is determined whether the change stop command is stored in the sub main information storage means 260 (S740). If the variable stop command is stored (S740: YES), the contents of the variable stop command are analyzed, and symbol stop information included in the contents of the command is acquired (S741). Then, an image control command (variation effect stop command) required to stop the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S742).

(Pending Uranso production A judgment processing)
Next, the on-premises-in-place effect A determination process (S737) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage means 260 is on (S761). If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S 761: NO), the information (result of the winning lottery and the big hit type) stored in the change effect content determination area of the sub main information storage means 260 in S 732 is analyzed. It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is the 16R big hit (S762). If the lottery result is a 16R big hit (S762: YES), it is determined whether or not the pre-determination information of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. (S763). In this example, the pre-reading determination of the pending inside consecutive effect A is performed on the operation pending ball of the second special symbol that occurred before the start of the symbol variation. If there is an operation retention ball of the second special symbol (S 763: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a specific suspension in the operation retention ball of the second special symbol (S 764). If a specific hold exists (S 764: YES), it is determined whether this specific hold indicates a 16R jackpot (S 765). If the specific hold corresponds to the 16R big hit (S765: YES), the hold within continuous play effect A lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the hold within continuous play effect A by lottery (S766) ). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect A lottery process, when the continuous time effect lottery random number value matches one of the judgment values of "execution" and "non-execution" with reference to a continuous action effect A lottery table (not shown) Determine the presence or absence of execution. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 80% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning in the on-hold consecutive villa production A lottery process is won (S767). If the player has been won (S 767: YES), it executes a multi-story effect pattern selection process for determining the content of the on-premises multi-stream effect A (S 768). In this consecutive villa effect pattern selection process, while acquiring the consecutive chamber effect pattern table shown in FIG. 8A, the sequential random effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and plural types of consecutive chamber effects are obtained. From the effect patterns, one of the consecutive effect patterns is determined by lottery. Next, the number of the extended villa effect pattern selected this time is temporarily stored in the extended villa effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S769). Then, the on-hold on-line consecutive play effect flag of the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S770). Note that the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the on-hold on-line consecutive-off effect is executed.

(Big hit production content determination process)
Next, the big hit effect content determination process (S638) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect content determination process (S636).

  First, it is determined whether or not a start demo command is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 (S801). If the start demonstration command is stored (S801: YES), the content of the start demonstration command is analyzed, and information indicating the jackpot type included in the content of the command is acquired (S802). The acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Subsequently, the continuous resort count counter for counting the number of consecutive resorts is updated (S803). Specifically, when the big hit this time is a big hit in the normal state (referred to as “first hit”), “1” is set in the extended game count counter, and in the case of the extended game, the extended game counter is set to “ Add 1 ".

  Next, a jackpot effect pattern selection process is executed to determine the contents of the jackpot effect pattern (start demonstration effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demonstration effect pattern) (S804). In this jackpot effect pattern selection process, a jackpot effect pattern table (not shown) is acquired, and a jackpot effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and any one of a plurality of types of jackpot effect patterns is selected. Determine the jackpot effect pattern by lottery. The jackpot effect pattern number (start demo pattern number, round effect pattern number, end demo pattern number) determined here is temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260.

  Next, the on-premises-in-place effect B determination process is executed (S805). In the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect B is determined, and if it is determined to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect B, a consecutive villa effect pattern is selected. The details of the on-premises-in-place effect B determination process (S805) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, a big hit effect replacement process is executed (S806). In this jackpot effect replacement process, when the on-hold consecutive resort effect B (special continuous effect) is executed, the normal start demo effect pattern and the normal end demo effect pattern are changed to the special start demo effect pattern and the special end demo effect pattern. Replace with. Details of the jackpot effect replacement process (S806) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading determination target in the on-hold consecutive resort production B exists at the start time of the special game (at the end of the change) when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit. It is a subsequent working hold ball. Therefore, even if the operation holding ball generated during the special game is a specific hold, the on-hold consecutive villa production B determination process (S805) and the replacement process (S806) are not executed, but during the special game When a specific hold is generated, the on-hold consecutive resort stage B determination process (S805) and the replacement process (S806) are executed even during the special game, so that the big hit effect data set at the start of the special game is replaced. You may configure it.

  Then, the start demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the big hit effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260 in S804 and S806 is transferred to the start demonstration effect storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260, and the start demonstration effect is A start is set (S807).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a round effect designating command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S811). When the round effect designation command is stored (S807: YES), the content of the round effect designation command is analyzed, and the number of rounds included in the content of this command and the number of winning prizes to the big winning openings 64 and 65 are calculated. The information shown is acquired (S812). The acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Subsequently, based on the information acquired in S812, the round number counter of the sub main information storage unit 260 is updated (S813), and the big prize counter of the sub main information storage unit 260 is updated (S814). In this example, since “14” prize balls are paid out every time a game ball wins a prize winning opening 64, 65, “14” is multiplied by the number of winning prizes in the prize winning openings 64, 65. Thus, the number of winning prize balls is calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S815). A pseudo count flag is a flag that turns on when a pseudo count effect is performed to notify that the number of rounds and winning balls in the special game above is added to the number of rounds and winning balls in the special game later It is. If the pseudo count flag is on (S815: YES), that is, if it is scheduled to execute a round effect (pseudo count effect) at a later big hit, a round number pseudo addition process is executed (S816). In this round number pseudo addition process, the number of round games executed in the previous special game (round number: 16R) is added to the number of round games executed (round number: 1R to 16R) stored in the round number counter. to add. Thereby, in the special continuous performance, the round game of the first round in the later special game is notified as the round game of the 17th round.

  Subsequently, the winning prize ball number pseudo addition processing is executed (S817). In this winning prize ball number pseudo addition processing, the number of winnings for the special winning opening in the previous special game is added to the number of winnings stored in the large winning number counter. Thereby, in the special serial performance, the number of winning balls obtained in the later special game is notified as the total number of winning balls obtained in the first special game and the second special game.

  Then, the round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 in S804 and S806, together with the values of the round number counter and the big prize counter, are round effects of the sub-main information storage unit 260. It transfers to a storage area and sets the start of round presentation (S818).

  Next, it is determined whether or not an end demo command is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S821). If the end demonstration command is stored (S 821: YES), the content of the end demonstration command is analyzed, and the information included in the content of this command is acquired (S 822). The acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Next, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag in the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S823). When the special continuous effect flag is on (S823: YES), the value of the round number counter (number of rounds) and the value of the big prize number counter (large number of winning prizes) are stored in the previous big hit of the sub main information storage means 260. Temporarily store in the area (S824). This means that if the current big hit corresponds to the previous big hit in the special continuous performance, the final round number and the big winning number in the previous big win are the pseudo-addition processing in the later big win effect (S816, S817) Because it is scheduled to be used in the game, it is stored as record information of the previous special game. Therefore, in the above-described pseudo addition processing in S816 and S817, the numerical values (the number of rounds and the number of big winnings) stored in the future big hit storage area will be added. Next, the round number counter and the big winning number counter of the sub main information storage means 260 are cleared (S825, S826).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the pseudo count flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S827). If the pseudo count flag is on (S827: YES), the pseudo count flag is turned off (S828). Next, it is determined whether the on-hold internal consecutive-play effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S 835). If the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect flag is on (S 835: YES), the on-hold-on on-line consecutive effect flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned off (S 836).

  Next, the end demonstration effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 in S804 and S806 is transferred to the end demonstration effect storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the end demonstration effect The start is set (S837). Then, based on the effect information acquired in S805, S807, S818, and S837, an image control command required for the jackpot effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S838). .

(Pending Uranso production B judgment processing)
Next, a description will be given of the process for determining whether or not the on-premises multiple-run effect B (S805) is performed. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S805).

First, it is determined whether or not the on-hold consecutive-run effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on, that is, whether or not the on-hold internal-run effect A has already been executed in the symbol variation effect (S851). If the on-hold storage unit production flag is not on (S851: NO), the information (result of the winning lottery and the big hit type) stored in the variation presentation content determination area of the sub main information storage unit 260 in S732 is analyzed. Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is 16R big hit (S852). If the lottery result is a 16R big hit (S 852: YES), it is determined whether or not the predetermination information of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is stored in the preread information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S853). In this example, the pre-reading determination of the pending inside consecutive effect B is performed on the operation pending ball of the second special symbol which has occurred until the special game is started, that is, until the big hit start demonstration command is received. If there is an operation retention ball of the second special symbol (S853: YES), it is determined whether or not there is a specific suspension in the operation retention ball of the second special symbol (S854). If a specific hold exists (S 854: YES), a hold internal play effect B lottery process 1 is executed to determine whether or not to execute the hold internal play effect B by lottery (S 856). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effects effect B lottery process 1, referring to unshown continuous effects effect B lottery table 1, the in-time effects effect lottery random number value matches any judgment value of "execution" or "non-execution" If there is a problem, decide whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 80% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%. In addition, according to the classification (16R big hit, 8R big hit) of specific reservation, you may differ the election probability of pending inside consecutive house effect B. For example, in the case of the specific suspension of the 16R big hit, the on-premises combination effect B is executed at a rate of 100%, and in the case of the 8R big hit on the specific suspension, the on-delivery within-line effect B is executed at the 50% rate It may be configured. This is to increase the appearance probability of the on-hold on-line effect B when the degree of advantage for the player is large, and to increase the player's sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, when there is no specific hold (S854: NO), the on-hold consecutive villa production B lottery process 2 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production B is executed by lottery (S857). . In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 2, the random resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 2. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 10% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the player has been elected in the on-hold consecutive-run effect B lottery process (S858). If the player is won (S 858: YES), the multi-station effect pattern selection process for determining the content of the on-premises multi-station effect B is executed (S 861). In this consecutive home effect pattern selection process, while obtaining the continuous home effect pattern table shown in FIG. 8B, the continuous home performance pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and plural types of continuous home landscaping From the effect patterns, one of the consecutive effect patterns is determined by lottery. Next, the number of the selected consecutive rendering effect pattern selected this time is temporarily stored in the continuous storage effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S868). Then, the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect flag of the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S870).

(Big hit production replacement process)
Next, the jackpot effect replacement process (S806) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot effect replacement process (S806). In this jackpot effect replacement process, if it is the first special game, the special end demonstration effect is set in S881 to S885 in order to execute the special continuous effect in the form of connecting the first special game and the second special game. If it is a special game after, special start demonstration effects are set in S886-S890.

  First, it is determined whether the special continuous effect flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is on, that is, whether the special continuous effect is already being executed (S881). If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S881: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending internal connection effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S882). If the on-hold in-line consecutive-play effect flag is not on (S882: NO), information to the effect of "previous big hit (01H)" is set in the special continuous effect status of the sub main information storage means 260 (S883). Thereby, it is determined that the present big hit (special game) is the previous big hit (special game) in the special continuous effect. Subsequently, the normal end demonstration effect pattern number set in S804 is replaced with a special end operation demonstration effect pattern number (S884). Then, in order to generate a special continuous effect, the special continuous effect flag is turned on (885).

On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag is on (S881: YES), that is, when the special continuous effect is already being executed, the special big effect status in the sub-main information storage means 260 is set to “subsequent big hit (02H Information to the effect that ")" is set (S886). Thereby, it is determined that the present big hit (special game) is the next big hit (special game) in the special continuous effect. Next, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is a 16R big hit (high profit big hit) (S 887). If it is 16R big hit (S887: YES), the normal start demonstration effect pattern number set in S804 is replaced with the special end start demonstration effect pattern number (S888). Subsequently, in order to connect the special continuous effect to the pseudo-count effect, the pseudo-count flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned on (S889). Then, the special continuous effect flag is turned off (S890).

《Reception interrupt processing of production control command》
Next, a reception interrupt process of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process of effect control command. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is like that. The effect control command includes 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, MODE data is also referred to as “first command”, and EVENT data is also referred to as “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100 is generated, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command is confirmed (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice in a row. This is because the reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not finalized until the same value is read twice.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, as for the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number, it is assumed that the effect control command is received when the effect control command is received, and the effect control command is transmitted at irregular timing such as the start winning of the game ball or the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is to prevent periodicity from being obtained at the acquisition time by using it as an opportunity. As described above, by making the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number irregular, it becomes difficult to generate inconveniences such as the same effect being repeated unnaturally and repeatedly even in various effect lottery.

  On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control command is received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is any contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the light pointer (writing pointer) is acquired (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub main information storage unit 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S 907). The stored command data is read out in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909).

《Timer interrupt processing for production control side》
Next, the effect control timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing effect control timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated by clock pulses at regular time intervals, and is executed in a form of interrupting the effect control side main process described above.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the sub main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, an interrupt with priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100, a watchdog timer interrupt, etc., is permitted (S911).

  Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

  Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in the device control data output process, the drive data is switched at every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, the effect timer update process is executed (S914). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated every interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative symbol, and a timer for managing the generation timing of the advance effect. The time schedule in the fluctuation effect pattern is managed by the effect timer, and time management such as the drive timing of the movable object 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP is performed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S918) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated from the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is the time when the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S717). In this task control counter updating process, the value ("0" to "15") of the task counter is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is “0” to “14”, the value is incremented by one, and if the value of the task counter is “15”, the value is returned to “0”. That is, this task counter can take a cyclic cycle of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned corresponding to the task counter value updated this time, and the ramp control task (lamp data update processing in S718) and runaway monitoring are performed according to the task counter value. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S719) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S720) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values with an interval of 8 ms between each other) are used for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task, and one other value is assigned to an error management task (an explanation of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the cycle period of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

  Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S918). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) or the like. The lamp data set in this process is data representing lighting control for 16 ms which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the ramp data of the transmission buffer in units of 1 byte, and outputs the converted data to the lamp connection board 91 in units of one bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in the lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection substrate 91 by serial transfer. The ramp data update process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (value indicating the ramp control task) in the task control counter update process (S917) (that is, executed at a cycle of 16 ms). Processing).

  Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S919). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and the image control board 300 is not continuously changed for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames). It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running away, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. Thereby, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal of a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every one frame time. The image CPU runaway monitoring process is a process executed when the value of the task counter reaches a predetermined value (a value indicating an image monitoring task) in the task control counter updating process (S917).

  Next, an error management timer process is executed (S920). In this error management timer process, the value of the error presentation timer for managing the error presentation time set in the above-mentioned error presentation management process (S617) is subtracted and updated. The error management timer process is a process executed when the value of the task counter becomes a predetermined value (a value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter update process (S917). Then, all interrupts are permitted and the saved register contents are restored. Then, the effect control side timer interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the occurrence of the interrupt.

<< Interrupt processing of image control command transmission >>
Next, transmission interrupt processing of the image control command will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing transmission interrupt processing of an image control command. This image control command transmission interruption process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

  In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage unit 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit 205 designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, an image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by one and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image command is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

[Effect]
Next, in order to facilitate understanding of the present embodiment, the characteristic operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 37, the flow of effects when the on-hold in-line consecutive effects and the special continuous effects are performed will be described. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram showing effect screens of the reserved villa resort effect and the special continuous effect.

  First, as shown in FIG. 37A, in the round effect (final round) in the special game, the final round number “16 rounds” and the winning prize ball number “1988” in the special game are It is displayed. Then, in this final round, the image of "the book of righteousness" is displayed as the pending inner rown directing effect B, and the specific hold is included in the subsequent operation pending balls, that is, the possibility of the inner edge of the left behind inner rowing Is suggested.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), in the end demonstration effect in the previous special game, the special continuous effect is started with the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B in the final round described above. In the illustrated example, an ally character and an enemy character appear as a special end demonstration effect. In addition, in this special end demonstration effect, unlike normal, the character information of "continuation" is displayed instead of the character information of "big hit end" being displayed, as if the special game is continued. Can show. Then, internally, the special game is ended, and the symbol variation game is resumed in a state in which the special symbol is in a definite variation state and a short time state, and a power chute support state is set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 37C, in the first symbol change after the end of the special game, the lottery result is lost, and the super-shortened change (2 seconds) is set as the special symbol change effect. In a very short time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "1-2-5". In the example shown in the figure, in this special variation effect, a battle effect in which the same teammate character and the enemy character as in FIG. This is to display the same character as that displayed in the previous special game in order to give the player the impression that the special game (the first special game) is finished as much as possible. During the special symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner or stopped is displayed in a reduced state toward the end of the screen. Thereby, the player can be seen as if the previous special game has ended, as if it were continuing. When the special symbol variation effect is not being performed, that is, during the normal symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol is displayed at substantially the center of the screen without being reduced. Further, during the limited period (during special variation effect), a background image of a special background (“star star”) different from normal is displayed, so that the player's expectation for future development can be enhanced. In addition, it is good also as a state which can not recognize symbol variation or it is hard to recognize by making the whole screen into a specific display color.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37D, in the second symbol change after the end of the special game, the lottery result is a big hit (16R big hit), and the super shortening change (2 seconds) is set as a special change effect. Therefore, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode "7-7-7" in a very short time. In the illustrated example, in this special variation effect, an effect in which the teammate character beats the enemy character is executed. As described above, in the special variation effect in the special continuous effect, the time required to shift to the later special game is compressed by rapidly digesting the subsequent operation reserving ball in a very short time, and the symbol for the player It is configured to seamlessly connect to a special game later without being aware as much as possible that the variable effect has been executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37E, in the start demonstration effect in the later special game, the special continuous effect continues. In the example shown in the drawing, as the special start demonstration effect, an effect in which the friend character tells the enemy character “the strongest of mystery” is executed. In this start demonstration effect, unlike the usual case, the text information of “start of big hit” is not displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37F, the pseudo count effect is started in the round effect (start round) in the later special game. In this pseudo count production, "17 rounds", which is the cumulative number of rounds from the previous special game, and the cumulative winning prize from the previous special game, in order to make it appear as if it is continuing as an extension of the previous special game. The ball number "1988" is informed. Further, the same teammate character and enemy character as in FIG. 37 (B) are continuously displayed.

  In this way, it is possible to show the previous special game and the subsequent special game by the on-hold Uranzou as a series of effects across the symbol variation effect. Further, since the number of winning balls obtained by the two special games is displayed, it is possible to give the player a satisfaction that a large number of winning balls have been obtained. As a result, a new special gaming state exceeding the number of rounds and the number of prize balls restricted by the rules can be created in a pseudo manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production will be described. FIG. 38 is a time chart showing the relationship between the pending and in-line effect and the special continuous effect.

  When the preceding operation reserving ball is digested and the jackpot is won in the determination of yes or no (t11), the processing shifts to a pending internal connection effect A determination process, and the pre-reading determination is executed on the subsequent operation reserving ball. If there is a specific hold (the third is a specific hold in the example shown) in the subsequent operation hold ball, whether or not to execute the hold inside consecutive effect A is determined by lottery, and if it is won during the symbol variation production The on-premises in-house effect A occurs (t12).

  Subsequently, when the symbol variation is stopped and the jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed, thereafter, a special game (a special game ahead) is started. At the start of this special game, the process proceeds to the on-hold on-line consecutive effects B determination process, but since on-off on-line consecutive effects effect A has already occurred in the symbol variation effect, the on-off on-line consecutive effects in this special game B does not occur (t13). The reason for this is that if the on-hold extended villa production B is generated again during the special game, the number of on-hold extended villa times (the number of specific holdings in the subsequent operation holding ball) is one. Regardless, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that there are multiple times, and because in this example it is a reserved area rendezvous production B that is not a confirmed notification effect, the player is worried about whether a retained reed resort will really occur. This is because there is a risk of memorizing it.

Next, special continuous effects are started in the end demonstration effect in the previous special game (t14). This special continuous effect is continued from the end demonstration effect in the current special game (previous special game) to the round effect in the next special game (later special game) (t14 to t18). Then, when the previous special game ends, the symbol variation effect is resumed (t15). In this example, a limited period for staying in the special effect mode Mγ is set with four symbol variations as a limit, and special symbol variation effects are executed within this limited period.

  Then, after the end of the previous special game, the third operation suspension ball (specific suspension notified at t12) is digested, and if you win a big hit in the judgment (t16), within suspension The process shifts to the Renso production A determination process. At this time, a new specific hold exists in the subsequent operation hold ball (the second is a specific hold in the example shown), but this is the third time because special continuous rendition is already being executed. During the symbol variation effect, the on-hold consecutive resort effect A does not occur (t16). The reason is that even when trying to show two special gaming states as one special gaming state in conjunction with the generation of special continuous effects, a pending inside consecutive effect A as a symbol variation effect occurs during execution of this special continuous effect The reason is that there is a risk that the intention of concealing that the symbol variation is being produced may be overwhelmed. In addition, when the special continuous production is started in response to the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the variation time when the subsequent operation holding ball is digested during this special continuous production (within a limited period) is extremely short. Since it is set to (2 seconds), the production effect is low even if the on-hold consecutive resort production A is generated within this short time, and both productions are produced by the competition between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the special continuous production. This is because the effect may be diluted.

  Next, when the symbol variation stops and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, the later special game is started. In addition, at the start of a later special game, the process shifts to the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the subsequent operation holding ball. At this time, even if a special continuous effect is being executed, if there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the example shown, the second is a specific hold), the possibility of execution of the on-premises continuous effect B is lottery If it is determined that the game is decided on and if it is elected, a pending internal connection effect B can be generated during the special game (t17). The reason is that the player feels that the normal on-hold in-line continuous effect B has occurred if it is generated during the big hit effect even during the special continuous effect, and a sense of discomfort can not be generated. In addition, since the special continuous production is connected to a series of productions from at least the end demonstration production during the previous jackpot production to the start demonstration production during the subsequent big hit production, This is because there is no inconvenience that the on-hold consecutive villa production and the special continuous production compete with each other as long as the on-hold consecutive villa production is generated at the timing after the round presentation in the special game.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first on-hold in-line effect A that occurs during symbol variation and the second on-off in-line effect B that occurs during special game are provided, On the other hand, in the case of the second holding in-game effect B, only one specific hold is made in the subsequent operation hold ball, while in the case of the continuous play effect A, the possibility that there is one specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball is informed. By configuring to be able to notify that there is not more than one, through a series of game processes from when the symbol starts to change until the special game is ended, the sense of expectation for the occurrence of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect is sustained In addition to being able to, the player can be taught various information regarding the pending U-linked in response to the occurrence timing of the pending U-in-linking effect in the game process, thereby causing the pending U-in-linked effects to occur. Because variations are given to the aspect It may extend the width of the hold in extended game effect, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by executing a special symbol variation effect during a limited period after the end of the special game, the next jackpot (the specific reservation notified in the reserved game in the reservation) at an early stage after the end of the special game. The expectation for the occurrence of a “big hit” related to the present invention can be enhanced, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Also, by configuring the special symbol variation effect with a very short time shortening variation, it is possible to suppress the time interval between the first special game and the second special game, and it is possible to prevent the extension until the next big hit. By prohibiting the generation of reserved U-Ran effects within a limited period, it is possible to prevent the effects of the effects from being diluted due to the competition between the special effects and the Pending U-Ran effects during the limited period. it can.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, even when there is a specific hold that makes a big hit, the hold-in-place consecutive-play effect is not necessarily performed, so even if it is not notified, it is expected to the possibility of the hold-in-side-run A feeling can be given. In addition, when a specific hold exists, you may be comprised so that a reservation inside consecutive house effect may be performed.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, and the holding internal connection effect B does not occur during the special game, and the subsequent operation holding ball (ending internal connection effect after the end of the special game If a high expectation effect (Super Reach B) is generated during symbol variation, it is possible that the action-retaining ball existing at the time of B occurrence will be removed rather than the possibility of becoming a big hit Is set higher.

  As shown in FIG. 5, in the game of the second special symbol, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/40, and the probability of being out of play is about 39/40.

  In addition, as shown in Figure 7, in the special symbol state of variation, if the result of the judgment is a big hit, regardless of the type of big hit, whether it is 16R specific big hit and 8R specific big hit, it is 100% The fluctuation patterns PX7 and PY7 of Super Reach B (high expectation degree effect) are selected with probability. That is, in the special symbol state of probability variation, only the variation pattern PX7 of the super reach B is selected in the case of the 16R specific big hit, and only the variation pattern PY7 of the super reach B is selected in the case of the 8R big hit. On the other hand, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, if the result of the determination is wrong, the variation pattern PH7 of super reach B (high expectation degree effect) is selected with a probability of 5%.

  At this time, as described in S 856 in FIG. 32, in this example, when there is a specific hold (16R big hit, 8R big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball, the winning probability of the execution permission or non-presence of the in-row combination effect B Is set to 80%, so even if there is a specific hold (16R big hit, 8R big hit), the pending inner row effect B is unexecuted with a probability of 20% remaining.

  Under the conditions as described above, under the condition that the pending inner row directing effect B is not executed, the probability X of becoming a big hit by the appearance of Super Reach B and the probability Y of being out of position due to the appearance of Super Reach B are as follows It becomes as follows.

X = (probability of becoming a big hit) × (probability of not producing a pending in-house effect B) × (probability of becoming a super reach B)
Y = (probability of becoming out of place) x (probability of becoming super reach B)

  Subsequently, using the above numerical values, the probability X of being a big hit by the appearance of super reach B and the probability Y of being lost by the appearance of super reach B are specifically calculated as follows.

X = 1/40 x (100-80) / 100 x 100/100 = 20/400
Y = 39/40 × 5/100 = 195/400
It becomes.

  Therefore, when a high expectation degree effect is generated in the subsequent operation holding ball without generation of the holding inside row sorrow effect B during the special game (when it is developed into the super reach B), a big hit is possible There is a higher possibility of falling off than sex.

  In the first embodiment described above, basically, the pre-reading determination relating to the pending inside consecutive effects is performed for the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol acquired while the electric chew support function is activated. However, this is only an example, and for example, the pending special reciprocation ball (or the second special symbol work reserving ball) acquired while the electric support function is inactive is targeted for reserving Pre-reading determination concerning the cho-to effect may be executed.

  Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the determination timing of the pending internal connection effect B is set to the timing of the big hit start time (when the start demo command is received), but this is merely an example, for example It may be set to any timing at the time of big hit start, round game, or big hit end.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first special winning a prize game 64 is associated with the first special symbol game, and the second special winning award 65 is associated with the second special game. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, at least one of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is made to correspond to both the first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65, alternately these large winning openings 64, 65 It may be opened. Moreover, the structure which provides only one big prize opening, without providing the two big prize openings 64 and 65 may be sufficient.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what is called a preferential digestion which digests the operation reserve ball of the 2nd special symbol preferentially over the operation reserve ball of the 1st special symbol is adopted, it is limited to this Instead, the operation holding ball may be digested by the order of ball entry into the first starting opening 61 or the second starting opening 62. In addition, when this structure is employ | adopted, it is preferable to make both the operation | movement reservation ball of a 1st special symbol, and the operation | movement reservation ball of a 2nd special symbol into the object of notification within reservation.

First Embodiment First Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Relationship between rendezvous renso production and ascension production)
In the present modification, when the so-called consecutive units continue a specified number of times, a rare special effect (so-called ascension effect) occurs. "Renso" means that, when a predetermined jackpot occurs during a specific game, the specific game state continues again as the game state after the end of the special game. As described above, the “special game state” is a state in which the probability of transition to a special game is higher than the normal state, the special symbol probability variation function, special symbol variation time shortening function, electric chew support function Is a state in which at least one of the functions is activated. In this example, at least the power chute support function (ball-loading easy state) is activated as a specific gaming state. Here, in this embodiment, during the ST period after the end of the special game, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function operate (the operation starts simultaneously and the operation ends simultaneously). Since it is configured, it can be said that it is always in a specific gaming state during the ST period.

As an execution condition of the special effect, it is determined that the villa is continuous for a specified number of times (20 times in this example). In addition to the specified number of times, for example, the cumulative number of specific jackpots in the villa state is predetermined. When the number of times reached, the total number of rounds won or the total number of prize balls won in the consecutive house state reaches a predetermined number, and a specific effect (designated effect during symbol changes or special games) is generated during the consecutive house state Etc. may be added to the execution conditions. You may add the total number of acquisition rounds and the total number of winning prizes in the consecutive state to the execution condition. In this example, the number of consecutive acquisitions of the special game repeatedly obtained while continuing the specific game state (entering ball easy state) reaches the specified number (20 times) and at least the final N
In the second round, the condition is to be won by high profit big hit (16R big hit). The special effect is displayed on the time axis across the variation effect of the decorative symbol and the big hit effect. However, the special rendition ends with the round rendition in the big hit rendition (the final round), and the subsequent end demonstration remarks are not included. As the contents of this special effect, for example, by displaying the rare characters with high rarity that appear only in the special effect one by one in turn, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction with consecutive hits. A premium feeling can be raised.

  Next, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive villa effect and the special effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are time charts showing the relationship between the on-hold on-the-line effect and the special effect. In the following, the number of consecutive resorts is also expressed as “N”, and the specified number of times is also expressed as “Nset”.

(2-1) When a pending in-line resort effect occurs due to a symbol change or a special game pertaining to the previous big hit, a big hit (later big hit) by this pending in-link element is the number of consecutive passes as the occurrence condition of the special effect Will not be counted and will not be a requirement for special effects. That is, as shown in FIG. 39, when the preceding operation reserving ball is digested and a big hit is won in the judgment of yes or no (t21), if it is at the time of the digestion, it shifts to the pending internal connection effect A determination processing and If it is the time of a start, it will transfer to a pending | holding consecutive resort production B determination process. If there is a specific hold (the third is a specific hold in the illustrated example) in the subsequent operation hold ball in this hold internal play effect A, B determination processing, whether or not the execution of the hold internal play effect A, B is possible or not If it is decided by lottery, if it is elected, if there is a symbol change, a pending internal connection effect A occurs (t22), and if a special game is under execution, a pending internal connection effect B occurs (t23). Here, assuming that the present jackpot is the number N of consecutive villas = N set-first jackpot, the reserved intra-garden villa effect A (t 2
2) Or when notifying the presence of a specific hold that is the N-th big hit in consecutive loafing at the reserved U-in consecutive loaf effect B (t23), the symbol fluctuation with the big hit in this consecutive loaf N = Nset-th time (t25) ) And the special game round effect (t26), no special effect is generated. The reason is that, in the present embodiment, two special game states (in this example, the special game states of the Nset-first and the Nset-th ones) are triggered by the occurrence of the reserved U-line consecutive effects A and B. In order to generate special continuous effects to be shown as one special gaming state (t24 to t26), the effect is not included in the number of consecutive times as a condition for executing special effects, but the special effect is included in the Nset-time big hit It is because the direction of avoiding execution does not lose the player's sense of satisfaction due to the simulated extension of the special game, and the competition between the special effect and the special continuous effect can be avoided, and the overall effect can be balanced. Internally, the number of consecutive resorts is updated as one consecutive resort even if it is a big hit by the reserved resorts.

(2-2) When special effects are generated across the symbol variation and the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a specific suspension in the subsequent operation suspension ball when the symbol variation is started. In the fluctuating effect, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A does not occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, the preceding operation holding ball is digested, and as a result of winning the high profit jackpot in the judgment of success or not (t 31), the number N of consecutive bundling becomes Nset number, and the symbol variation and the special game A special effect occurs over the t (t31 to t3
3) In the case of the symbol change, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold (with the third specific hold in the illustrated example) in the subsequent operation hold ball in the corresponding symbol variation, the pending inside consecutive villa effect A Not generated (t32). The reason is that the competition between the special effect in the symbol change and the reserved internal connection effect A avoids the fact that the effect of the two effects becomes relatively thin.

(2-3) When a special effect occurs across the symbol variation and the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation holding ball when the symbol variation starts. In the variation production, the on-hold consecutive villa production B may occur. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, as a result of the previous action holding ball being digested and winning / decision determination winning a high profit jackpot (t31), the number of consecutive homes N = the specified number of times Nset, and the symbol variation and special game A special performance occurs across the t (t32 to t3
3) In the case of the special game, regardless of whether or not there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball (in the example shown, there is a specific hold in the third example) Can be generated (t
34). This is because, as described above, the special effect is executed from the symbol variation effect to the special game round effect, and therefore the on-hold Renso effect B is generated in the end demonstration effect after the round effect (t34). The reason is that the situation in which a special effect and a pending internal connection effect B are in competition during the special game is avoided. In addition, in the case where the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is not generated during the special game, even if there is a specific hold within a limited period after the end of the special game, the symbol change effect related to the specific hold is designated as the special symbol change effect. Rather than generating, normally shortened jackpot variation effect (completed only with the symbol variation effect related to the specific hold, not the special symbol variation effect related to the symbol variation effect related to the off-holding scheduled to be digested first) It may be generated as an instant hit effect).

  Subsequently, the procedure of operation processing in the first modified example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS.

(Special effect determination processing: first modification)
First, the special effect determination process (S736) according to the subroutine of S736 of FIG. 29 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special effect determination process (S736).

First, it is determined whether or not the number N of consecutive loaves is smaller than the specified number Nset by 1 with reference to the consecutive loaves counter of the sub main information storage means 260 (S751). Number of consecutive nights N
= When the specified number of times Nset-1 (S751: YES), that is, if the lottery result of the special symbol to be changed this time is a big hit, if the number N of consecutive units is scheduled to reach the specified number Nset , The information stored in the variation effect content determination area of the sub main information storage means 260 in the above S732 (result of the winning lottery and the big hit classification) is analyzed, the lottery result of the special symbol to be the current variation target is 16R big hit It is determined whether there is any (S752). If the lottery result is 16R big hit (S 752: YES), that is, if the number of consecutive times N reaches the specified number Nset, and the big hit with this number of consecutive times N is to be a high profit big hit, sub main information It is determined whether the special continuous effect flag in the storage unit 260 is on (S753).

  If the special continuous effect flag is not on (S753: NO), that is, if the special continuous effect is not being executed, the number of the effect pattern of the special effect is submain information storage means 260 to execute the special effect. It temporarily stores in the special effect pattern storage area of (S754). Then, the special effect flag in the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S755). Here, the special effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special effect is executed. Although not shown, the special effect flag is turned off when the round effect ends.

  On the other hand, if the special continuous effect flag is ON (S753), that is, if the special continuous effect is already being executed, S754 and S755 are skipped to avoid the conflict between the special effect and the special continuous effect. To complete this process.

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: first modification)
Next, the on-premises / on-premises presentation A determination process (S737) according to the subroutine of S737 in FIG. 29 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737) in the first modified example.

Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is that the process of S760 is added, and if the special effect is already being executed, the execution of the pending internal connection effect A is avoided. . In FIG. 42, the processes in S761 to S770 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the process in S760, which is a difference, will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether the special effect flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S760). If the special effect flag is not on (S760: NO), that is, if the special effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to the next S761 to continue the determination of whether or not the on-hold extended resort effect A can be executed. On the other hand, if the special effect flag is on (S760: YES), that is, if the special effect is already being executed, the processing after S761 is skipped in order to avoid the execution of the in-hold extended resort effect A. To complete this process.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: first modification)
Next, the on-premises / on-premises effect B determination process (S805) according to the subroutine of S805 in FIG. 31 in the first modification will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive-play effect B determination process (S805) in the first modified example.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S859, S862, and S863, and depending on whether or not the special effect is in execution, It is a point which is different from the effect pattern selection process. In FIG. 43, the processes of S851 to S858 and S868 to S870 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S859, S862, and S863 which are differences are mainly described.

  First, when execution of the on-hold consecutive resort production B is determined, it is determined whether or not the special production flag of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is on (S859). If the special effect flag is not on (S859: NO), that is, if the special effect is not being executed, the extended game effect pattern selection process 1 for determining the contents of the reserved extended resort effect B is executed ( S862). In the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1, the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 8B is obtained, and the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210, so that a plurality of types are obtained. One of the consecutive-village production patterns is determined by lottery.

  On the other hand, if the special effect flag is on (S859: YES), that is, if the special effect is being executed, the consecutive resort effect pattern selection process 2 for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B is performed. Execute (S863). In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, while acquiring a consecutive resort production pattern table (not shown) different from the above-described FIG. 8B, a consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210. Among the plural types of multi-story production patterns, one of the multi-story production patterns is determined by lottery. In the non-illustrated twin pattern effect pattern table, only the continuous pattern effect pattern generated in the end demonstration effect is defined, and the continuous pattern effect pattern generated in the start demonstration effect or the round effect is not defined. That is, in the consecutive residence effect pattern selection process 2, only the adjacent passage effect pattern for the end demonstration effect is selected. This is because, as described above, the special effect is executed from the variable effect to the round effect. This is because it is possible to avoid a conflict between the production and the on-hold Renso production B.

As described above, according to the first modified example of the first embodiment, after the occurrence of the pending internal row presentation, if a big hit is made by the pending internal row, the number N of consecutive passages reaches the specified number Nset internally Even in the case where it is, the occurrence of the special effect is prohibited, and the effect to be continued in conjunction with the occurrence of the pending in-line effect (in this example, the special continuous effect or the special background effect within the limited period) By avoiding the situation in which the special effect and the special effect compete, it is possible to prevent the effect of the pending in-line effect from becoming thin, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described first modification, the expectation for the special effect is achieved in the number of unreachable times (for example, 5, 10, 15 times) before the number N of consecutive resorts reaches the specified number Nset (= 20 times). For example, a special via effect composed of a part of the special effect may be provided. At this time, in the above-described first modified example, when the special performance is executed when the number of extended games reaches the specified number (20 times), basically the execution of the on-hold extended game production is limited (terminated). However, in the case of a special route effect, it may be configured so that the on-hold consecutive villa effect can be executed simultaneously even when the special route effect is being executed. .

[First Embodiment-Second Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Relationship between on-premise and on-play mode)
In the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode on the presentation control board 200 side is uniquely determined according to the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. The production mode can be selected with the operation of the production button 15 as a trigger.

  That is, in this modification, when a big hit (initial hit) occurs in a normal state, during the big hit production (during the end demonstration production), the type of the symbol variation production and the big hit production after the special game ends is specified. The player himself / herself can select the production mode from a plurality of types. In this example, as the probability variation effect mode Mβ during the ST period, two effect modes (first effect mode M1 and second effect mode M2) having different effect types are prepared, and a plurality of types are provided for each effect mode. The variation presentation pattern is stored. About this variation production pattern, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the presentation mode is different, the variation presentation patterns of different presentation contents are selected. It will be.

  The first effect mode M1 and the second effect mode M2 are configured as battle effect modes in which the player-side ally character battles against the enemy character, and the player-side ally character and the opponent's enemy for each effect mode. Characters are set to be different from each other.

  While staying in the first effect mode M1, a change effect pattern of effect contents in which the teammate character C1 corresponding to the effect mode M1 battles against an enemy character on the stage is selected as the symbol change effect. Further, while staying in the first effect mode M1, the first effect mode M1 is selected by selecting a jackpot effect pattern of the effect contents (attack type) that attacks the enemy character with the ally character C1 as the main character as the jackpot effect. The reciprocal relationship between the symbol variation production and the jackpot production is secured.

  While staying in the second effect mode M2, as the symbol variation effect, a variation effect pattern of effect contents in which the teammate character C2 corresponding to the effect mode M2 battles against the enemy character and the enemy's hide is selected. In addition, while staying in the second effect mode M2, as the big hit effect, the big hit effect pattern of the effect content (defense system) that protects the attack from the enemy character with the ally character C2 as the main character is selected. Reciprocity of symbol variation production and big hit production in the production mode M2 is secured.

The selection of the effect mode is performed by displaying a predetermined mode selection screen during the end demonstration effect in the big hit effect when the first hit occurs in the normal state. While the mode selection screen is displayed, an operation valid period in which the operation of the effect button 15 is validated is set. In the mode selection screen, the display area of the effect display device 70 is divided into two right and left, the name of the teammate character C1 is displayed with the related image in the left area, and the name of the teammate character C2 is displayed with the related image in the right area. The Then, effect modes M1, M2 corresponding to the teammate characters C1, C2 selected by the effect button 15 during the operation effective period are set. If no operation is performed during the operation valid period, one of the effect modes is set in the internal lottery.

  Subsequently, the relationship between the on-hold consecutive resort production and the production mode in the second modification will be described.

  (3-1) The execution probability (occurrence frequency) of the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is different between when staying in the first effect mode M1 and when staying in the second effect mode M2. It is set. In this example, when staying in the first effect mode M1, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 90% (high probability), non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%, while staying in the second effect mode M2 If it is, execute at a rate of 10% (low probability) and determine non-execution at a rate of 90%. In addition, as long as the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive villa production A differs for each production mode, when staying in any of the production modes, the on-hold consecutive villa production A is not executed. The execution probability of the villa production A may be set to 0%.

  (3-2) The execution probability (frequency of occurrence) of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B is set the same in the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and in the case of staying in the second effect mode M2 Yes. In this example, even when staying in any of the effect modes M1 and M2, for example, execution is performed at a rate of 80%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 20%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive villa effect B may be made different for each effect mode as in the on-hold consecutive villa effect A.

  (3-3) When execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production A is determined, the content of the on-hold consecutive villa production A (continuous villa production pattern) is the second when the first production mode M1 is staying. The same setting is made when the user is staying in the production mode M2. Here, FIG. 44 (A) is a schematic view showing a multi-use effect pattern table of the non-premises-in-one effect A in the present modification. In this example, in the in-hold extended villa production A, any one of the same extended villa production patterns PA1 and PA2 is selected regardless of the production mode. The effect patterns PA1 and PA2 have been described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  (3-4) When the execution of the pending in-line consecutive-room effect B is determined, the effect contents of the pending-in-period consecutive-state effect B (continuous-up effect pattern) are the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and the second It is set to be different from the case where the user is staying in the production mode M2. Here, FIG. 44 (B) is a schematic view showing a multi-use effect pattern table of pending inner-run multi-effect effect B in the present modification. In this example, in the on-hold consecutive villa production B, one of the consecutive villa production patterns PB11, PB12, and PB13 is selected in the first production mode, and in the second production mode, the villa production patterns PB21, PB22. , PB23 is selected. In the first effect mode M1, when the consecutive-village effect patterns PB11 to PB13 are selected, special effect images “BX11” to “BX13” that do not appear in any scene other than the on-hold extended-village effect. Is displayed. The effect images BX11 to BX13 correspond to, for example, an attack-based effect content in which an image imitating an "invincible sword" or character information such as "Attack is the maximum defense" appears. On the other hand, in the second effect mode M2, when the consecutive-village effect patterns PB21 to PB23 are selected, a special effect image “BX21” that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold consecutive-village effect. "BX23" is displayed. As the effect images BX21 to BX23, for example, an effect imposing content of a defense system in which an image imitating an "invincible armor" or character information such as "complete defense" appears.

  Next, the procedure of the operation process in the second modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Big hit effect content determination processing: second modification)
First, the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) according to the subroutine of S638 in FIG. 27 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit effect content determination processing (S638) in the second modification.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S829 to S831, and is that the operation of the effect button 15 is set effectively during the end demonstration effect at the time of the first hit. In FIG. 45, the processes of S801 to S826 and S835 to S838 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S829 to S831, which are differences, are mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current big hit is the first hit (S829). In the case of the first hit (S829: YES), an operation effective period for measuring the operation effective period of the effect button 15 so that the effect mode can be selected according to the operation of the effect button 15 by the player. A predetermined value is set in the timer (S830). The operation valid period is a period in which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid. Subsequently, the effect button valid flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S831). The effect button effective flag is a flag which is turned on when the operation of the effect button 15 is effective.

(Effect button monitoring control process: the second modification)
Next, the effect button monitoring control process (S617) according to the subroutine of S617 in FIG. 26 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing details of the effect button monitoring control process (S617).

  First, it is determined whether the effect button valid flag of the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S951). If the effect button valid flag is on (S951: YES), it is determined whether the operation valid period of the effect button 15 is in progress, that is, whether the operation valid period timer is not "0" (S952) ). As described above, the operation valid period timer is set to a predetermined value at the start of the end demonstration effect at the first hit, and is decremented by 1 ms each time the timer interrupt process described later occurs. Further, during the operation effective period, an effect screen (mode selection screen) based on the end demonstration effect pattern set in S804 is displayed, and based on the operation input of the effect button 15, the first effect mode M1 and the second effect mode. Any one of M2 can be selected. Specifically, although not shown, two selected images corresponding to each effect mode are displayed on the mode selection screen horizontally, vertically or vertically, and the display mode of the selected image is displayed at predetermined time intervals during the operation valid period. By sequentially switching, one of these two selected images can be selected according to the operation timing of the effect button 15, and an effect mode corresponding to this selected image is set.

Here, when the operation button 15 is in the operation effective period (S952: YES), it is determined whether or not there is an operation input of the effect button 15 (S953). When there is an operation input of the effect button 15 (S953: YES), the operation input information of the effect button 15 is stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S954). In this example, the operation input information includes information indicating that the first effect mode has been selected and information indicating that the second effect mode has been selected. Subsequently, an image control command for instructing the operation input information of the effect button 15 to the image control board 300 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S955). Further, when there is an operation input of the effect button 15 as described above, an operation valid flag is set in order to confirm the operation input and set the end of the operation valid period even before the operation valid period has elapsed. Turn off (S956). On the other hand, if it is not during the operation effective period (S952
: NO), that is, when the operation valid period timer is "0", the effect button valid flag is turned off (S956).

(Effect state transition process: second modification)
Next, an effect state transition process (S632) according to the subroutine of S632 in FIG. 27 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing details of the rendering state transition process (S632) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the process of S714 to S720, based on the operation input information of the effect button 15 set in the effect button monitoring control process (S617) described above (the effect by the player). The point is that the production mode is determined alternatively by the pressing operation of the button 15). In FIG. 47, the processes of S701 to S705 and S721 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S714 to S720 which are differences will be mainly described.

  First, when the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high probability shortening fluctuation state β (S706: YES), it is determined whether the present big hit is the first hit (S714). If it is the first hit (S714: YES), it is determined whether the operation input information set in S954 is information indicating that the first effect mode M1 has been selected (S715). When the first effect mode M1 is selected (S715: YES), the first effect mode M1 is set as a transition destination of the effect mode (S716). When the first effect mode M1 is entered, the first probability background data is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S717). Then, in the first effect mode M1, for example, a first probability background image of “the arena” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  On the other hand, when the operation input information set in S954 is information indicating that the second effect mode M2 has been selected and operated (S715: NO), the second effect mode M2 is set as the transition destination of the effect mode ( S718). When the second effect mode M2 is entered, the second probability background data is set in the background data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S719). Then, in the second effect mode M2, for example, the second probable background image of "enemy agitate" is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation.

  If the current big hit is not the first hit (S714: NO), the effect mode and the background image selected at the first hit are maintained (S720). Not only the operation input at the time of the first hit in S714 to S719 but also the effect mode may be switched when a certain condition is satisfied. As specific conditions, for example, when a specific jackpot (including a case where the jackpot type is a specific type or a case where the jackpot effect is a specific effect), or when a predetermined condition is satisfied with respect to the extended resort state (The occurrence of the special effect described above) or the case where there is a specific operation input during the big hit (for example, the button 5 times pressed or long pressed as the special operation input at the specific timing of the big hit).

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: second modification)
Next, the on-premises / on-premises presentation A determination process (S737) according to the subroutine of S737 in FIG. 29 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect A determination process (S737) in the second modified example.

Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S771 to S773, and the execution probability of the on-hold consecutive resort production A lottery processing is set to the production mode set in the production state transition processing (S632). The point is that they are different. In FIG. 48, the processes of S761 to S765 and S767 to S770 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and thus the difference is S7.
The processing from 71 to S773 will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the effect mode currently being stayed is the first effect mode M1 (S771). In the case of the first effect mode M1 (S771: YES), the on-hold extended resort production A lottery for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production A in the first effect mode M1. Process 1 is executed (S772). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect A lottery process 1, referring to the continuous effect effect A lottery table (not shown), the continuous effect effect lottery random number value matches the judgment value of either “execution” or “non-execution” Determine if there is a run. In this example, execution is determined at a rate of 90%, for example, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%.

  On the other hand, in the case where the effect mode during the stay is the second effect mode M2 (S771: NO), in order to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort effect A in the second effect mode M2. The on-premises in-line consecutive effect A lottery process 2 is executed (S773). In this on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect A lottery process 2, referring to the continuous effect effect A lottery table (not shown), the continuous effect effect lottery random number value matches the judgment value of either “execution” or “non-execution” Determine if there is a run. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 10% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 90%.

  As described above, in the present modification, the probability that the on-hold extended villa production A is executed when staying in the first presentation mode M1 and the second presentation mode M2, that is, the on-hold extended villa production. The frequency of occurrence of A is set to be different.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: second modification)
Next, the on-premises / on-premises effect B determination process (S805) according to the subroutine of S805 in FIG. 45 in the second modification will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive-play effect B determination process (S805) in the second modified example.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S860, S864, and S865, and the extended villa production pattern table of the on-hold extended villa production B is set in the production state transition process (S632). It is in the point which is different according to the production mode. In FIG. 49, the processes of S851 to S857 and S869 to S870 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S860, S864, and S865, which are different points, will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not the effect mode currently being stayed is the first effect mode M1 (S860). If it is the first effect mode (S 860: YES), the multi-station effect pattern selection process 1 is executed to determine the content of the on-premise internal multi-room effect B (S 864). In the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 1, the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above is obtained, and the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210. One of the consecutive villa production patterns is determined by lottery from among the consecutive villa production patterns PB11 to PB13. As described above, in this consecutive residence effect pattern selection process 1, only the adjacent passage effect patterns PB11 to PB13 of the content of the attack system are selected.

  On the other hand, if the rendering mode during the stay is the second rendering mode M2 (S860: NO), the continuous rendering effect pattern selection process 2 for determining the content of the pending internal rendering B is executed (S865) . In this consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, while obtaining the consecutive resort production pattern table shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above, the consecutive resort production pattern random number value is obtained from the production lottery random number generating means 210, and a plurality of types are obtained. One of the consecutive villa production patterns is determined by lottery from among the consecutive villa production patterns PB21 to PB23. As described above, in the consecutive resort production pattern selection process 2, only the consecutive resort production patterns PB21 to 23 having the contents of the defense system are selected.

  As described above, in the present modification, when the execution of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B is determined, the on-off in-line consecutive effects in the case of staying in the first effect mode M1 and in the case of staying in the second effect mode M2 The display mode of B (continuous production pattern) is set to be different.

  As mentioned above, according to the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment, according to the classification of the production mode which the player himself selected, by changing the appearance rate and the content of the production of the on-hold consecutive villa production, It is possible to provide the player with on-hold reservation effect suitable for the preference, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present modification, the special effect mode of staying only within the limited period after the end of the special game is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special effect mode may be provided. In this case, a first special effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode and a second special effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode are provided, and a desired special effect mode is obtained by the player's operation after the first hit. May be configured to be selectable. In this configuration, for example, a special continuous effect may be generated when shifting to the first special effect mode, and a special continuous effect may not be generated when shifting to the second special effect mode. Further, as a further modification, at least one of the one or more subsequent operation holding balls being in a specific holding state makes it possible to carry out the holding inside consecutive effects B in the special game display process. The special game is a trigger for transitioning from the first effect mode M1 to the second effect mode M2 even under the condition that the on-hold in-line consecutive effect execution condition is satisfied and the on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect execution condition is satisfied. In the case of a game (referred to as "special special game"), the frequency of occurrence (execution probability) of the pending internal connection effect B as compared to the case where the special game is not a special special game (referred to as "non-special special game") ) May be configured to be low. In that case, the jackpot type includes at least the first jackpot and the second jackpot, and when the first jackpot is won, transition to the first effect mode after the end of the special game (non-special special game), When the second jackpot is won, the second effect mode is entered after the end of the special game (special special game). At this time, during the execution of the special special game, for example, a special jackpot effect that does not appear in any other scene is executed. Therefore, when winning the second jackpot, a special jackpot effect is generated during the special game (during special special game). The frequency of the villa production B is set relatively low.

First Embodiment Third Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the third modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Reserved in-house production requiring multiple operations)
In the first embodiment described above, in the on-hold consecutive resort production, it is a configuration that suggests or notifies the possibility that there is a specific hold that becomes a big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, but is not limited thereto, and is specified. Not only the presence or absence of a hold, but also a change presentation aspect of the subsequent operation holding ball may be suggested or notified.

  In this modification, while suggesting or informing the fluctuating effect mode of the subsequent actuated ball in the on-hold extended game effect B, suggesting or informing the fluctuating effect mode of the subsequent actuated ball in the on-hold consecutive game effect A. Do not do. In addition, the reason for not giving a suggestion or notification of the change production mode in the pending U-Ran effects A, is because the pending U-in-Ran effects A occur within the fluctuation, so special on both sides of the special game due to the big hit in the fluctuation This is because the significance of suggesting or notifying the variation effect mode after the game is low.

  Now, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B in the present modification will be described. FIG. 50: is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the content of an effect of pending internal succession effects B in this modification. In the effect contents of the pending inside continuous effect B in this modification, the treasure box displayed on the screen is opened by the player operating the effect button 15 a plurality of times, so that the obtained point value is obtained. Correspondingly, the presence / absence of the specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball and the variation effect mode are suggested or notified. In this way, in order to receive the presence or absence of specific hold and the suggestion or notification of the variation effect mode in the on-hold consecutive resort effect B, it is necessary to perform a plurality of button operations by the player.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 50, a total of three treasure chests are arranged in a horizontal row on the screen, and one treasure chest is opened by one operation of the effect button 15, and this opened treasure chest. The number of acquired points (0 points or 1 point) appears. And according to the total acquisition score obtained when opening all treasure chests, the presence or absence of specific suspension in the following operation | movement pending ball and a fluctuation presentation aspect will be suggested or alert | reported.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present modification, when the total acquisition score is 0, it indicates that there is a possibility that a working ball with reach effect is present in the following working ball. When the total number of acquired points is 1, it is definitely notified that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball. When the total acquisition score is 2 points, it announces definitely that there is a specific suspension which will be a 16R big hit or 8R big hit in the following operation pending ball, that is, that it will hold on to a hold. When the total number of acquired points is 3, the fact that there is a specific hold that becomes a 16R big hit in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, a notification of a hold in the high profit big hit, is definitely notified.

  Here, the continuous rendering effect pattern in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a schematic view showing an example of a continuous pattern effect pattern table for pending internal continuous effect B in the third modified example. A plurality of types of consecutive-village effect patterns are defined in the consecutive-village effect pattern table. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining the villa effect pattern according to the villa effect pattern random value Is set, and based on which judgment value the continuous rendering effect pattern random value belongs to, the continuous rendering effect pattern is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 51, in the consecutive resort production pattern table, according to each consecutive resort production pattern, the number of points for each treasure chest that can be acquired by one button operation (the score of the first treasure chest, the second The treasure box score and the third treasure chest score) have been specified (see the column “Production contents (acquired points)” in the figure), and each consecutive villa production pattern has a total treasure chest score (0, It is classified into a plurality of pattern types according to one point, two points, three points). That is, when the total acquisition score is “0 point”, only the continuous residence effect pattern PB31 is selected, and when the total acquisition score is “1 point”, any one of the continuous relationship effect patterns PB32 to PB34 is selected, and the total When the acquired score is “2 points”, any of the extended game effect patterns PB35 to PB37 is selected. When the total acquired score is “3 points”, only the extended game effect pattern PB38 is selected. For example, in the case where the multi-station effect pattern PB35 is selected, “0 point” can be acquired by the first operation, “1 point” can be acquired by the second operation, and “1 point” can be acquired by the third operation. Is set, and as a result, the total number of earned points "2 points" is set.

  In this consecutive resort production pattern table, the selection rate of the consecutive resort production pattern is set to be different according to the result of the prefetch determination (preliminary determination). In principle, in the Renso production pattern, the selection rate is assigned according to the final total score, and when the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, the total score is “0”, “ If the result of the pre-judgment is out while the selection rate is higher in the order of 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, the total acquisition score is 0 points, 1 point , “2 points”, “3 points”, the selection rate decreases in this order.

Furthermore, even if the result of the pre-reading determination is out of order and the big hit, the selection rate of the villa performance pattern varies depending on the type of outage (out of reach, out of reach) and the type of big hit (8R big hit, 16R big hit). In other words, if the result of the pre-reading determination is out of reach, no more than “1” will be selected as the total number of points earned, so when the total number of points earned exceeds “1”, the subsequent operation It is deterministic that an operation holding ball with a reach effect exists in the holding ball. Even if the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, “1 point” may be selected as the total score, but in this example, only the reach fluctuation is selected as the big hit fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, when the total score becomes “1 point” or more, it is definite that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball. Does not occur.

  Similarly, when the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit, “2 points” or more may be selected as the total number of points to be acquired. On the other hand, when the result of the prefetch determination is out of reach (out of normal reach, super out of reach) Since there is no selection of "2 points" or more as the total acquisition points, when the total acquisition points become "2 points" or more, there is a specific suspension in the subsequent operation holding ball, that is, It will be definitive to get on hold. Furthermore, when the result of the pre-reading determination is 16R big hit, “3 points” may be selected as the total score. On the other hand, when the result of the pre-reading determination is 8R big hit, the total score is “3 points”. Is not selected, so that when the total score reaches “3 points”, there is a specific hold of 16 big hits in the following operation hold ball, that is, a high profit big hit and a pending ream. It will be definitive to stay quiet.

  The contents of such a reserved in-ream villa effect B will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, the case where the consecutive resort production pattern PB37 is selected is illustrated. As described above, in this combination pattern, since "0 point" can be acquired by the first operation, "1 point" can be acquired by the second operation, and "1 point" can be acquired by the third operation, the total acquisition score can be obtained. Is the contents of the effect of definitely informing the occurrence of two points, that is, the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort.

  First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), with the start of the operation effective period in which the operation of the effect button 15 is made effective, images of three treasure boxes (closed treasure boxes) are displayed on the screen, "Let's open the treasure chest by pressing the button" is displayed. On the screen, “remaining time” at which the operation button 15 can be operated and “total number of points acquired” indicating the number of points acquired at the current stage are displayed. Further, a cursor pointing to the treasure chest to be operated is displayed on the screen, and the cursor is gradually shifted from left to right by one treasure according to the remaining operable time. . On the screen, the left treasure chest is also called “first treasure chest”, the central treasure chest is called “second treasure chest”, and the right treasure chest is also called “third treasure chest”.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50B, when the effect button 15 is operated when the cursor points to the first treasure box, the first treasure box is opened. At this time, in the case where the treasure box is detached, the letter "Sorry" appears along with the letter "0 point" from the inside of the treasure box.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50C, when the effect button is operated 15 when the cursor points to the second treasure box, the second treasure box is opened. At this time, when the treasure box is hit, the word "one chance" appears along with the letter "one point" from the inside of the treasure box. At this time, since “1 point” or more is assured as the total number of points acquired, it becomes definite that there is an operation holding ball with a reach effect in the subsequent operation holding ball.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50D, when the effect button 15 is operated when the cursor points to the third treasure chest, the third treasure chest is opened. At this time, when the treasure box is hit, the word "one chance" appears along with the letter "one point" from the inside of the treasure box. In addition, a character of "two points" is displayed as a "total number of points obtained by adding up the first obtained points and the second obtained points. As a result, the fact that the specific hold is included in the subsequent operation hold ball, that is, the fact that the hold is to be held is definitely notified.

  When the effect button 15 is not operated in spite of the occurrence of the pending inside consecutive effect B as described above, the treasure box remains closed, and it is possible to determine whether the subsequent operation pending ball is read ahead. I can not get results. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that each operation of the effect button 15 has a meaning. In addition, in this modification, although it was set as the structure which requires operation of multiple times, it is not limited to this, It is good also as a structure which suggests or alert | reports the change effect aspect of a subsequent action | operation hold ball only by one operation. . In addition, if the button operation is performed by the player but the button operation is not performed despite the fact that “three points” is obtained, it is complementarily performed that is different from the on-hold consecutive effects effect B − You may comprise so that 2 may be performed at the time of completion | finish demonstration production. Conversely, if the button operation is performed at a prescribed timing and "3 points" can be obtained, it may be configured not to perform the on-hold on-line consecutive effect B-2.

  As mentioned above, according to the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment, when not only the possibility that specific reservation exists in a subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl, but the subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl was digested in the retentive in a reservation in stop. By suggesting or informing even the fluctuating production mode, it is possible to teach the player a variety of additional information according to the production result. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the synergistic effect of the on-hold consecutive resort production and the button production can further increase the added value when the on-hold consecutive resort production occurs, and can further enhance the player-participatory presentation effect. .

[First Embodiment-Fourth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the fourth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

(Confirmed notification timing by pending Uranso effect)
In the first embodiment described above, the on-hold consecutive villa production becomes definitive when the on-hold consecutive villa production A occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the consecutive villas are determined after a predetermined condition is satisfied after the consecutive villas production A is generated without determining the consecutive villas.

  For example, in the probability variation mode in which the gaming state is a probability variation state of a special symbol, a battle effect is developed as a symbol variation effect that includes a battle between a teammate character and an enemy character. The battle effect in this modification is an effect that suggests that the player's ally character wins the enemy character immediately before the end of the symbol variation effect (immediately before the decoration symbol stops), thereby confirming the 16R jackpot with the variation. It is.

  In the present modification, there may be a case in which the on-premises in-house effect A is generated as a battle effect (special battle effect) during symbol change. In this special battle effect, a special enemy character that does not appear in the normal battle effect appears. In the case of this special battle effect, if the teammate character wins the enemy character, the 16-hit win in the change and the fact that there is a specific hold in the subsequent action holding ball, that is, the hold-in-range resort Determine what to do. On the other hand, if the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character in this special battle effect, the deviation due to the change becomes definite, and further, the occurrence of the reserved renzo is denied (so-called gasset effect). ). Thus, in this modified example, until the result of the battle in the battle effect is notified, it is not determined whether or not a reserved resort will occur. Can be enhanced.

  In addition, it is not limited only to the on-hold renso production A, and also on the on-hold renso production B, the on-hold renso production B is not determined at the time of the on-hold renso production B, and the on-hold renso production B is generated. Then, it is good also as a structure by which a predetermined condition is satisfied and a pending | holding range resort is decided. In the present modification, as the effect contents of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect B, for example, a roulette effect in which the possibility of the on-off in-line consecutiveness is notified by the roulette stop result is exemplified. In this roulette effect, a total of three stop positions of “弐”, “弐”, and “参” are provided, and when the roulette stops at “壱”, the pending inside row is denied and stops at “で” If it does, it is suggested that there is a possibility of holding Uchiso, and if it is stopped at "Go," it will be notified that the holding Uchiso is decided. In this way, in this modified example, until the lottery result is notified in the roulette effect, it is not determined whether or not the reserved resort will occur. Can be increased. Note that the roulette may be stopped on condition of player's button operation.

  As described above, according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment, it is taught to the player whether or not the on-hold on-hold state is decided until the predetermined condition is satisfied even if the on-hold on-line continuous effect is generated. Because it is not, it is possible to maintain interest in the contents of the effect until the final timing when the on-hold in-line effect is finished, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

[First Embodiment-Fifth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the fifth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be assigned the same reference numerals. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Button notice effect including rendezvous in the reservation)
In the first embodiment described above, the on-hold consecutive villa effect A is configured to display an effect image corresponding to the consecutive villa effect pattern, but a button notice effect that displays a notice effect image associated with a button operation by the player. It is good also as a structure including the on-hold consecutive resort production A as one aspect.

  Here, in the first embodiment described above, the notice effect pattern corresponding to the change effect pattern is selected, and the notice effect is generated during the symbol change effect. As one of the notice effects, a button operation by the player is performed. There is a button preview effect required. The button preview effect is a preview effect that indicates or notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined effect image on condition of a button operation by the player. In the present modification, the pending in-line consecutive effect A is generated in a form included in the button advance effect. At this time, in a normal button notice effect, a plurality of items A, B, and C appear on the screen, and any one item can be selected. On the other hand, in the button advance notice effect as the pending inside consecutive effect A, in addition to the normal items A, B and C, a special item D can appear on the screen and this item D can be selected. . In this manner, the appearance of the special item D during the button preview effect notifies of the possibility of the on-hold reservation.

  As described above, according to the fifth modification of the first embodiment, the added value when the on-hold consecutive villa production is established can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the on-hold consecutive villa production and the button notice effect. The player participation type effect can be enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[First Embodiment-Sixth Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a sixth modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the sixth modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(Combination image of the rendezvous rendezvous production and design variation production)
In the above-described first embodiment, only the effects that do not appear in any other scenes are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image of the on-premises in-house effect B is displayed during the symbol variation effect It is good also as a structure which serves as one of the produced effects images. For example, in a battle effect during a symbol change effect, when there is a case where an effect image in which an ally character delivers a special move appears in some cases, this effect image may be used also as the effect image of the on-hold consecutive effect B effect. In addition, the reason for not combining the effect image of pending inside consecutive villa effect A and the effect image in the symbol variation effect is that, when the combination image is displayed during the symbol variation effect, this combined image is a normal battle effect Since it is difficult to identify whether it is displayed as a one-step process or as an on-hold range resort production A, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to accurately notify the player of the possibility of the on-hold range resort. Because it is expensive.

  As described above, according to the sixth modification of the first embodiment, since the effect image of the symbol variation effect and the effect image of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect are partially shared, the limited hardware of the gaming machine It is possible to prevent wasteful consumption of resources.

  In addition, you may provide the turning production | presentation in order to hear generation | occurrence | production of pending inside consecutive production effect B during a big hit production. In this case, while in the big hit effect, the pending inner row effect can be generated only once, but the beat effect can be generated multiple times. For example, if the above-mentioned combined-use image is scheduled to be displayed in a predetermined round during the big hit effect in the on-hold consecutive resort production B, for example, the on-hold consecutive resort production B (the relevant In order to recognize the occurrence of the combined image), a scattered image may be displayed that associates or foresees the occurrence of the combined image, such as the shadow of the friend character and the afterimage of the special move.

[First Embodiment-Seventh Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a seventh modification of the first embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the seventh modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

(The number of announcements for pending Uranso)
In the above-described first embodiment, the configuration is such that the possibility of the presence of a plurality of specific suspension may be notified in the subsequent operation suspension ball in the suspension internal linkage effect B. When teaching the possibility that there are multiple specific reservations within the operation reservation ball, the maximum value of the number of specific reservations that can be notified by the reservation internal arrangement effect (“the number of announcements within reservation”) is determined in advance In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of specific holdings existing in the subsequent operation holding ball within a range not exceeding the maximum value can be notified.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the maximum value of the number of on-hold notification in the on-hold in the on-the-off row consecutive effect A is “1”, and the maximum value of the on-hold in-position notification on the on-hold notification in B It is "2". That is, in the in-hold consecutive resort production A determination process, the pre-read determination for only the earliest specific hold among the subsequent operation hold balls is executed to notify the existence of one specific hold, while hold In the Inner Renso production B determination process, the pre-read determination for not only the earliest specific hold but also the subsequent specific hold among the subsequent operation hold balls is executed to notify the existence of two or more specific holds. It is configured to earn.

In this modification, when executing such a pending internal connection presentation A, B determination process, the number of specific suspension (called the "on-going application connection number") present in the subsequent operation pending ball is counted. In order to do so, set up a number of on-premises consecutive residences counters The on-hold on-premises number counter is sequentially updated within a range not exceeding the predetermined maximum value of on-premises on-line notification numbers. The maximum value of the number of on-premises in-line notification is set larger in the on-off in-line consecutive direction effect B than in the on-time in-line consecutive direction effect A. Specifically, the maximum value for the number of on-premises in-store notifications in the on-premises in-store effect A is "1", and the maximum value of the on-hold in-station notification numbers in on-off in-line effects B is "3" . In addition, the maximum value of the number of notification of pending reservation can be set in the range which becomes less than the maximum value of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol.

  As a notification mode of the number of in-hold resorts, the number of in-hold resorts is “1” when “one mystery” appears as in the first embodiment. If “2” appears in the “Mystery Book”, the possibility is “2” in the reserved resort, and if “3” appears in the “Reservation Book” The aspect which alert | reports the possibility that it is "3" of consecutive villas is illustrated.

  In addition, the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended villas in this modification is merely an example, and the maximum value of the number of in-hold extended villas in the on-hold extended villa production A may be “2” or more. The maximum value of the number of on-premises in-line announcements in the on-premises in-line succession effect B may be “4”.

  As described above, according to the seventh modified example of the first embodiment, the maximum values of the number of on-hold in-row notification numbers for on-hold in-row effect A and on-off in-row effect B are set to be different from each other. By renewing the number of reserved villas within a range that does not exceed, the display mode of the on-hold villas A and B can be abundant and varied depending on the number of consecutive villa notifications, As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Second Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game is determined based on the special symbol stop symbol (symbol group). In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the special symbol stop symbol (symbol group). The game state after the special game is determined on the basis of the game mode in the special game and the special game. That is, in the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the game ball enters the special winning opening (in this example, the second large winning opening 65 in this example) having the specific area in the special game and passes the specific area. The game machine is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type game machine that decides to shift to the probability change state after the end of the special game.

  FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the second grand prize winning opening 65 in the second embodiment. As described above, the second large winning opening 65 is provided with a second large winning opening switch 651 for detecting entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 65, and the second large winning opening A second special motorized symbol 652 for opening and closing 65 is provided. In addition, a distribution device 654 is provided in the second big winning opening 65, located downstream of the second big winning opening switch 651, for determining the gaming state after the end of the special game. The distribution device 654 is provided with a specific area 658 and a non-specific area 659 to which game balls that have entered the second grand prize winning opening 65 are distributed. In addition, the sorting device 654 is provided with a wing member 655 for selectively guiding the game ball entered in the second big winning opening 65 to the specific area 658 or the nonspecific area 659, and opens and closes the wing member 655. A specific area solenoid 656 is provided for this purpose. In a state where the wing member 655 is in the closed position, the specific area 658 is closed by the wing member 655, and the game balls are distributed to the non-specific area 659. On the other hand, when the blade member 655 is in the open position, the specific area 658 is opened, and the game balls are distributed to the specific area 658. In the specific area 658, a specific area switch 657 for detecting gaming balls having flowed into the specific area 658 is provided. The specific area switch 657 functions as a probability change switch for shifting the gaming state after the end of the special game to the state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated.

  In this example, the opening / closing operation of the second special motorized product 652 and the opening / closing operation of the blade member 655 are synchronously controlled in synchronization, and the second big winning opening 65 is open and the specific period 658 is temporally open. Are configured to overlap. Therefore, when the second grand prize opening 65 is opened, the specific area 658 is also opened, and when the second big prize opening 65 is closed, the specific area 658 is also closed. The drive control of the blade member 655 (specific area solenoid 656) is executed by the main control board 100 (electric combination control means 160).

  Based on the detection information from the specific area switch 657, the main control board 100 (the ball entrance determination means 110) determines whether the gaming ball has entered the specific area 658 of the second big winning opening 65 or not. Then, when entering the specific area 658 is detected, the main control board 100 (entering ball determining means 110) produces an effect control command (“specific area entering ball command”) including the specific area entering ball information. Generate).

  Next, a special symbol stop symbol (big hit type) in the second embodiment will be described.

  The upper part of FIG. 53 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the second embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, operation patterns of a stop symbol, a symbol group, and a special winning opening 64, 65 are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number value. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the symbol group A (16R length open big hit symbol) has symbols “5”, “6”, “7”, “D” for the symbols “1”, “2”, “3” and “4”. The symbol group B (8R short open jackpot symbol) is associated with 8 ′ ′.

  The lower part of FIG. 53 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the second embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, operation patterns of a stop symbol, a symbol group, and a special winning opening 64, 65 are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number value. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups C and D according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the symbol group C (16R length open big hit symbol) has the symbols "15", "16", "17", and "11", "12", "13" and "14". The symbol group D (8R length open jackpot symbol) is associated with 18 ".

  The “long open jackpot” is a big hit with a round game in which the second big winning opening 65 is long opened, and entry of the game ball into the specific area 658 is relatively easy. The “short open jackpot” is a big hit with a round game in which the second large winning opening 65 is short-opened, and it is relatively difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 658. In this embodiment, when the first special symbol is a big hit, it corresponds to a long open big hit (16R long open big hit) at a rate of 50%, and a short open big hit (8R short open big hit at the rate of the remaining 50%. ) On the other hand, when the second special symbol is a big hit, it corresponds to long open big hit (16R long open big hit, 8R long open big hit) at a rate of 100%.

Here, FIG. 54 is a time chart for describing an operation pattern of the special winning opening 64, 65 in the special game in the second embodiment. In the drawing, the state changes of the first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 in the special game are shown in time series from left to right. Between each round, an interval time (waiting time) in which the closed state of the big winning opening 64, 65 is maintained is provided. In the operation pattern of the special winning openings 64 and 65 in the present embodiment, it is determined that the second special winning opening 65 (specific area 658) is opened and closed only in a specific round of special games (also referred to as “specific round”). ing. In the present embodiment, the specific round is defined as the seventh round and the eighth round. However, the present invention is not limited to this, a specific round may be changed to another round number, and three or more specific rounds may be set.

  FIG. 54A shows a 16R long open pattern which is an operation pattern by the 16R long open big hit. In the 16R long opening pattern, the first big prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is used in the seventh and eighth rounds which are specific rounds. It is determined to open continuously for 29 seconds.

  FIG. 54B shows an 8R long open pattern which is an operation pattern by the 8R long open big hit. In the 8R long opening pattern, the first big prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is used in the seventh and eighth rounds, which are specific rounds. Is continuously opened for 29 seconds.

  Thus, when the 16R long open big hit or the 8R long open big hit is selected, the open period of the second big winning opening 65 is set to a long time of 29 seconds in the specific round, and the second big winning opening 65 Since the opening period and the opening period of the specific area 658 overlap with each other in time, a game ball that has entered from the second major winning opening 65 easily wins the specific area 658. As a result, a state in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 658 is maintained.

  FIG. 54C shows an 8R short open pattern which is an operation pattern by the 8R short open big hit. In the 8R short opening pattern, the first grand prize opening 64 is continuously opened for 29 seconds in rounds other than the specific round, while the second big prize opening 65 is provided in the seventh and eighth rounds, which are specific rounds. Is opened for 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, when the 8R short open big hit is selected, the second big prize opening 65 is opened only for an extremely short time of 0.2 seconds in a specific round, so that the game ball is in the second big prize opening 65. The possibility of entering the specific area 658 is extremely low. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which passage of the gaming ball to the specific area 658 is difficult or substantially impossible.

  When a game ball enters the specific area 658 in a specific round, after the special game ends, the state shifts to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state). In addition, when it shifts to the special variation state of the special symbol, it simultaneously shifts to the time shortening state and the electric chow support state of the special symbol, and as long as the positive variation state of the special symbol continues, the time shortening state of the special symbol and the electric chow support state also continue. In addition, after the end of the special game, when the next big hit does not occur in the number of times of variation of the special symbol within the ST number (100 times), the definite variation state of the special symbol is ended and it shifts to the normal state.

  On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 in the specific round, after the end of the special game, it becomes the time saving state (low probability state) of the special symbol. In addition, when it shifts to the time saving state of the special symbol, it shifts to the power chow support state at the same time, and as long as the time shortening state of the special symbol continues, the power chow support state also continues. In addition, after the end of the special game, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (70 times), the time saving state of the special symbol is ended, and the state shifts to the normal state.

Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the on-premises in-store effect B as a big hit effect can be performed at timings after the specific round in the special game. This is not the timing after the specific round has passed (at least after the game ball enters the specific area), the game state after the end of the special game transitions to the high probability state or the low probability state This is because it is difficult to report the occurrence of the pending U-Ran in this unconfirmed state. In other words, according to the game state after the end of the special game, the lottery result whether or not the subsequent operation holding ball existing in the special game will be a big hit depends, so whether or not to execute the pending internal consecutive effects B By making the lottery after the specific round, it is possible to make a notification of the reservation of the reserved resort. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the game ball has entered the specific area in the specific round, that is, the transition of the special symbol to the definite change state is committed after the end of the special game, The execution of B is determined. Therefore, in addition to the fact that there is a specific suspension that will be a big hit in the subsequent operation suspension ball in the present embodiment, the game state after the special game is a definite variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol and This is significant as an effect of definite notification. That is, in the seventh round, the eighth round, or the subsequent rounds, if there is no entry into the specific area 658, the on-premise-on-line effect B does not occur, in other words, the seventh round or the eighth When the on-hold consecutive resort effect B occurs in the round, it can be said that it is the same timing as the timing of entering the game ball into the specific area 658 or the timing after that.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, at the timing after the specific round (the timing after entering the specific area), the current determination is being performed with reference to the result of the prior determination (the prior determination number) from the main control board 100. When a preemptive determination of whether or not the game is in progress after the special game has ended (becomes a state of certain change by entering a specific area) is executed for the subsequent operation hold ball, and there is a specific hold that is a big hit Only the pending inside consecutive villa effect B can be executed by the lottery. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(Big Hit Effect Content Determination Process: Second Embodiment)
Next, the jackpot effect content determination process (S638) according to the subroutine of S638 in FIG. 27 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit effect content determination process (S638).

  Here, in the above-described first embodiment, the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (see S805 in FIG. 31) is executed in response to the reception of the start demo command, but this second embodiment. Then, the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process is executed in response to the reception of the specific area entry command. This is because, as described above, it is made consistent with the timing after the game ball enters the specific area 658 that the execution availability of the on-hold reservation effect B is entered. In FIG. 55, the processes of S801 to S818 and S821 to S838 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S841 to S843 which are differences will be mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether or not a specific area entry command is stored in the sub main information storage unit 260 (S841). If the specific area entry command is stored (S841: YES), the specific area entry flag of the sub-main information storage means 260 is turned on (S842). The on-premises in-line consecutive effect B determination process is executed (S843). In addition, the details of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect effect B determination process (S842) will be described later with reference to FIG. Subsequently, the jackpot effect replacement process is executed (S844). In this jackpot effect replacement process, the normal end demonstration effect pattern is replaced with the special end demonstration effect pattern, when the on-hold internal consecutive effect B (special continuous effect) is executed. In the preceding big hit effect replacement process (S806), when the special continuous effect is executed, the normal start demonstration effect pattern is replaced with the special start demonstration effect pattern. On the other hand, when the specific area entry command is not stored (S841: NO), S842 and S843 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S821.

  Although not shown, when a specific area entry command is received during the special game, the game ball enters the specific area 658, that is, it shifts to the special symbol oddity state after the end of the special game. The effect pattern of the notification effect (referred to as “specific area entry notification effect”) for notifying this is determined, and the number of the effect pattern of the specific area entry notification effect is determined in the specific area of the sub main information storage means 260. Temporarily store in the entry effect pattern storage area.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: second embodiment)
Subsequently, the on-premises / on-premises effect B determination process (S843) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effects B determination process (S843) in the second embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S850 and S869, and the processing of S850 and subsequent steps is executed when the specific area entering command is received. In FIG. 56, the processes of S851 to S868 and S870 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes of S860 and S869, which are differences, are mainly described.

  First, it is determined whether the specific area entering flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is on (S850). When the specific area entry flag is on (S850: YES), in the processing after S851, the on-premises consecutive-island effect B lottery process (S856), the continuous-state effect pattern selection process (S861), etc. are executed . In this example, since the pending renso effect B determination process is performed on the premise that the game ball enters the specific area in the specific round, in this consecutive villa effect pattern selection process, the round effects after the specific round ( Only a consecutive-village effect pattern that occurs in the end demo effect) (including a specific round) can be selected. Then, in the second half of this process, the specific area entering flag in the sub main information storage unit 260 is turned off (S869).

  In addition, in the specific round (the 7th round-the 8th round) in the special game under execution this time, when there are two or more entering balls to the specific field 658, this processing based on the first entering ball (S850) ~ S870), the on-hold consecutive resort production flag is turned on. Therefore, even if this processing based on the subsequent entry is executed, a negative determination (NO) is made in S731, and the on-hold consecutive resort production is performed again. The lottery process of B is avoided.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, by entering the specific area 658, it is possible to acquire the right to transition to the probable state of the special symbol, and the expectation for the occurrence of the on-hold consecutive resort production is enhanced. It was possible to further enhance the effect of the reaming stage directing, and the execution of the on-reserved reaming stage rendition in the situation where the game state after the end of the special game is undefined is reflected as a result of the prefetch determination. By preventing the display mode and the actual result of the on-hold renso production from being flawed, the reliability of the on-hold renso production as the pre-reading notice can be improved. It becomes possible to improve interest.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the opening pattern in which the opening period of the second grand prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 is completely overlapped is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second grand prize winning is performed. The mouth 65 and the opening period of the specific area 658 may be partially overlapped without completely overlapping. In addition, the opening period of the specific area 658 is delayed with respect to the opening period of the second big winning opening 65, taking into consideration the delay time until the gaming ball entered the second big winning opening 65 reaches the specific area 658. May be.

Second Embodiment First Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Thus, the description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

In the above-described second embodiment, the on-premise internal connection effect B determination process is executed at the timing when the gaming ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is also possible to execute the on-premises-in-line effect B determination process before the gaming ball enters the specific area 658.

  First, in describing the above configuration, a prior determination number that is a result of the determination in advance on the main control board 100 side will be described. FIG. 57 is a view schematically showing a success / failure determination table, in which (A) is a table referred to in the success / failure determination of the first special symbol lottery, and (B) is referred to in the success / failure determination of the second special symbol lottery Is a table to be played. FIG. 57 shows the contents corresponding to the special symbol success / failure lottery table (FIG. 5) referred to in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, in the first special symbol lottery determination, whether or not the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, the preliminary determination number “1” and the random number value “164 to 1639”. When it corresponds to the range of “2”, the judgment number corresponds to the range of “65208 to 65535” when the random number value falls within the range of “1640 to 65207”. When the predetermination number "4" is set as the predetermination result. This prior determination number is included in the contents of the yes or no prior determination command together with the information indicating that it is the prior determination result of the first special symbol and the information indicating the order of the operation holding ball, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 side (See S213 in FIG. 13).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), in the second special symbol lottery determination, whether or not the random number value falls within the range of “0 to 163”, the preliminary determination number “1” and the random number value “164 to 1639”. When the random number falls under the range of “1640 to 65535”, the preliminary determination number “3” is set as the preliminary determination result. This prior determination number is included in the contents of the yes or no prior determination command together with the information indicating that it is the prior determination result of the second special symbol and the information indicating the order of the operation holding ball, and is transmitted to the effect control board 200 side (See S213 in FIG. 13).

  As can be seen from a comparison of the special symbol win / fail lottery table in FIG. 5 and the success / failure pre-judgment table in FIG. 57, the pre-decision number “1” does not depend on the game state (normal state / probability change state) and is always “big hit”. Is a determination result derived to be “ On the other hand, in the determination result that the prior determination number “2” is “big hit” in the probability variation state (high probability state) but “off” in the normal state (low probability state) is there. Also in this example, as in the above-described first embodiment, the target of the pre-reading determination relating to the pending internal connection effect is only the operation reserving ball (pre-judgment result) of the second special symbol, but the first special You may include the operation holding ball (predetermination information) of the symbol.

  In the pending inner consecutive effects effect A determination process and the pending internal distance effects B determination process, the pre-reading determination whether or not the specific hold to be a big hit is included in the subsequent operation pending ball (the operation pending ball of the second special symbol) Is determined based on this prior determination number. At this time, the determination as to whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed is performed before the specific round, that is, before the game ball enters the specific area (for example, before the start of the special game, at the start demonstration effect, the specific round Consider the case of playing in a previous round game).

  First, in the case of executing the pending inside consecutive directing effect B determination process before the specific round, if there is an operation pending ball whose pre-decision number is "1" in the subsequent operation pending ball, with respect to this operation pending ball Even if the game state is changed to a probable state (high probability state) or a normal state (low probability state) after the end of the special game, the determination result is a big hit, so that the game ball enters the specific area 658 At this point, the pending Uranso is decided, regardless of the presence or absence of Therefore, in this case, the on-hold extended resort production B can be generated as a notification of the on-hold extended resort.

On the other hand, in the case where there is an operation holding ball for which the predetermination number is "2", with regard to this operation holding ball, whether or not the success or failure judgment result is a big hit depends on the gaming state after the end of the special game Therefore, considering that the gaming state changes in accordance with the presence or absence of the game ball entering the specific area 658, the pending reservation is not determined at this time. Therefore, in this case, it is not possible to generate the on-hold on-line effect B as the confirmation notification of on-off on-line, it only indicates the possibility of on-hold on-line.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area 658 (regardless of which game state is transitioned), the result of determination of success or failure of the point at which the operation holding ball is actually digested is accurate If it can be specified to (in the case of prior judgment number "1"), it is possible to notify the decision of the pending Uranzou, conversely, accurately identify the pass / fail judgment result of the point at which the operation holding ball is actually digested If this is not possible (in the case of the prior determination number “2”), it is only necessary to suggest the possibility of a reserved resort. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to prepare a fixed notification effect and a suggested effect of the pending inner row in different effect modes.

  As described above, according to the first modified example of the second embodiment, when the prefetch determination is performed in a situation where the gaming state after the end of the special game cannot be accurately specified, the big win is uniquely derived regardless of the gaming state. If it is to be performed, while the in-hold extended villa production B is generated in a manner in which the in-hold extended villa is confirmed and notified, the determination result of the on-hold extended villa varies depending on the gaming state. Even if it is the timing before the game ball enters the specific area by generating the on-hold consecutive resort production B in a manner that suggests the possibility, It is possible to prevent a notice effect that disappoints the player's expectation, such as the occurrence of a habit, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the same way, as a pre-reading notice other than the rendezvous in the rendezvous effect, for example, also in the pre-reading notice such as a change in hold, a pre-reading determination as to whether or not there is a specific holding that becomes a big hit in the working holding ball is this prior determination. It is done based on the number. At this time, under the situation where the preceding operation reserving ball is a big hit, when the pre-reading judgment is executed on the subsequent operation reserving ball, the prior judgment number is a pre-judgment result of the pre-reading target's operation reserving ball. If it is "1", a presentation mode (for example, a "rainbow-colored" reserved image representing a big hit decision) may be made to appear to notify a big hit decision as a pending change previewing effect based on this action pending ball. In other words, with regard to this operation holding ball, even if the gaming state after the end of the special game is either a probability change state (high probability state) or a normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, It is scheduled to be a big hit when it is digested, so regardless of whether or not game balls have entered the specific area 658, the in-hold-ream villa is determined at this point, and the result of the prefetch determination is reflected There is no possibility of a discrepancy between the display mode of the held image and the actual result (for example, if the prior determination number is “2”, the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 and the special game ends) In the normal state, even if a reserved image representing the big hit decision appears, a situation that does not result in a big hit occurs.

  In this modification, only the pass / fail predetermination table is illustrated as the predetermination table, but the predetermination number may be allocated to the random number range of each determination value also regarding the symbol predetermination table and the variation pattern predetermination table. Can be expressed by

Third Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the third embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  Although the gaming machine of the first embodiment has been described by exemplifying a gaming machine called a so-called "ST machine" which has a probability variation rush rate of 100%, the gaming machine of the first embodiment has been described by way of example. In this case, the special symbol probability variation function continues from the end of the special game until the next big hit occurs, so-called a normal probability variation type gaming machine.

  Here, FIG. 58 is a view schematically showing the special symbol odds lottery table in the third embodiment, (A) is referred to in a normal state (low probability state), (B) is a probability variation state (high probability) State) is referenced. As can be seen from FIG. 58, in the success or failure lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), it is a big hit only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the range of jackpot is expanded, and not only when the random number value falls within the range of 0 to 163 but also when it falls within the range of 164 to 1639. In other words, when the probability changing function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from the low probability state (1 / 399.6) to the high probability state (1 / 39.96). As described above, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is equal between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not correspond to the big hit range, if it falls within the predetermined range, it is a small hit. In this example, the winning lottery of the first special symbol is a small hit with a higher probability than the winning lottery of the second special symbol.

  Then, the upper part of FIG. 59 is a figure which shows typically the symbol table per 1st special symbol in 3rd Embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the random number of symbols per special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot contents (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of special symbols are activated, first grand prize) The operation patterns of the mouth 64 are associated with one another. In this table, the stop symbols “1” to “8” of the first special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups A to C according to the type of jackpot.

  Specifically, symbol groups A (16R specific short-period fixed symbols) are displayed for symbols "1", "2", "3" and "4", and symbol group B is displayed for symbols "5" and "6". A symbol group C (2R normal time short symbol special symbol) is associated with each of the symbols “7” and “8”.

  Subsequently, the lower part of FIG. 59 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the third embodiment. In the symbol table per second special symbol, the random symbol value per symbol special symbol, stop symbol, symbol group, jackpot content (number of times the probability variation function and variation time reduction function of the special symbol is activated, the second grand prize The operation patterns of the mouths 65) are associated with each other. In this table, the stop symbols “11” to “18” of the second special symbol are classified into three types of symbol groups D to F according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, symbol groups D (16R specific short-period fixed symbol symbols) are attached to the symbols "11", "12", "13" and "14", and symbol group E is attached to the symbols "15" and "16". A symbol group F (2R normal time short symbol special symbol) is associated with each of the symbols “17” and “18”.

  Symbol groups A, B, D, and E are specific symbols indicating so-called “probability change jackpots” that shift the gaming state after the end of the special game to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state), and are special until the next jackpot. A symbol change function, a time reduction function, and an electric chew support function are provided. When the symbol groups A and D (16R probability variation big hit) are selected, the specified number of rounds of the special game is 16, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. When the symbol groups B and E (2R probability variation big hit) are selected, the specified number of rounds for the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 64 in one round game is about 0.05 seconds. . Symbol groups C, F are normal symbols indicating so-called “normal hits” in which the gaming state after the end of the special game is shifted to the normal state (low probability state), and limited to 100 times after the end of the special game. The special symbol, time saving function and electronic chew support function are provided. When symbol groups C and F (2R normal jackpot) are selected, the number of rounds specified for special games is two rounds, as is the case with symbol groups B and E (2R probability variable jackpot). The maximum opening time of the mouths 64 and 65 is about 0.05 seconds.

Next, FIG. 60A is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for winning. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, and the lower (A2) is a probability variation pattern table. In this example, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to be different according to the fluctuation pattern selection state or according to the jackpot type even in the same fluctuation pattern selection state.

  In the normal variation pattern table of (A1), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, when either the fluctuation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected and 2R big hit, One of the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A), the fluctuation pattern PZ3 (super reach A), and the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. On the other hand, if it is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern PK4 (super reach D) is selected.

  In the probability variation pattern table of (A2), when the big hit type is 16R big hit, only the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected, and when the big hit type is 2R big hit, the fluctuation pattern PZ7 (super reach B) One of the patterns PZ8 (Super Reach D) is selected. On the other hand, when it is a small hit, only the variation pattern PK8 (super reach D) is selected.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation pattern table for loss. The upper (B1) is a normal variation pattern table, and the lower (B2) is a probability variation variation table. In this example, the selected variation pattern is set differently depending on the variation pattern selection state.

  In the normal fluctuation pattern table of (B1), any of fluctuation pattern PH1 (non-reach A), fluctuation pattern PH2 (normal reach A), fluctuation pattern PH3 (super reach A), and fluctuation pattern PH4 (super reach D) is selected The In the probability variation variation pattern table of (B2), any one of variation pattern PH5 (non-reach B), variation pattern PH6 (normal reach B), and variation pattern PH8 (super reach D) is selected.

  Here, in this probability variation pattern table for loss, only a variation pattern that is a variation mode of non-reach B, normal reach B, and super reach D can be selected (in other words, variation of super reach B). The variation pattern which is the aspect is different from the above-mentioned probability variation pattern table for hitting in that the variation pattern is not selected. For this reason, in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the variation pattern selected depending on whether or not the variation pattern becomes super reach B is clearly distinguished from the case of the big hit and out of the super hit B ( In this example, when a variation mode that develops into battle reach) appears, the big win is decisive.

  In the present embodiment, so-called battle specs are employed, and a battle reach effect is generated when the symbol variation effect is developed to Super Reach B while staying in the probability variation effect mode Mβ as the effect mode. As described above, this battle reach production (super reach B) is selected only when the result of the determination is a big hit, so when the battle reach production occurs during the symbol variation production. The jackpot is definitive. Note that this battle reach effect is a reach effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight to determine the outcome, and when the ally character finally wins the enemy character, the 16R hit and the ally character finally loses the enemy character. Then 2R big hit is decided.

Next, the on-hold consecutive resort production in the third embodiment will be described. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the operation pending ball to be prefetched for the pending in-line consecutive effects A and B is the specified pending (16R big hit, 8R big hit) or out-of-date holding, but in the third embodiment The operation holding ball to be prefetched for the effects A and B is specific holding (16R big hit) or small hit holding (not including off hold). The reason for including a small hit is that, in general, if the result of the judgment is a failure, a large number of variation patterns are prepared, so any of the following operation holding balls can not be held against In the case of small hits, there are fewer types of variation patterns to be selected than in the case of designing whether to carry out the staging of Gasse (pending in a row), and due to the nature of the lottery results of small hits. This is because it is suitable for use as a gaze effect, so that it requires only a small number of discriminators for executing the prefetch determination and can be simplified.

  FIG. 61 (A) is a consecutive resort production pattern table that is referred to when selecting a consecutive resort production pattern of the retained resort series A in the third embodiment, and FIG. 61 (B) is an on-reservation sequence in the third embodiment. It is a continuous pattern effect pattern table to be referred to when selecting a continuous pattern effect pattern of a silent effect B. Since these extended game effect pattern tables are basically the same as the extended game effect patterns in the first embodiment (see FIG. 8), detailed description is omitted, but as described above, It differs in that small hit retention is included as an operation retention ball of pre-reading object in chou rendition A and B. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(On-hold Renso production B determination processing: third embodiment)
Subsequently, the on-premises / on-premises effect B determination process (S843) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effects B determination process (S843) in the third embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the above-described first embodiment is the processing of S871 to S874, in which small hit retention is included in the operation pending ball which is the pre-read target of the pending internal connection effect B. In FIG. 62, the processes in S851 to S854 and S858 to S870 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore, the processes in S871 to S874 which are different points will be mainly described.

  First, when there is a specific hold in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (S854: YES), it is determined whether or not this specific hold indicates a 16R big hit (high profit big hit) (S871). . If the specific hold corresponds to a 16R big hit (S871: YES), the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 1 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production B is performed by lottery ( S872). In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 1, the consecutive resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 1. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 70% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 30%.

  On the other hand, when there is no specific reservation in the action holding ball of the second special symbol (S854: NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit hold is included in the action holding ball of the second special symbol (S873). . When the small hit hold is included (S873: YES), the on-hold consecutive villa production B lottery process 2 for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production B is executed by lottery (S874). . In the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process 2, the random resort production lottery random number value matches the determination value of “execution” or “non-execution” with reference to the unillustrated consecutive resort production B lottery table 2. If so, determine whether to execute. In this example, for example, execution is determined at a rate of 0.1% and non-execution is determined at a rate of 99.9%.

  When winning in the on-hold consecutive resort production B lottery process (S872, S874), in the following, while selecting the consecutive resort production pattern for determining the content of the on-hold consecutive resort production A (S861), this After temporarily storing the sub main information storage means 260 in the continuous play effect pattern storage area (S868), the on-hold internal continuous play effect flag of the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S870), and this processing is ended.

By the way, as a point to be noted in the present embodiment, there is an on-line Uchiso effect B during execution of a special game.
After the end of this special game, the high-expected stage effect (Super Reach B) is generated by digesting the subsequent active-holding ball (the active-holding ball that exists at the time of the on-hold Rensou effect B). In this case, the probability of high profit jackpot (16R probability variation big hit) is set higher than the probability of low profit big hit (2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (B), the jackpot type allocation in the second special symbol game is as follows: 70% probability with 16R probability variation jackpot, 20% probability with 2R probability variation jackpot with 10% probability with 2R normal jackpot. It has become. In the present example, the 16R probability variation big hit is also referred to as "16R big hit", 2R probability variation big hit and 2R normal big hit collectively.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 60, in the special symbol probability variation state, if the result of the determination is a big hit, if it is a 16R big hit, the change of the super reach B (high expectation effect) with a probability of 100%. When the pattern PX7 is selected and the 2R big hit (2R specific big hit, 2R normal big hit) is selected, the fluctuation pattern PZ7 of the super reach B (high expectation degree effect) is selected with a probability of 60%.

  At this time, as described in S872 in FIG. 62, in this example, when there is a specific hold (16R big hit) in the subsequent operation hold ball, the probability of winning the possibility of execution of the on-premises consecutive effect B is 70% Since it is set to, even when there is a specific hold (16R big hit), the pending inside consecutive effect B becomes unexecuted with a probability of 30% remaining.

  Under the conditions as described above, under the condition that the pending Uranzou rendition B is not executed, the probability of becoming a 16R jackpot by the appearance of Battle Reach (Super Reach B) X, the appearance of Battle Reach (Super Reach B) Thus, the probability Y of 2R big hit is as follows.

X = (Probability of winning 16R jackpot) × (Probability of not producing on-hold Renso production B) × (Probability of becoming Super Reach B)
Y = (Probability of winning 2R jackpot) × (Probability of becoming Super Reach B)

  Subsequently, using the above numerical values, the probability X of 16R jackpot due to the appearance of Super Reach B and the probability Y of 2R jackpot due to the appearance of Super Reach B are specifically calculated as follows.

X = 70/100 × (100−70) / 100 × 100/100 = 21/100
Y = (20 + 10) / 100 × 60/100 = 18/100

  Therefore, when the high expectation level effect is generated in the subsequent operation holding ball without the on-hold consecutive villa effect B being generated (when it develops to Super Reach B), it is more than the possibility of a low profit jackpot. , The possibility of becoming a big hit other than this low profit big hit (ie, high profit big hit = 16R big hit) is higher.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, even if the on-premise-on-park effect B does not occur during the special game, the player holds a high profit with respect to the high expectation degree effect after the end of the special game. It is possible to enhance the player's sense of expectation by the occurrence of the high expectation degree effect without losing the sense of expectation to the big hit, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  In the above-described first embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the ST machine (probability change machine) with a probability change entry rate of 100% that shifts uniformly to a high probability state (special change state of the special symbol) after the special game ends. Adopted, but not limited to this, including a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state (special symbol time-short state or normal state) after the end of the special game as a part of the jackpot type, a predetermined ratio (for example, probability change) An ST machine that shifts to a probable change state of a special symbol at an rush rate of 80%) may be employed.

  In such a model, when a special big game is hit in the probability change state (high probability state) of the special game, when the special game is over, the normal state or the special symbol time shift state (low probability state), After reaching the ST period in a special game probability change state (high probability state), the game state may change, for example, when shifting to a normal state or a special symbol time-short state (low probability state).

  In this modification, when prefetching determination is performed on the effect control board 200 side based on the information of the predetermination result from the main control board 100, an operation holding ball (referred to as “target holding”) that is a target of the prefetching determination is obtained. When the gaming state is scheduled to change before being digested (high probability state → low probability state, etc.), the information on the predetermination result relating to the operation holding ball is ignored. That is, in the pre-reading determination of the target hold, it was determined as “big hit”, but as a result of digestion of the operation hold ball (predecessor hold) stored prior to the target hold, it becomes a normal big hit (non-probable big hit), If the game state reaches the normal state after the special game ends, or if the ST period ends after the prefetch determination and before the trigger hold is consumed, this trigger hold is actually consumed. Occasionally, a situation where it is determined to be out of place may occur. Therefore, in order to prevent such a situation, when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the information of the preliminary determination result is not to be the target of the prefetch determination. Note that "ignore" includes the meaning of "receiving but not using the sent information" and the meaning of "not receiving the sent information".

  As an example of applying this configuration to the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold consecutive ren production, when the preceding operation holding ball becomes a big hit as a result of digestion, the current gaming state (the preceding game in the subsequent operation holding ball) Even if there is something that is determined to be a specific hold in the game state at the time when the operation holding ball is digested), if the game state is scheduled to change before the specific hold is digested, this specification It is configured so as to ignore the information on the prior determination result related to the hold. Here, “the game state is scheduled to change” means that the game state may change before and after the execution of the special game (the special game when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit). For example, as a result of the digestion of the preceding operation holding ball in the special symbol probable state, the game state is usually a big hit, and after the special game is finished and before the subsequent operation holding ball is digested, This is the case when switching to the normal state is planned. In addition, it is not limited to this, When switching from the definite variation state of a special symbol to the time saving state of a special symbol, the case where it switches from the time saving state of a special symbol to a normal state etc. may be included. Now, specific processing will be described below.

(On-hold consecutive villa production A determination processing: fourth embodiment)
Subsequently, the on-premises-and-non-play effect A determination process (S737) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the details of the on-premises on-line consecutive effect A determination process (S737) in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S771, and when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the advance determination information is present regardless of whether or not the advance determination information related to the specific hold exists. The point is to ignore the judgment information. In FIG. 63, since the processes of S761 to S770 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, the process of S771 which is the difference will be mainly described.

First, when the pre-determined information of the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S763: YES), before the operation reservation ball is digested It is determined whether the current gaming state is scheduled to change (S771). In addition, based on the information of the effect control command from the main control board 100, the effect control board 200 may individually manage the game state as to whether or not the game state is scheduled to change, or the advance determination command The determination may be made based on the information of the prior determination command by adding information (detailed next statement) concerning the gaming state to. If the gaming state is not scheduled to change (S771: NO), then, if there is a specific hold (16R big hit) (S764, 765), whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort effect A will be selected by lottery. (S 766), and selects a casserole effect pattern for determining the contents of the on-hold villa effect A (S 768), and temporarily stores it in the villa effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. After storing (S769), the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect flag of the sub main information storage means 260 is turned on (S770), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is scheduled to change (S771: YES), the process ends by ignoring the pre-determined information related to the operation hold ball regardless of whether or not the specific hold exists. . In this example, the game state is scheduled to change. (1) When a specific game state (probability change state) is a normal big hit, (2) Probability change big hit and specific hold (probability change) It is assumed that there is a specific hold for a jackpot that is scheduled to be a big hit, but a specific hold for a jackpot that is usually a big hit precedes the specific hold. However, in the pre-reading notice effect such as a mere change in hold, not only in the on-hold consecutive resort effect, a change in the gaming state may be scheduled, for example, when the ST period ends with the passage of a predetermined number of fluctuations.

(On-hold consecutive villa production B determination processing: fourth embodiment)
Next, the on-hold consecutive villa effect B determination process (S843) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing details of the on-hold consecutive resort effect B determination process (S843) in the fourth embodiment.

  Here, the difference from the first embodiment described above is the processing of S875, and when the game state is scheduled to change, regardless of whether or not the prior determination information related to the specific hold exists, The point is to ignore the prior decision information. In FIG. 64, the processes of S851 to S870 are the same as the processes of the first embodiment, and therefore, the process of S875 which is the difference will be mainly described.

  First, when the pre-determined information of the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol is stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S853: YES), before the operation reservation ball is digested It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is scheduled to change (S875). If the gaming state is not scheduled to change (S875: NO), it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the on-hold extended resort production B (S856 and S857). Is selected (S861), and is temporarily stored in the extended zone effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S868), and then the sub-main information storage unit 260 is selected. Is turned on (S870), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the game state is scheduled to change (S875: YES), the process ends by ignoring the prior determination information related to the operation hold ball regardless of whether or not the specific hold exists. .

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to prevent a notification effect that disappoints the player's expectation, such as a discrepancy between the result notified in advance by the on-hold consecutive resort effect and the actual lottery result. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, if the structure of the above-mentioned 4th Embodiment is a game machine which can mutually transfer several types of game states, such as a normal state (low probability state) and the probability variation state (high probability state) of a special symbol, for example, The present invention is not limited to the ST machine, and may be applied to a game machine according to the second embodiment (ball check type) or the third embodiment (normal probability change type).

[Fourth Embodiment-First Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the first modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained.

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the gaming state is scheduled to change, the information on the prior determination result from the main control board 100 is ignored regardless of whether there is a specific hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by adding information related to the gaming state to the prior determination command, even if the gaming state is scheduled to change, the effect control is performed based on the prior determination information to which the gaming state information is added. It is good also as a structure which performs pre-reading determination by the board | substrate 200 side, and performs pending | holding consecutive resort production A and B determination processing. Here, the “preliminary determination information to which information on the gaming state is added” is correct under the gaming state at the time when the action holding ball that is the target of the prefetch determination is actually digested on the production control board 200 side. The aspect is not particularly limited as long as it is information capable of specifying the prior determination result. For example, (1) Pre-determining result in the current gaming state, (2) Pre-determining result in the next gaming state, (3) Remaining continuation number (variation number) of the current gaming state, (4) The remaining number of times until the next game state is changed (number of fluctuations), (5) that the game state is scheduled to change within a predetermined number of fluctuations, (6) the hold information in the prior judgment command is actually digested An information obtained by appropriately combining one or more of the information on the planned gaming state after deriving the gaming state at the scheduled time is adopted. Further, as described in the above-described determination table of whether or not to win, the lottery result is determined according to the gaming state (normal state / probability change state, more specifically normal state / probability change state / short time state). May be information relating to a prior determination number such that the meaning of the random number value changes or does not change.

  As described above, according to the first modification example of the fourth embodiment, even if the gaming state is scheduled to change, the prior determination result is not ignored, and the change is based on the information related to the gaming state included in the prior determination result. By performing the pre-read determination under the later gaming state, it is possible to prevent the notification effect that betrays the player's expectation that there is a gap between the result notified in advance by the pending inner row effect and the actual lottery result. In addition, it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of the on-hold consecutive villa production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Fourth Embodiment Second Modified Example
Next, a gaming machine according to a second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained. In the second modification, the following configuration can be added in any of the above-described fourth embodiment and the first modification.

In this modified example, in the on-hold consecutive game effect A determination process, when the preceding operation holding ball is a big hit, when the plurality of specific holdings are included in the subsequent operation holding ball, the first first The specific hold is treated as an active hold ball (hereinafter referred to as “target hold”) that is subject to pre-reading determination in the on-hold consecutive villa production A determination process. It is not treated as the subject hold of the villa production A determination process, but the subsequent specific determination prior determination information of the subsequent stop is ignored. "Ignore" means "I will receive but not use the information I have sent"
It also includes the meaning of "Never receive the sent information".

  Now, the operation of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that when the preceding operation reserving ball X0 is digested, there are two specific retentives X1, X3 in the subsequent operation reserving balls X1, X2, X3. At this time, when the previous operation holding ball X0 is digested, if it is a big hit, whether or not the on-hold extended villa production A can be executed only in relation to the first specific holding X1 of the two specific holdings X1 and X3. judge. As described above, in the pre-reading determination related to the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the pre-reading determination is performed in order from the earliest one among the subsequent operation holding balls, and a plurality of specified in the subsequent operation holding balls The reason is that if there is a hold, the determination of whether or not the in-hold extended game effect can be performed is only in relation to the first specific hold. Therefore, of the two specific hold X1 and X3 existing in the subsequent operation hold ball, the subsequent specific hold X3 is not the target of the hold-in-village production A, and the prior determination information of the specific hold X3 is not used. ignore. As described above, in the present modification, the on-hold consecutive resort production A is executed based on the presence of the first specific hold when the preceding operation hold ball is digested and becomes a big hit, but there is a second specific hold. Based on this, the on-hold consecutive villa production A is not executed.

  As described above, according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment, when there are a plurality of specific holds in the subsequent operation hold balls, the in-hold extended resort effect is executed only in relation to the first specific hold. By making it possible, it is possible to prevent the target of the villas in the hold that was originally intended from fluctuating due to the presence of other specific holds (for example, specific holds that are normally expected to be big hits). As a result, the sense of satisfaction when the on-hold reservation effect is generated can be enhanced, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fourth Embodiment-Third Modification]
Next, a gaming machine according to a third modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to the second modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described fourth embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the parts having the same configuration. The explanation will be omitted and mainly the different parts will be explained. In the third modification, the following configuration can be added in any of the above-described fourth embodiment and the first modification.

  In this modification, in the case where the preceding operation reserving ball is a big hit in the reserving internal consecutive effects A determination process, when a plurality of specific reservings are included in the subsequent operation reserving ball, it relates to the preceding operation reserving ball Although there may be occurrences of pending U-Ran effects A in the relationship between the jackpot and the advance specific identification hold, and the pending U-in connection effects A in the relation between the big hit and the late departure specific Pending pertaining to the advanced identification hold. When comparing the prior determination information of the specific hold of the advance and the prior determination information of the specific hold of the late on the basis of the player's advantage, the specific reserve with high relative priority is only compared. To indicate or inform.

  Now, the operation of this modification will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that when the preceding operation reserving ball X0 is digested, there are two specific retentives X1, X3 in the subsequent operation reserving balls X1, X2, X3. At this time, if the first specific hold X1 is “8R big hit” and the second specific hold X3 is “16R big hit”, the second specific hold X3 has a higher advantage than the first specific hold X1. Become. Therefore, when the preceding operation hold ball X0 is a big hit as a result of digestion, since the first specific hold X1 is a specific hold with relatively low advantage, the big hit and the first hit related to the previous operation hold ball X0 The on-hold consecutive villa production A in relation to the specific hold X1 does not occur. On the other hand, if the starting action holding ball X1 is digested and results in a big hit, the subsequent specific holding X3 is a specific holding having a relatively high advantage. The on-hold consecutive villa production A in relation to the hold X3 may occur.

As described above, according to the third modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the continuous occurrence of the highly reserved reserved in-line effect and to perform only the notification of the highly retained in-position big hit, which is truly advantageous. , It is possible to increase the interest in the occurrence of the pending in-line effect, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, like the gaming machine of the first embodiment, is a so-called “ST machine”, which is called a “ST machine”, which is a 100% time-changing probability changing rush rate when a special symbol is a big hit. Machine.

  In the fifth embodiment, 16R special games, 8R special games, and 4R special games are prepared in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Each round game in the special game is divided into a long open round game in which the large winning opening 64 (65) is long opened and a short open round game in which the large winning opening 64 (65) is short opened. The “long open round game” is a round game in which the big winning opening 64 (65) is opened for only 30 seconds and then closed or closed with a prescribed number (10 balls) of ball entry for less than 30 seconds. is there. Similarly, the "short opening round game" is closed after opening the big winning opening 64 (65) for only 0.2 seconds, or even if it is less than 0.2 seconds, with a prescribed number (10 balls) of balls It is a round game of the aspect closed. As described above, in this example, the long opening round game is a round game in which a prescribed number (maximum ball entry number) can be expected to enter during the opening period of the big winning opening 64 (65), while the short opening round game is This is a round game in which it is practically difficult to enter a game ball during the opening period of the grand prize opening 64 (65). In this example, during the execution of the special game, a round effect including the current number of rounds, the number of winning balls, a message prompting a right strike, etc. is executed during each round game.

An award winning ball number informing effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of the award winning ball number notification effect during the special game. In the drawing, the contents (display contents and types of sound effects) of the winning prize ball number notification effect are associated with the winning prize ball number obtained by the player. In this example, in each round in the special game, an award winning ball number informing effect of notifying the number of winning balls until the present is executed. The “acquired number of winning balls” in this example means the total number of winning balls that the player has acquired based on entering the big winning opening 64 (65) in the special game during the so-called consecutive resort state. In the case of so-called over winning (in this example, over 10 winnings which is the prescribed count number below), the number of winning balls for the over winning may be counted as the number of winning balls, Or it is not necessary to count. Further, in the case of winning in each winning opening other than the big winning opening 64 (65), it is not counted as the number of winning prize balls. Here, “renso (renso state)” means that a special game is executed by a predetermined big hit in the specific game state, and the special game state is again set as the game state after the end of the special game. It means to continue. The specific gaming state in this example is, as described above, a state in which at least the power chew support function (open extension function) is operating. In this example, an ST machine (100% turn probability change machine) is employed, so that a specific game state is in a certain period (during the ST period) after the end of the special game. In the winning prize ball number notification effect, the current winning number ball number is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 during the execution of each round game. In this example, the effect control board 200 (the jackpot effect determination means 227) receives a command from the main control board 100 when a game ball enters the big prize opening 64 (65) during execution of the special game. In addition, the acquired award ball number counter is updated to execute the acquired award ball number notification effect. The acquired prize ball number counter is reset when the consecutive home state stops. In addition, in the acquired prize ball number notification effect, each time the specified number “2500” is acquired as the number of acquired prize balls, the enlarged number of the acquired prize balls is displayed (displayed in an enlarged manner compared to the normal display mode). That is, the number of winning balls is an integral multiple of 2500 (2500,
Each time the number reaches 5000, 7500,...), The number of winning prize balls is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen. In this case, a predetermined sound effect (normal sound effect) is generated simultaneously with the enlarged display of the number of winning prize balls. In addition to the normal sound effects, special sound effects are generated each time a fixed number “10000” is acquired as the winning prize ball number. That is, every time the number of winning prize balls reaches an integer multiple of 10,000 (10000, 20000, 30000 ...), a special sound effect is generated together with a normal sound effect. In this example, basic sound effects (SE) such as explosion sounds and metal sounds are output as normal sound effects, and sounds such as “Kitakita ~” and “Excellent sound ~” are output as special sound effects.

  In this example, “15” prize balls are set to be paid out with respect to one entry into the big prize opening 64 (65). Therefore, basically, the number of winning prize balls (the winning prize ball number counter) is updated in units of “15”. In addition, the maximum number of winning balls that can be won by the player in one big hit (special game) (maximum winning ball number) is set to "2400". That is, when the maximum profit big hit (16R big hit) is won, in the special game (16R special game), 16 long open round games are executed, so the number of winning prize balls is 16 rounds (number of rounds) × 10 counts (prescribed count number) × 15 (unit winning number of balls) = 2400.

  Next, the on-premises-on-pending effect in the fifth embodiment will be described. In this example, the first on-hold in-line effect (during in-line effect A) that occurs during symbol variation and the second on-off in-line effect (during on-line effect B) that occurs during special games Of these, the second on-hold Renso production (the on-hold Renso production B) is targeted. As described above, the pending Uranzou occurs on the premise that the gaming state when the preceding operation retaining ball hit is the specified gaming state (in this example, at least the power-chute support function is activated) Do. Moreover, the following operation | movement reservation ball (specific suspension) used as object of reservation inner row house is an operation reservation ball of the 2nd special symbol which arises based on the ball entering the 2nd starting opening 62. Then, whether or not the on-hold on-line consecutive effect B is executable is determined by drawing when a predetermined execution condition is established at the timing before the start of the special game. In this example, it is assumed that the preceding operation holding ball is high profit big hit (16R big hit), and the specified execution condition is satisfied when there is a specific holding (big hit holding) in the subsequent operation holding ball. It shall be. Therefore, in the present example, the pending Uchi-Ran effects are executed only as "the true effect" which definitely announces the establishment of the pending U-in-Ranchos, but as a modification, the Pending-Uran-Tanso is actually You may include the "production of a caste" which does not hold. In this example, as one of the execution conditions of the pending U-Ran effect, it is defined that the preceding operation pending ball is the specific pending of the high profit big hit (16R big hit), but it is limited to this Instead, the preceding operation holding ball may be a specific holding other than the high profit big hit (16R big hit), that is, the specific holding corresponding to a jackpot less than 16R.

  Also in this example, when a predetermined execution condition is established at the timing before the start of the special game (a big hit start demonstration), an effect lottery process is executed for determining whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed by lottery. Do. When the effect lottery process is won, the reservation flag of the reserved game in the reserved zone is turned on, and the reserved game in the reserved zone is executed when the preset execution timing arrives. The execution timing of the on-hold consecutive resort production is set to the timing at which the above-mentioned enlarged display of the number of winning prize balls is performed. That is, every time “2500” is acquired as the number of winning prize balls, the execution timing of the on-hold consecutive villa production comes. Therefore, if the display timing of the number of winning prize balls arrives during one special game, the reserved game for reserved game will be executed on condition that the reservation flag for the reserved game for reserved game is turned on. . On the other hand, even if the reservation flag for the on-hold consecutive resort production is turned on, if the enlarged display timing of the number of winning prizes does not arrive during one special game, the on-hold consecutive resort production will be canceled. . As a modification, every time “2500” award balls are acquired, it may be determined whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive resort production, and in that case, a specific reservation ( A determination as to whether there is a jackpot hold) may be included.

  FIG. 67 is a schematic view showing an example of effects of on-hold internal consecutive effects in the fifth embodiment. In the present example, it is assumed that the execution of the effect is determined (the reservation flag is turned on) in the on-hold consecutive connection effect lottery process at the start of the special game. Note that, under the condition that the reservation flag for on-hold in-line effect is turned on, in the case of normal display (non-enlarged display) of the number of winning prize balls, on-hold in-line effect is not executed. First, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), in a predetermined round (eighth round in this example) during the special game, the number of winning balls is 30,000 by the winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening 64 (65). When the number (2500 pieces × 12 times) is reached, the number of winning balls is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen. In this example, a character image "GET 30000" is enlarged and displayed at the center of the screen, and it is informed that 30000 prize balls have been acquired. At this time, under the situation where the reservation flag for on-hold in-row effect is turned on, the execution timing of the on-off in-in-action effect comes by displaying the number of winning prize balls in an enlarged manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the entire screen is blacked out for only a moment. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), a special effect image that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold on-line on-link effect is displayed as on-hold on-line on-link effect. In this example, character information "BONUS + 1" is displayed as a special effect image, and the establishment of the pending on-the-run sequence is notified. In addition, as a display mode of the on-hold consecutive resort production, “BONUS + 1” may be displayed when there is one or more specific hold (big hit hold) in the subsequent operation hold ball, or the specific hold (big hit hold) is “BONUS + 1” if there is one, “BONUS + 2” if there are two specific holds (big hit hold), etc. The display may be different. Here, in the case where there are two (plural) specific retentions in the subsequent operation retention ball, it is desirable that the two (pluralitys) both be specific retentions corresponding to the high profit jackpot (16R big hit) Each may be a specific suspension corresponding to the jackpot of the different prescribed number of rounds, and may be a specific suspension corresponding to the jackpot less than 16R.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, the number of winning prize balls reaches a specific number (an integer multiple of 2500) in any round during the special game, triggered by the establishment of the on-hold range resort. In such a case, the winning prize ball number notification effect and the reserved in-ream zone effect can be executed, but in the final round, the acquired prize ball number notification effect is executed, while the in-hold-in-ream zone effect is not executed. May be In that case, in place of the final round, it may be possible to execute the on-premises on-hold effect in the big hit end demonstration immediately thereafter. Also, if the number of winning prizes reaches an integer multiple of “2500” at the end of the special game (for example, the 10th count in the final round or the entry just before the specified time in the final round), then the big hit ends In order to be in a demonstration state, it is preferable to configure so as not to execute the on-premises on-hold effect during the round (during the final round). In that case, it is premised that the enlarged display of the winning prize ball number (multiple of 2500) is not performed during the big hit end demonstration. On the other hand, if it is not the final round, even if it is just before the end of the round, since the execution of the next round is secured, it is possible to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production without any trouble. .

As described above, according to the fifth embodiment, there is no regularity in the timing at which the number of awarded prize balls reaches a specific number during the execution of the special game, and the in-hold-ream zone effect is executed in any round during the special game. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether it will be played, so it can give unexpectedness to the timing of the on-campus rendezvous production and attract the player's interest in all rounds. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this example, the text information “BONUS + 1” is displayed as an aspect of the on-hold consecutive villa production, but is not limited to this. For example, the number of acquired prize balls (2500) displayed in an enlarged manner is displayed. (Multiple) character color is changed to a special color (rainbow color, etc.), an effect display is added, and this is different from the usual award winning ball number notification effect (enlarged display of the award winning ball number) Aspects may be revealed. Further, in this example, as described above, the maximum number of winning balls that can be acquired in one special game is set to “2400”, and the maximum number of winning balls is set as a rendezvous in a reserved game (acquired). Since the specific number “2500” which is an execution opportunity of the enlarged display of the number of prize balls is set to be smaller than the specified number “2500”, the prize ball number announcement effect and the in-hold-ream-zone effect are each twice during one special game Although the above is not executed, the number of the most frequently won prize balls is set to be larger than the specific number “2500” or the specific number is set to be smaller than the number of most frequently won prize balls “2400” once. It may be configured such that the award winning ball number notification effect and the on-hold consecutive resort effect are executed twice or more during the special game.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

  As with the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is a so-called “ST machine”, a so-called “ST machine”, which is a 100% probability variation rush rate when a big hit is made with a special symbol. Machine.

  In the sixth embodiment, a 16R special game, an 8R special game, and a 4R special game are prepared, as in the first embodiment described above. As described above, each round game in the special game is classified into a long open round game in which the big prize opening 64 (65) is long open and a short open round game in which the big prize opening 64 (65) is short open. The

  Subsequently, the pending change previewing notice effect in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a schematic view for explaining a reserved image in the sixth embodiment. Hold change pre-reading notice effect is a notice that the hold will be a big hit by changing the hold image (hold image corresponding to the trigger hold) to be pre-read from the normal display mode to a special display mode. This is a kind of pre-reading notice effect mentioned above.

As described above, in the predetermined area in the screen of the effect display device 70, the first suspension display portion 701 for displaying the number of operation suspension balls of the first special symbol, and the number of operation suspension balls of the second special symbol A second hold display unit 702 for displaying is provided. In the normal display mode, when the operation retention ball of the special symbol is generated, the retention image of the white circle mark “o” is displayed, while the corresponding retention image is lost when the operation retention sphere is digested. In addition, the normal display mode "white" of the reserve image is expressed by "whiteout" in the drawing. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order in which the special symbols actuated on-hold balls are generated (the order of entering the balls), and a maximum of four can be displayed on each of the on-hold display units 701 and 702. Therefore, the first hold display unit 701 includes four hold display areas X11, X12, X13, and X14 that can respectively display the hold images, and the second hold display unit 702 includes four hold apparatuses that can display the hold images. It consists of display areas X21, X22, X23, X24. In the reserve display section 701, a reserve image is additionally displayed one by one from the reserve display area X11 on the leftmost side each time the reserve ball for the first special symbol is generated, and the reserve ball for the first special symbol is also displayed Every time the image is digested, the first hold image displayed in the leftmost hold display area X11 disappears and the subsequent hold images displayed in the hold display area X12 ̃ are one by one to the left hold display area Be shifted. Similarly, in the reserve display unit 702, each time the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol is generated, one reserve image is additionally displayed one by one from the reserve display area X21 on the leftmost side, and the second special symbol Every time the operation holding sphere is digested, the headmost holding image displayed in the leftmost holding display area X21 is lost and the subsequent holding images displayed in the holding display area X22 are held one by one on the left It is shifted to the display area. On the other hand, when the hold change look-ahead notice effect described next is executed, the hold display unit 701, 702 displays the hold image subjected to the look-ahead notice in a special display mode (from the normal display mode (white display) Changed to a special color display). Here, in the state where the open extension function is operating (electric chew support state, time saving state), the hold change relating to the operation hold ball (hold image) of the second special symbol is executed, but the first special symbol On the other hand, the hold change related to the operation hold ball (hold image) is not executed (hold change look-ahead is prohibited), while in the state where the open extension function is not activated (non-electric Chu support state, non-time reduction state), the first special The hold change related to the operation hold ball (hold image) of the symbol is executed, but the hold change related to the operation hold sphere (hold image) of the second special symbol is not executed (to prohibit hold change look-ahead) However, it is preferable when priority digestion is employed. In addition, in the state where the open extension function is activated (electric chew support state, short time state), only the reserved image corresponding to the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is displayed, or the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is displayed. It is desirable to highlight the corresponding hold image more than the hold image corresponding to the operation holding ball of the first special symbol, and in the state where the open extension function is not operated (non-electric Chu support state, non-time reduction state) Only the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the first special symbol is displayed more than the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol. Is desirable. In the hold change prefetching, it is preferable that only one hold image is changed in the same special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol). However, although two or more pending images may be changed, in such a case, the preceding pending change may indicate a big hit, and the subsequent pending change may indicate a big hit. It is preferable that there is no complete gas). In addition, when a transition is made to a special game while leaving the reserved image that has been changed, it is desirable that the reserved image that has been changed to return to the default image (white) after the end of the special game.

  In the pending change pre-reading advance notice effect, based on the result of the above-described predetermination, among the pending images displayed on the pending display portions 701 and 702 of the effect display device 70, the pending image targeted for prefetching (corresponding to trigger pending) An effect of changing the hold image) from a normal display mode to a special display mode is performed. In this example, during execution of the hold change look-ahead notice effect, the display color of the hold image corresponding to the trigger hold is one of four colors of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow color”. Can take either. In the drawing, four display modes of "blue", "green", "red" and "rainbow" are expressed by "grid pattern", "hatching", "shaded" and "filled out" respectively. To do. The above four types of display modes used in this pending change look-ahead announcement effect are related to the reliability (called “big hit reliability”) that the lottery result becomes a big hit, “blue”, “green”, “red” ”,“ Rainbow ”in order of the jackpot reliability is set step by step. Note that the “rainbow-colored” reserved image means a reserved image in which the big win is confirmed. Therefore, when the "rainbow color" reserve image appears or when the reserve image changes to "rainbow color", it is promised that a big hit will be won in the symbol variation display related to the reserve image (operation reserve ball) The Note that in the pending change pre-reading advance notice effect, the change in the display mode of the pending image may be expressed not by the display color but by a shape, a pattern, or the like.

  In this example, the hold change look-ahead announcement effect may be executed during symbol change and during special games. That is, basically, the hold change look-ahead notice effect is executed during the symbol change, but in the present example, the hold change look-ahead notice effect is executed during the special game as one mode of the hold within a row effect. There are cases (details will be described later). In addition, the execution time of the prefetch notice lottery process is set to the timing before the start of symbol variation and the start of the special game. Then, at that timing, the execution availability of the hold change look-ahead preview effect and the hold change look-ahead notice pattern are drawn. In the hold change prefetch notice effect, control is performed to change the display mode of the hold image based on a hold change prefetch notice pattern selected from a plurality of types.

Next, the on-hold on-line consecutive-play effect in the sixth embodiment will be described. In this example, the first on-hold in-line effect (during on-line effect A) occurring during symbol variation and the second on-off in-line effect (during a special game) that occurs during symbol variation The target is the on-premises in-house production B). Whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort production A can be executed is determined by lottery when the first execution condition is satisfied at the timing when the preceding operation holding ball is digested. In this example, on the premise that the preceding operation reserving ball is a high profit jackpot (16R big hit), there is a case where a specific holding to be a high profit jackpot (16R big hit) is present in the subsequent operation reserving ball, and the leading The first execution condition is assumed to be satisfied even when the operation holding ball is disengaged (in this case, whether or not there is a specific holding in the subsequent operation holding ball). Therefore, at the time when the pending U-Ran effect A occurs during the symbol change, the establishment of the Pending-in-U-Ran is not determined, and the so-called “Gasse” effect (false effect is the result of “off” in the variable display. ). To put it the other way around, if the result of the on-hold extended villa production A is “big hit” in the fluctuation display, the establishment of the on-hold extended villa (there is a specific hold in the subsequent operating hold ball) Is deterministic. On the other hand, whether or not the on-hold consecutive resort effect B can be executed is determined when the second execution condition is satisfied at the start timing of the special game. In this example, on the premise that the preceding operation reserving ball is a high profit big hit (16R big hit), if there is a specific hold to be a high profit big hit (16 R big hit) in the subsequent operation reserving ball, It is assumed that the second execution condition is satisfied when the consecutive resort production A occurs as a real production. In other words, the execution of the on-hold consecutive villa production B is determined in response to the fact that the on-hold consecutive villa production A has occurred as a true effect of notifying the establishment of the on-hold consecutive villa. For this reason, during the design variation, if the on-hold consecutive resort production A does not occur, and if the on-hold consecutive resort production A occurs, it is a gaze effect (the variation display is off) In the case of (3), there is no on-hold in-line production B. In this example, when the advance-reserved ball is digested in this way, the reserved-in-ream zone effect A is generated in the symbol variation, and when the change is a big hit, the establishment of the retained-in-ream resort is confirmed. Then, in the form of taking over the on-hold consecutive resort production A, the on-hold consecutive resort production B occurs during the execution of the special game after the change (after the big hit change). The on-hold consecutive villa production A and the on-hold consecutive villa production B are configured as production contents having continuity and relevance across the pattern variation and the special game.

FIG. 69 is a schematic view showing an example of effects of on-hold internal consecutive effects in the sixth embodiment. In the drawing, (A) to (D) are examples of effects during symbol variation display (including on-hold in-line consecutive effect A), and (E) to (H) are in special games in progress (on-hold in-line consecutive effect B Is included. In the normal gaming state (non-special gaming state) and the special gaming state, the position of the hold display area, the hold display mode (
It is preferable that the size is different. The reason for this is to emphasize the on-hold consecutive resort production B, which will be described later.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, the screen is blacked out for a moment at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), a special effect that does not appear in any scene other than the on-hold on-line on-off effect is displayed as a on-hold on-line on-run effect A (premium movie is reproduced) . For example, as this premium movie, a video until the main character learns the ultimate mystery and reaches an unthinkable zone is reproduced. In this example, since the on-premises in-line consecutive effect A also includes the effects of a gasse, the establishment of the on-off in-line consecutive passages is not necessarily determined only by the occurrence of the on-time in-line continuation effects A (premium movie). In addition, during the symbol change, the reserved image corresponding to the operation reserved ball of the special symbol is displayed. In this example, as shown in the drawing, it is assumed that all four reserved images (the operation reserved balls of the second special symbol) are displayed in the normal display mode (white).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), after the end of the premium movie, the decorative symbol is displayed in the big hit symbol "7, 7, 7" after reaching the reach state, and the big hit (the big hit pertaining to the previous operation hold ball ) Occurs. As described above, after the on-hold in-line consecutive effect A (premium movie) is executed, a jackpot occurs due to the change, and the establishment of the on-off in-line consecutiveness (presence of the specific on-hold) is assured. In this example, when a big hit is won, a "hyper bonus" is usually generated as a big hit effect in the special game, but as described above, when the pending hold is established due to the change, the special As a jackpot effect in the game, "non-reminiscent rebirth bonus" will occur.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (E), when the special game is started, a “non-rebirth bonus” is started as the big hit effect. At this time, even during execution of the special game, the hold image (the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball of the second special symbol) is continuously displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the hold image is displayed in almost the entire period from the jackpot start demo to the round game to the jackpot end demo. It should be noted that while the special game is being executed, the reserved image may not be displayed during the round game but may be displayed only at the big hit start demonstration and the big hit end demonstration, or may be displayed only at the big hit end demonstration .

  As shown in FIG. 69 (F), when the round game is started, a “non-inspiring reincarnation plate” appears as the pending internal connection effect B. The “non-reminiscence plate” is, for example, an image in which text information “non-reminiscence” is displayed in a rectangular plate of white (at least a color other than rainbow color). In this example, the “unimaginary reincarnation plate” is displayed in the entire period from the first round to the sixteenth round.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), in the jackpot end demo, the “unimaginary reincarnation plate” changes to a rainbow effect, and the hold image related to the trigger hold (the hold in which the pre-read result is determined to be a specific hold) Fly towards the image).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69H, the rainbow effect changes the display mode of the reserved image from white to rainbow. With the appearance of such rainbow colored reserved images, it is possible to visually convey to a player the establishment of the reserved pavers.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, a rainbow colored reserved image appearing even during symbol change is used as a reserved internal row arrangement effect during special games, but the present invention is not limited to this, It is also possible to use a special reserved image (for example, a reserved image of a giraffe pattern) that does not appear during symbol variation. Moreover, in the above-mentioned 6th Embodiment, although it is mentioned on the conditions that a preceding operation | movement pending ball is won by high profit big hit (16R big hit) as execution conditions of pending inside consecutive residence effect, it is limited to this Instead, the above-mentioned execution condition may be satisfied regardless of which big hit (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4R big hit) the preceding operation holding ball is.

  As described above, according to the sixth embodiment, the reserved image is changed from the normal mode in which the big hit expectation is low to the special mode in which the big hit expectation is high as the reserved inside row effect in the special game. Since it is possible to teach the player visually that the establishment is visually understandable, and by making the holding change occur even during the special game, it is possible to give the player surprise or unexpectedness, so that the holding Uchirenso The effect of the effect can be further enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when you execute the pending Uchinso effect during the special game, a special effect (for example, the pending Uchienso effect is generated as the effect of the symbol change (up to the change related to the specific hold) after the special game is over An effect that does not appear in the case of the symbol variation after the end of the special game when there is not, may be executed.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to a seventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. The description is omitted, and different parts are mainly described.

As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big prize opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the end of the special game. Note that the probability variation state may be continued until a predetermined number of times (ST number) of symbol variations is performed, or may be continued until the next big hit occurs. in this case,
If it is the former, it is easier to win the big hit type that makes it easier to enter the specific area 658 in the case of big hit with the second special symbol than in the case of big hit with the first special symbol, and the second special symbol It is desirable to win the big hit type that makes it easy to enter the specific area 658 with a probability of 100% in the case of big hit at. If it is the latter, it is easier to win the big hit type that makes it easier to enter the specific area 658 when the big hit with the second special symbol than the big special hit with the first special symbol, and the second special symbol It is desirable to win the big hit type that makes it easy to enter the specific area 658 with a probability of less than 100%.

  FIG. 70 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine PM according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 70, in the seventh embodiment, only a single big winning opening 65 (a ball-like attacker having a specific area 658) is mounted in the game area PA. That is, in the second embodiment described above, the second large winning opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened only in the specific round, and the first large winning opening not having the specific area 658 in the rounds other than the specific round. 64 is configured to be opened, but in the fifth embodiment, the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment adopts so-called preferential digestion in which the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the first special symbol, similarly to the game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, it is configured to preferentially digest the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol while the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol is present, regardless of the presence of the operation retaining ball of the first special symbol. There is.

  Next, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 shows a jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the seventh embodiment.

  The upper part of FIG. 71 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the seventh embodiment. In the symbol table per first special symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol is associated with the symbol group, the jackpot attribute, the number of times the probability variation time function is activated, and the action pattern of the big prize opening (this example) Then, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the symbol table per first special symbol, three types of symbol groups A, B, and C are set according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, it is divided into symbol group A (16R long open big hit), symbol group B (6R long open big hit), and symbol group C (6R long short open big hit).

  The lower part of FIG. 71 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the seventh embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, a big hit attribute, the number of times of operation of a probability variation short function, and an operation pattern of a big winning opening are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number (this example Then, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the symbol table per second special symbol, two types of symbol groups D and E are set according to the type of jackpot. Specifically, it is divided into a symbol group D (16R long open big hit) and a symbol group E (8R long open big hit).

As described above, each big hit is roughly classified into "long open big hit" and "long short open big hit". The long open big hit means a big hit where only a long open round game exists as a round game in the special game. The long and short opening big hit means a big hit where a long opening round game and a short opening round game are mixed as a round game in the special game. As shown in FIG. 71, the jackpot of the first special symbol is classified as a long-open jackpot or a long-short jackpot, and all jackpots of the second special symbol are classified as a long-jacketed jackpot. In this example, a long-open round game is a round game that is set to be released for a reference time or more (for example, 30 seconds that is a reference time of 20 seconds or more), and a short-open round game is less than the reference time It is a round game set to open (for example, 0.5 seconds less than 20 seconds which is a reference time). However, in the specific round (the specific number of rounds in which the sorting device in the specific area 658 operates), the opening pattern may be different from the other normal rounds (of course, as a modification, the opening pattern is the same) It may be) As an example, in a long open round game in a specific round, not 30 seconds open, 0.5 seconds open → 2 seconds closed → 29 seconds open (the total value of the open time is 29.5 seconds, from 30 seconds May be less). Moreover, in the short opening round game in a specific round, it is good also as 0.2 second opening (it is shorter than 0.5 second opening).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 71, each of the above jackpots is classified into "conditional specific jackpot" and "conditional normal jackpot" as attributes of the jackpot. "Conditional specific big hit" is set to be easy or possible to win a specific area 658, basically it is a specific big hit (probable variation big hit) on condition that the game ball wins in the specific area 658. Say a big hit to be finalized. The reason for "conditional" is that even if the specified area 658 is a long open jackpot, when the game ball does not actually win in the specified area 658, it usually becomes a big hit (non-probable variation big hit) It is because there is a possibility. Also, "conditional normal big hit" is set to difficult or impossible to win a specific area 658, basically on condition that the gaming ball does not win in the specific area 658, usually a big hit (non-deterministic variation big hit A big hit that is determined to be). The reason for "conditional" is that even if the specific area 658 is a short hit, if the gaming ball actually wins the specific area 658, it may result in a specific big hit (probable variation big hit). It is because there is. Here, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 71, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional specific big hit is 60%, and the winning probability of the conditional normal big hit is 40%. Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 71, in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional specific big hit is 100%.

  Here, the following relationships (1) to (3) are established regarding the breakdown of the jackpot in the present example.

(1) Expectation level of high profit jackpot In this example, the ratio of winning the high profit jackpot (the jackpot with the highest expected value for winning a prize ball) is set higher in the first special symbol lottery than in the second special symbol lottery. It is done. Specifically, the percentage of winning the high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) in the first special symbol lottery is 40%, whereas the ratio of winning the high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) in the second special symbol lottery is It is 25%, and the first special symbol lottery is configured to have a higher expectation of winning the high profit big hit (16R big hit) than the second special symbol lottery.

(2) Expected level of conditional specified big hit In this example, the percentage of winning a specific big hit (corresponding to a probability change big hit) as a big hit attribute is higher in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery It is set. Specifically, the percentage to win the conditional special jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is 60%, whereas the percentage to win the conditional special jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 100%. The second special symbol lottery is configured to have a higher expected degree of probability change transition than the one special symbol lottery.

(3) Average number of rounds In this example, the average number of rounds of a special game executed by generating one big hit is a big win in the first special symbol lottery and a case where a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery. It is set equally. Specifically, the average number of rounds for a special game in the case of a big win in the first special symbol lottery is “10 rounds”, whereas the average number of special games in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery is The average number of rounds is “10 rounds”, and the average number of rounds is configured to be the same.

  Subsequently, FIG. 72 is a time chart for describing an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the seventh embodiment. In the present example, a total of four types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above-described jackpot types. In the drawing, the state change of the special winning opening 65 in the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 72 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and each time width and ratio of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game is the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio. In the figure, “L” is added to the long open round game, and “S” is added to the short open round game.

  In this example, even if any of the above five types of big wins, the special game ends based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round in the special game. The presence or absence of a definite change transition in the later is distributed. The specific round in this example means that the sorting member (blade member 655) opens and closes and the specific area 658 is valid (the entry detection to the specific area 658 is treated as valid, that is, the specific area 658 is entered. The probability change transition is determined by entering the In addition, below, the other round except a specific round is also called a "normal round." In this example, the specific round is set to the sixth round, regardless of which of the jackpots. In this specific round, the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are synchronized (linked), and the specific area 658 is opened when the special winning opening 65 is opened (after the time when the special winning opening 65 is opened). The specific area 658 is opened), and the specific area 658 is closed when the special winning opening 65 is closed (the specific area 658 is closed after the big winning opening 65 is closed). Therefore, basically, if the special winning opening 65 is long open, the specific area 658 is also long open, and if the large winning opening 65 is short open, the specific area 658 is also short open. In addition, in one special game, the number of times of execution of a specific round is not limited to one, and may be set a plurality of times. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the specific area 658 is long-opened and the V-prize is easy or possible round among the specific rounds is also referred to as "V round", and the specific area 658 is short-opened and the V-prize difficult or not Possible rounds are also referred to as "non-V rounds".

  First, FIG. 72A shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). In other words, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to 16 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. In addition, since a long open round game is performed, a specific round (sixth round) is set as V round which is easy or possible to enter the ball into the specific area 658.

  FIG. 72 (B) shows a 6R long open pattern. In the 6R long open pattern, the long open round game is executed in all rounds, as in the 16R long open pattern described above. That is, since the large winning opening 65 is long-opened in any round game, the 6R long open jackpot becomes a big hit equivalent to six rounds in practice. It should be noted that the specific round (sixth round) is set as a V round in which the entry into the specific area 658 is easy or possible.

  FIG. 72C shows the 6R long and short open pattern. In the 6R long short open pattern, a long open round game is executed in a normal round, and a short open round game is executed in a specific round. That is, since the large winning opening 65 is long-opened only in the normal round, the 6R long short open big hit is a big hit equivalent to five rounds. The specific round (sixth round) is set as a non-V round in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area 658 because the short open round game is executed.

FIG. 72 (D) shows an 8R long open pattern. In the 8R long open pattern, the long open round game is executed in all rounds, as in the 16R long open pattern described above. That is, since the big winning opening 65 is long-opened in any round game, the 8R long opening big hit becomes a big hit equivalent to 8 rounds. It should be noted that the specific round (sixth round) is set as a V round in which the entry into the specific area 658 is easy or possible.

  Subsequently, promotion effects during the special game in the seventh embodiment will be described. In this example, as a plurality of types of promotion effects, a first promotion effect (a probability change promotion effect) and a second probability change promotion effect (a round promotion effect) are provided. The promotion effect in this example refers to the actual profit related to the jackpot during the jackpot for the profit mode related to the jackpot suggested or notified before the jackpot start or at the start of the jackpot (for convenience, “provisional profit mode”) The aspect is an effect that suggests or notifies whether the degree of profit is higher than the provisional profit aspect. In other words, suggesting or notifying whether the profit mode of the jackpot that was suggested or notified before the jackpot start or at the start of the jackpot is true (the mode of profit as it is) or false (a higher mode of profit), It is an effect that shows whether or not the profit aspect of the jackpot is promoted (changed) through the process. Furthermore, it is an effect that suggests or reports whether the hit is actually a relatively high hit or a relatively low hit through a series of processes before or after the hit. In addition, as a form other than suggesting or notifying the truth or false information related to the profit mode before the jackpot start or at the time of the jackpot start, the information related to the above profit mode (true or false information) may not be specified at all. . For example, when a “challenge bonus” appears, until the challenge succeeds or fails, the profit mode is 1) whether the specific round is a V round or a non-V round, and 2) the specified number of special games is 16 rounds and Any one of the eight rounds may be concealed. The promotion effect is executed as one mode of the jackpot effect during the special game.

  Here, FIG. 73 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the jackpot type and the promotion effect. In this example, the type of promotion effect and the possibility of execution are determined according to the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol (decorative symbol), the game state when the jackpot occurs, and the like. As will be described in detail later, in this example, when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of occurrence of the big hit is a normal state (low probability / no open extension), the first promotion effect is changed. The promotion effect is executed, and the probability change promotion effect is not executed when the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the probability change state (with high probability / open extension). In addition, when the game state at the time of jackpot occurrence is a probability change state (high probability / with open extension), at least the execution of the probability change promotion effect before the specific round is prohibited, and the execution of the probability change promotion effect after the specific round is allowed You may On the other hand, when the big special hit is the second special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a probable change state (high probability / with open extension), the round promotion effect is executed as the second promotion effect, If the gaming state at the time of occurrence is the normal state (low probability / no open extension), the round promotion effect is not executed.

Here, the jackpot symbol (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol in this example is basically “1 · 1 · 1”, “3 · 3 · 3”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “7 · 7・ 7 “,” “9. It distinguishes with an indeterminate symbol (even symbol) which usually shows a big hit or a definite variation big hit such as 8/8. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, among the above odd symbols, “3 · 3 · 3” and “7 · 7 · 7” are also referred to as first odd symbols, “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5 -"5" and "9-9. 9" are also referred to as second odd symbols. In this example, in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, when the 16R long open big hit (high profit big hit) is won, the first odd number symbol (big hit symbol) is “ 3 • 3 • 3 ”or“ 7 · 7 · 7 ”is selected, and the appearance of the jackpot symbol teaches that high-profit jackpot (16 rounds won) and definite transition after special game is definite . And in this example, various promotion effects can be performed using the big hit design other than that. In this example, when the big win is won with the second special symbol, only the odd symbol is selected and the even symbol is not selected as the big hit symbol (decorative symbol), but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, even when a big hit is won with the second special symbol, an even symbol may be selected as the big hit symbol (decorative symbol). In that case, it is preferable that in the normal state, "eight round determined effect" and "V determined effect" are performed, and even in the positive change state, "eight round determined effect" and "V determined effect" are performed. In addition, in addition to "16 round fixed production" and "8 round fixed production", "V fixed production" is configured to execute "big round winning with the second special symbol in normal state" It is also good.

  In the case of a big hit with the first special symbol, V finalization effect or probability variation promotion effect may be executed during the special game. The V finalized effect is an effect that informs that the probability change acquisition is definitive before or at the start of the special game, that is, that the specific round is executed as a V round (long open round game). It is an effect to inform. Probability promotion effect is an effect that suggests the expected degree of probability change acquisition in a specific round in a round before a specific round during the execution of a special game, that is, V round (long open round game) due to the occurrence of the big hit This is an effect that suggests the possibility of being executed. At this time, when the first special symbol is a big hit, which of the V finalization effect and the probable change promotion effect is executed in the special game depends on the type of the decorative symbol stoppage (big hit symbol) and the It is decided according to the game state at the time of big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the 16R long open big hit is won with the first special symbol, that is, the big hit symbol becomes the first odd symbol (for example, “7, 7, 7”). In this case, the V finalization effect is selected. On the other hand, if the game state is the normal state and the 6R long open big hit is won with the first special symbol, if the big hit symbol becomes the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), the V confirmed effect is If it is selected and the jackpot symbol is an even symbol (for example, “2, 2, 2”), the probable promotion effect is selected. In addition, when the game state is the normal state, if the 1R special symbol is won for the 6R long / short open jackpot, that is, if the jackpot symbol is an even symbol (for example, “2.2.2”), the probability change promotion effect is Selected.

  On the other hand, when the game state is a definite change state and the 16R long opening big hit is won with the first special symbol, that is, when the big hit symbol becomes the first odd symbol (for example, "7 · 7 · 7") , V finalization effect is selected. On the other hand, when the game state is a definite change state and the 6R long opening big hit is won with the first special symbol, ie, the big hit symbol becomes the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), V is decided An effect is selected. In addition, when winning a 6R long short opening jackpot with the first special symbol when the gaming state is a definite change state, that is, when the big hit symbol becomes an even symbol (for example, "2.2.2"), V finalization effect also Probability promotion production is not selected. That is, when the gaming state is a definite change state, if the conditional specified big hit (16R length open big hit, 6R length open big hit) is won as the big hit attribute, V finalization effect is executed, but conditional If a normal big hit (6R long and short open big hit) is won, neither the V finalization effect nor the probable promotion effect is executed.

Here, when becoming a big hit in the first special symbol, the probability variation promotion effect is executed, as described above, when the gaming state at the time of the big hit occurrence is a normal state (low probability / no open extension), ie It is the time of so-called first hit. The "first hit" means a jackpot generated by being won in the special symbol determination at least when the power support function is not activated (the open extension function is not activated). Therefore, the first special symbol to be a big hit is typically at the time of the first hit, and the player pays attention to whether or not the gaming state after the first hit will be a definite change state. By suggesting that the specific round may be V-round (long open round game) in the promotion effect, the player's sense of expectation in the special game can be maintained.

  Next, when the second special symbol is a big hit, a round finalizing effect or a round promotion effect can be executed during the special game. The round finalizing effect is an effect of definitely informing the number of rounds (16 rounds or 8 rounds) before or at the start of the special game. Specifically, in this example, sixteen rounds of fixed effect and eight rounds of fixed effect are prepared. The round promotion effect is an effect (also referred to as a “round-up effect”) that suggests the possibility of continuing after the specified number of rounds in the round game before the specified number of rounds during execution of the special game. At this time, if the second special symbol is a big hit, whether the round finalization effect or the round promotion effect is executed in the special game, the type of the stop symbol of the decorative design (big hit symbol) and the time of the big hit It is decided according to the game state etc.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the 16R long opening big hit is won with the second special symbol, that is, the big hit symbol becomes the first odd symbol (for example, “7 · 7 · 7”) In the case, 16 round finalization effects are selected. On the other hand, when the game state is normal state and 8R long opening big hit is won with the second special symbol, that is, when the big hit symbol becomes the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), 8 rounds The fixed effect is selected.

  On the other hand, if the game state is a probable state and the 16R long open big hit is won with the second special symbol, if the big hit symbol becomes the first odd symbol (for example, “7,7,7”), 16 rounds If the confirmed effect is selected and the jackpot symbol is the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), the round promotion effect is selected. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probable state, if the 2R special symbol wins the 8R long open jackpot, that is, if the jackpot symbol is the second odd symbol (for example, “1 · 1 · 1”), the round promotion An effect is selected.

  Here, when it becomes a big hit with the second special symbol, the round promotion effect is executed when the gaming state at the time of the big hit occurrence is a definite change state (with high probability / open extension), that is, It's time. As mentioned above, when it is in a state where at least the electric chow support function is operating (operating state of the open extension function), the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, and the special game is that special game As the gaming state after the end of, the state that the electric chew support function is operating again (the operating state of the opening extension function) continues. In other words, the second special symbol is a big hit when it is typically at the time of consecutive villas, and it is generally promised that a definite change state will be continuously provided at the time of the consecutive villas, and the player In order to focus on the number of special game winning rounds (the number of payouts) rather than the presence or absence of definite variation, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation during the special game by suggesting the possibility of continuing the second half round .

In addition, the above-mentioned effect contents (promotional effect, finalization effect) may be configured to be executed only in the non-electric chew support state if it is a game of the first special symbol, and a game of the second special symbol In this case, it may be configured to be executed only in the power-on state. Further, the probable promotion effect may be configured as (1) to (3) below. (1) In the case of a big hit with the first special symbol in the non-electric chew support state, while performing a definite change promotion effect during the special game (during a big hit), the second special in the non-electric chew support state When it is a big hit with a symbol, you may be configured to execute a definite change promotion effect before the start of the special game (before the big hit) instead of during the special game (while playing the big hit) (as the aspect, the change related to the big hit The combination of decorative symbols changes from "6, 6, 6" to "7, 7, 7" during display, suggesting that the probability change has been promoted. (2) If the first special symbol is a big hit in the state of electric chew support, execute the definite change promotion effect before the start of the special game (before the big hit) and the definite change promotion effect during the special game (big hit) Will not run, and if the second special symbol is a big hit in the state of electric Chu support, perform a definite change promotion effect before the start of the special game (before the big hit) Because it is a big hit that will be, it will definitely be promoted to a certain degree)). (3) However, when the above (2) is applied, even if it is a big hit with the first special symbol in the electric chow support state, the player's sense of expectation also during the special game (during the big hit) Probability promotion effect may be executed during a special game (during a big hit) so as to sustain the game.

(First promotion effect)
First, the probability variation promotion effect (first promotion effect) will be described with reference to a specific effect example. FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the content of the probable promotion effect. If the game condition is a normal condition and a big hit is made with the first special symbol, then the probability change promotion effect spans the second round to the fifth round of the special game, and the next sixth round (specific round ) Is an effect that suggests or reports the possibility of V round (long open round game). The probability change promotion effect in this example is based on the ball entering effect (also referred to as the “first ball entering effect”) performed in the second to fourth rounds and the V round acquisition effect performed in the fifth round Become.

  The first ball entering effect is displayed in the second round to the fourth round, as shown in FIGS. 74 (A) to (C). The first ball entry effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen in response to the game ball entering the big winning opening 65, and to the V prize round according to the display mode of the specific object This suggests the expected level of transition (ie, the expected level of change).

  First, as shown in FIG. 74A, when the second round is started, a meter image (meter image for the second round) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. This meter image is displayed in a horizontally long strip shape, and a scale is added to the inside thereof. The scale of the meter image is “0” at the start of each round game (the second round to the fourth round), and each time the game ball enters the big winning opening 65, an object for one scale in the meter image ( The object representing the color) is displayed, and the meter image is incremented by one graduation (the graduation is cleared to zero when moving to the next round). The meter images are set to all nine scales, which correspond to the maximum number of balls (10) which are the maximum winning holes 65 in each round game. That is, when there is a maximum number of ball entry (10) to the big winning opening 65 in the round game, the scale of the meter image is obtained by accumulation of objects for 10 scales (objects for one scale × 10) Is full. In this example, one of the two colors of “white” and “giraffe pattern” can be taken as the display mode of the object for one scale of the meter image. In the drawings, two types of display modes of white and giraffe are expressed by "plain" and "hatched", respectively. At this time, each time a giraffe pattern object of one scale appears, one star (an image imitating a star) is displayed (one star can be acquired). On the other hand, even if a white object of one division appears, the star is not displayed (the star can not be acquired). In this example, three stars can be displayed at the maximum, and it is suggested that the specific round may become V round (long open round game) according to the number of acquired stars. In the illustrated example, in this second round, by entering seven gaming balls into the large winning opening 65, the meter image has increased to seven divisions, but the giraffe pattern object does not appear, and the star is displayed. It shows the condition that could not be acquired.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), when the third round is started, a new meter image (meter image for the third round) is displayed on the screen. In the illustrated example, in the third round, a giraffe pattern object appears at the fifth entry to the special winning opening 65, and one star has been acquired.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74C, when the fourth round is started, a new meter image (meter image for the fourth round) is displayed on the screen. In the example shown in the figure, in the fourth round, a giraffe pattern object appears with the seventh ball entering the big winning opening 65, and another star can be acquired. Then, at the end of the fourth round, the total number (two) of the stars acquired in the first entering effect is determined. In the present example, although the number of acquired giraffe pattern objects in one round game is one, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of giraffe pattern objects can be acquired in one round game It may be configured.

  Next, the V round acquisition effect is displayed in the fifth round, as shown in FIGS. This V-round acquisition effect is closely related to the display mode (effect result) of the first entrance effect, and the effect content corresponding to the effect result (object display mode) of the entrance effect is derived. The expected degree of probability change acquisition (expected degree of transition to the V round) is suggested according to the contents of the production.

  As shown in FIG. 74D, in the fifth round, the title image is notified with the start of the V-round acquisition effect. In this example, a title image “probability change promotion chance time” is displayed on the screen. According to the attribute of the display mode of the title (in this example, a plurality of types of display colors are prepared), the expected degree of transition to the V round is notified in advance. Although the details will be described later, in this example, the display color of the title is set to be higher in the transition expectation to the V round in the order of “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red”. The attribute (display color) of the title varies depending on the number of stars acquired in the ballistic effect. In the example shown in the figure, the title display color is “purple” corresponding to the number of stars acquired “2”. Also, a message “Press the button to see the result!” Is displayed on the screen, and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 15. In response to this, when the player operates the effect button 15, the effect result is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 74E, when the probability change promotion is successful (when the next round becomes the V round), the characters “V round acquisition success” are displayed on the screen. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), when the probability change promotion has failed (when the next round is a non-V round), the characters “V round acquisition failure” are displayed on the screen. . However, in actuality, since the type of jackpot (whether or not the V round is executed) is determined in advance at the time of the winning or failing lottery, the effect development (effect result) according to the type is obtained. That is, when the 6R long open big hit (conditional specific big hit) is won, the probability change promotion succeeds, and when the 6R long short open big hit (conditional normal big hit) is won, the probability change promotion fails.

  And although illustration is omitted, in the next sixth round (specific round), a round game (long open round game or short open round game) according to the notification result by the probability variation promotion effect is executed. At this time, if the sixth round is a long open round game, for example, a predetermined effect image in which a message such as “Aim for V” appears is displayed in order to prompt the player to win the specific area 658. However, in the case of a short open round game, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. However, even if the game is a short open round game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area 658, if the game can be won in the specific area 658 as a result, the game state after the end of the special game is changed to a probable state. Will be migrated.

  The content (effect pattern) of such a probability change promotion effect is selected with reference to the probability change promotion effect pattern table. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a probability variation promotion effect pattern table. In the probability variation promotion effect pattern table, a plurality of types of probability variation promotion effect patterns are defined. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a judgment value (range of random values) for determining a probable change promotion effect pattern according to a random change value of a probable change promotion effect pattern Is set, and the probability variation promotion effect pattern is determined based on to which determination value the probability variation promotion effect pattern random number value belongs.

  In the probability variation promotion effect pattern table, according to the probability variation promotion effect pattern, the contents of the entering effect (presence or absence of appearance of the giraffe pattern object, the number of acquired stars) and the content of the V round acquisition effect (display color of the title) Is defined (see the column “Production contents” in the figure). In FIG. 75, the presence or absence of the appearance of the giraffe pattern object in each round is determined, “○” means that the giraffe pattern object appears, and “−” means that the giraffe pattern object does not appear. Yes. The number of acquired stars is determined according to the number of ○ marks (that is, the number of appearances of the giraffe pattern object). Then, the display color of the title in the V round acquisition effect is determined in accordance with the number of stars acquired in this ball entry effect. Specifically, for the number of acquired stars "0", the display color of the title "blue", for the number of acquired stars "1" the display color of the title "green", for the number of acquired stars "2" The display color of the title "red" is specified for the display color of the title "purple" and the number of stars acquired "3". In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 74 described above, the case where the probability variation promotion effect pattern PS107 is selected is illustrated.

  In this probability change promotion effect pattern table, the selection rate of the probability change promotion effect pattern is set to be different according to the jackpot type. Basically, each rendering pattern is assigned a selection rate according to the number of final stars acquired and the display color of the title. That is, when the jackpot type is 6R long open jackpot (when it is a jackpot with V round), the number of acquired stars is high in the order of “0” <“1” <“2” <“3” The selection rate increases in the order of “blue” <“green” <“purple” <“red” in the display color of the title. On the other hand, if the big hit type is 6R long short open big hit (if it is a big hit with non-V round), the total acquisition score is high in the order of "3" <"2" <"1" <"0" The selection rate increases in the order of “red” <“purple” <“green” <“blue” in the display color of the title. Therefore, in this example, the total acquisition points are in the order of “0” <“1” <“2” <“3” ”and the display color of the title is“ blue ”<“ green ”<“ purple ” <The degree of expectation for transition to V round (long open round game) is higher in the order of “red”. In addition, it is good also as a specification which long opening big hit (V round acquisition) decides by appearance of "red" as a display color of a title. In this case, for example, the selectivity of “red” in FIG. 75 is set as long open big hit: long short open big hit = 20: 0.

(Second promotion effect)
Next, the round promotion effect (second promotion effect) will be described. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect of the round promotion effect. The round promotion effect suggests that if the second special symbol is a big hit, the possibility is that the 9th round or later (that is, the second half of the 8th round) may be executed across the 7th to 8th rounds in the special game. It is an effect to inform. In other words, this round promotion effect is, for example, as if it is an 8R jackpot when the decorative design is stopped, and during the round it is actually a 16R jackpot (high profit jackpot), or a promotion effect (8R jackpot is a 16R jackpot) It is a kind of effect that appears to have been promoted to The round promotion effect in this example includes a ball effect that is executed in the seventh round (also referred to as “second ball effect”) and a second-half round acquisition effect that is executed in the eighth round.

  The second ball entering effect is displayed in the seventh round, as shown in FIGS. 76 (A) to (C). The second entering effect is an effect in which various objects are sequentially displayed on the screen in response to the game ball entering the big winning opening 65, and the second half of the eight rounds according to the display mode of the specific object Continuity expectations (ie round up expectations) are suggested. In addition, in the first entering effect, according to the number of appearances of a specific object (the giraffe pattern object) among multiple types of objects, the transition expectation to V round (long open round game) was suggested, In the second entering effect, round-up becomes definite when a special object (golden object) of a plurality of types of objects appears. In the drawing, the golden display mode is expressed by "filling". As a modification, the second entering game may be configured with the same effect pattern (showing contents) as the first entering game, and in that case, depending on the number of acquired giraffe objects The degree of expectation for round promotion may be configured differently.

  First, as shown in FIG. 76A, when the seventh round is started, a meter image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Also in this example, the scale of the meter image is “0” at the start of each round game, and every time a game ball enters the big winning opening 65 in the round game, an object (white color) is added to the meter image. An object or a gold object is displayed, and the meter image is increased by one division. In addition, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the part which is common in the above-mentioned 1st ball-in-place effect in the following.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (B), in this example, it is assumed that no gold objects appear and only white objects appear only until the sixth entry to the special winning opening 65. Then, as shown in FIG. 76C, in this example, a golden object appears by the seventh ball entering the winning prize opening 65, and at this point, the round-up for the latter eight rounds is definitive. Become. At this time, three stars can be acquired at a time by the appearance of the golden object (three stars are lit).

  Next, the second half round acquisition effect is displayed in the eighth round as shown in FIG. 76 (D) to (F). The latter half round acquisition effect is closely associated with the display mode (display result) of the ball entering effect, and is an effect in which the effect image corresponding to the display mode (display mode of the object) of the ball entering effect is displayed. According to the image, it is suggested that the latter 8 rounds of acquisition expectation. In this example, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), when a golden object is acquired, three stars acquired in the previous round are continuously displayed in order to give satisfaction of round promotion. A rendering image (gold effect) related to the gold object is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76E, as the round-up success effect, characters of “second-half round acquisition success” are displayed on the screen. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), if a golden object cannot be acquired by the seventh round, the characters “round acquisition failure” are displayed on the screen as a round-up failure effect in the eighth round. That is, in the eighth round, the acquisition results of the last eight rounds (ninth to sixteenth rounds) are displayed definitively. However, in actuality, since the type of jackpot (that is, the presence / absence of the latter half 8 rounds) at the time of the lottery is determined in advance, the effect development (effect result) according to the type is obtained. That is, when the 16R long open big hit is won, the round promotion is successful, and when the 8R long open big hit is won, the round promotion is failed.

  The content (effect pattern) of such a round promotion effect is selected with reference to the round promotion effect pattern table. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a round promotion effect pattern table. In the round promotion effect pattern table, a plurality of types of round promotion effect patterns are defined. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is described, but in fact, the judgment value (range of random value values) for determining the round promotion effect pattern according to the round promotion effect pattern random number value The round promotion effect pattern is determined based on which judgment value the round promotion effect pattern random value belongs to.

In the round promotion effect pattern table, the presence / absence of a special object (gold object) in the entry effect and the display result in the latter half round acquisition effect are specified according to the round promotion effect pattern (in the drawing) (Refer to the section “Production”). In FIG. 77, the presence or absence of the appearance of the golden object in the seventh round is determined, “○” indicates the occurrence of the golden object, and “−” indicates the absence of the golden object. Therefore, if “○” is attached to any of the round columns in the figure, the round promotion production pattern is the content of the production that results in a successful round-up, and “○” is attached to any of the round columns. If not, the round promotion effect pattern will be the effect contents of the round-up failure.

  In this round promotion effect pattern table, the selection rate of the round promotion effect pattern is set to be different according to the big hit type. Basically, in each effect pattern, a selection rate is assigned according to the display mode (appearance presence / absence and appearance timing) of the golden object. That is, when the big hit type is 16R long open big hit (when the total number of rounds is 16 rounds), a round promotion effect pattern PS 202 in which a golden object appears and round up is successful is selected. On the other hand, when the big hit type is 8R long open big hit (when the total number of rounds is 8 rounds), a round promotion effect pattern PS201 in which no gold object appears and round up fails is selected. As described above, since the golden object is selected only when the result of the determination is 16R long open big hit (in the case of 8R long open big hit it is not an object of selection), the appearance of the golden object is 16R big hit confirmation, that is, the latter half 8 rounds Show the securing of As a modification, even if it is not possible to acquire a gold object in the round promotion effect, the round promotion may be successful. In addition, even in the round promotion direction, the giraffe pattern object is made to appear, and when the gold object is acquired, the round promotion is decided, and even if the gold object can not be acquired, the round promotion is performed according to the number of giraffe pattern objects acquired. It may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation.

  As described above, in this example, as the big hit attribute of the first special symbol, conditional specified big hit (corresponding to probability variation big hit) and conditionally normal big hit (corresponding to non probability variation big hit) are provided, and conditional specified big hit is won. If so, while the specific round is set to V round (long open round game), the specific round is set to non-V round (short open round game) if the conditionally normal big hit is won. Therefore, regardless of which jackpot attribute, the presence or absence of V winning (probability variation acquisition) is distributed in the specific round. Therefore, the probability change promotion effect in this example is whether or not the specific round becomes a V round (long open round game) until the specific round starts, that is, an expectation of the probability change promotion in the specific round The degree is suggested or notified. On the other hand, only the conditional special jackpot is provided as the jackpot attribute of the second special symbol, and the specific round is set to V round (long open round game). In the case of the conditional specific jackpot, basically, the V winning (probability variation acquisition) is almost promised in a specific round. For this reason, it can be said that the significance of performing the probability change promotion production is low until the specific round is started. Therefore, instead, if it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol, as information on the expected winning ball winning value in the special game, the possibility that the round game will continue after the predetermined round, that is, the degree of expectation of the round promotion Is suggested or notified.

  As described above, according to the seventh embodiment, there are provided two types of promotion effects that are executed according to the type of the big hit before the predetermined round in the special game, and part of the two types of promotion effects different from one another If it is configured with a ball effect and a big hit with the first special symbol, the first promotion effect suggests the expected degree of probability change acquisition after the predetermined round (the expectation for acquiring the V round), while the second special In the case of a big hit in the pattern, the second promotion effect, by suggesting the degree of expectation of the continuation of the round after the predetermined round (expected degree of acquisition in the second half round) While securing the frequency of occurrence of the ball effect, variations in the promotion effect can be provided to enhance the effect of the big hit effect, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the above-described seventh embodiment exemplifies a configuration having only a single large winning opening 65 (only a large winning opening 65 having a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA, the present invention is limited to this configuration. For example, as in the second embodiment described above, the two large winning openings 64 and 65 (a large winning opening 64 having no specific area 658 and a special You may apply to the structure provided with the opening | mouth 65). At this time, in the second embodiment described above, the first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 are arranged to be vertically adjacent to the lower right area in the gaming area PA, and while the special game is being executed. Is configured to open the lower second big prize opening 65 (and the specific area 658) in the specific round and open the upper first big prize opening 65) in rounds other than the specific round. It is not limited to the configuration. For example, while adopting the arrangement of the big winning opening 64, 65 similar to the second embodiment described above, the opening pattern of the big winning opening 64, 65 may be different from that of the second embodiment. As an example, when the 16R special game is executed, in the odd-numbered (1R, 3R, 5R ...) round game, the upper first winning prize port 64 is opened and the even number (2R, 4R, 6R ...) is opened. In the round game, the lower second big prize opening 65 is opened. Then, in the odd number of round games, the big prize opening 64 is long open (29 seconds open) in any round game. On the other hand, in the round game of the even number of times, in rounds other than the specific round, the big prize opening 65 is long open (29 seconds open) and the specific area 658 is always closed, while in the first specific round (1R), The big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are short-opened (0.5 seconds open), and in the second specific round (7R), the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are long-opened (29 seconds open). At this time, by opening and closing the first big winning opening 64 and the second big winning opening 65 alternately every one round, at the same time one big winning opening is closed in a certain round, the other big winning opening Will be released and the next round will begin. Therefore, in one round, one big winning opening is closed and the game ball which was not able to enter the ball or the game ball which did not enter the ball increased the opportunity for the ball to enter the other big winning opening adjacent to this to increase. Do. Further, since the first large winning opening 64 and the second large winning opening 65 are close to each other in the vertical direction, the player may aim at the same position, and a game can be made without changing the launch strength of the gaming ball. As a result, the efficiency of entering a ball into the grand prize opening is increased, and the player's sense of gain is improved. At this time, even in the case of a long / short open big hit or a short open big hit, in the rounds other than the specific round, both the big winning openings 64 and 65 are long open (29 seconds open), and the ball entry efficiency is improved as described above. As a result, there are more opportunities to get more than before, which will be beneficial for players. As a modified example, the first round winning opening 64 is opened by an even number of round games (2R, 4R, 6R,... The mouth 65 may be opened by an odd number of round games (1R, 3R, 5R...).

Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, a special round is set to distribute whether or not to shift to a definite change state after the end of the special game according to the presence or absence of entering the specific area 658 during the special game execution, Certain area entering a ball directing instruction to enter the specific area 658 by launching a game ball aimed at the large winning opening 65 (specific area 658), or definite variation after the end of the special game by having entered the specific area 658 A specific area entry notification effect (see the second embodiment) or the like for notifying transition to a state is performed. An example of the specific area entry effect is to display a message such as “Aim at V!” Or “It will change when you enter V!” On the screen. An example of the specific area entry notification effect is to display a message such as “V winning!” Or “Probability change get” on the screen. At this time, if a big hit is made with the first special symbol in the non-specific gaming state (in this example, when the opening extension function is not activated), the second special in the specific gaming state (in this example, when the opening extension function is activated) The configuration is such that the execution probability of at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry instruction effect is lower than the case of a big hit with a design, or at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry effect It may be configured not to execute. That is, in this example, when a big hit in the first special symbol (ie, in the case of the first hit), it is uncertain whether or not a definite change has been obtained (in the case of 16R or 6R long open big hit, possibility of obtaining a definite change) High probability, 6R long short open big hit is unlikely to get a probability change), and the player pays attention to the probability change gain, so the specific area 658 will be open in a specific round when the specific area is open. By executing the instruction effect and the specific area entry notification effect, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation and satisfaction of the probability change acquisition. On the other hand, in the case of big hit with the second special symbol (that is, in the case of continuous state), basically, there is a possibility of probability variation acquisition with a definite variation acquisition (16R or 8R length opening jackpot and a definite hit) Since the player's interest in acquiring the probability change is not so great, at least one of the specific area entry instruction effect and the specific area entry notification effect is not executed or even if it is executed, the above message is displayed. The display may be small or the display mode may be simplified. In addition, when two or more specific rounds are set (both V rounds), if a V win is made in the previous specific round, a specific area entry effect (“Aim for V”) is executed in the subsequent specific round. There is no need to do this (however, a specific area entry effect is executed in the previous specific round).

Further, in the seventh embodiment described above, when a so-called consecutive resort continues for a specified number of times, a rare special effect (so-called ascension effect) may be generated. Also in this example, as in the first embodiment described above, whether or not a special effect (so-called ascension effect) can be executed is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied regarding the so-called extended resort state. The predetermined condition is, for example, that the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative number of specific big hits in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, the accumulated number of winning balls in the consecutive resort state reaches a predetermined number, There may be a case where a specific effect (specific effect during symbol variation or special game) is generated during the quiet state. This special effect is executed across the symbol variation effect related to the jackpot of N consecutive times N = Nset (Nset: specified number) and the special game related to the Nset jackpot. As a modified example, the special effect may not extend over the symbol variation effect related to the big hit of the consecutive resort N = Nset times (Nset: the specified number) and the special game related to the Nset big hit. Good (may be performed on either side). At this time, when the special effect is executed, the probability of executing at least one of the specific area entering instruction instruction and the specific area entering effect is lower in the specific round in the special game than when the special effect is not executed. Alternatively, it may be configured not to execute at least one of the specific area entering instruction and the specific area entering effect. Even if the specific area entry instruction effect or the specific area entry effect is executed, the message may be displayed in a small size or simplified. The reason is to avoid diluting the effects of the special effects during the execution of the special game and the specific area entry instruction effect (specific area entry notification effect). In this case, giving priority to the execution of the special effect with high rarity is a result that the player is satisfied with the result.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  As with the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big winning opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball check type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to a definite changing state after the end of the special game. In addition, a definite change state may be continued until symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) is performed, and may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Further, the gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is equipped with only a single big winning opening 65 (a ball probability attacker having a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA, as in the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. ing. That is, also in the eighth embodiment, the big winning opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  Next, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 shows the jackpot breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the eighth embodiment. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the description regarding “small hit” is omitted unless otherwise specified.

The upper part of FIG. 78 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the eighth embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, a big hit attribute, the number of times of operation of a probability change / time saving function, and an operation pattern of a big winning opening are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol per symbol table, as a symbol group A (16R long opening big hit), a symbol group B (12R long short opening big hit 1), and a symbol group C (12R) as three kinds of symbol groups according to the type of big hit Long and short open big hit 2) is set. As shown in the upper row of FIG. 78, in the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a conditional specified big hit (corresponding to a probability change big hit) is 50%, and the winning probability of a conditional normal big hit (corresponding to a non probability change big hit) is 50% It is.

  The lower part of FIG. 78 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the eighth embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening are respectively associated with the symbol random value per special symbol (this book). In the example, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the symbol table per second special symbol, a symbol group D (16R long open big hit) and a symbol group E (7R long open big hit) are set as two types of symbol groups according to the type of big hit. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 78, in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the conditional specific big hit (corresponding to the probability variation big hit) is 100%.

  In this example, the average number of rounds of special games executed by one occurrence of big hit is set equal in the case of winning a big win in the first special symbol lottery and in the case of winning a big win in the second special symbol lottery. Specifically, the average number of rounds for a special game in the case of a big win in the first special symbol lottery is “12.4 rounds”, whereas the special number in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery The average number of rounds of the game is “12.4 rounds”, and each average number of rounds is configured to be the same.

  Subsequently, FIG. 79 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the eighth embodiment. In the present example, a total of four types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above-described jackpot types. In the drawing, the state change of the special winning opening 65 in the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 79 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and the time widths and ratios of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game are the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio. That is, in the figure, in order to express the progress of each round in an easy-to-understand manner, the time width of each round and each interval is described equally. It differs depending on the opening mode. In the figure, “L” is added to the long open round game, and “S” is added to the short open round game.

Here, the single opening / closing operation (opening operation) of the special winning opening 65 is a long opening (also referred to as “long opening operation”) in which the opening time is relatively long according to the length of the opening time. And short opening (which is also referred to as “short opening operation”) in which the opening time is relatively short. In one round game, regardless of whether the opening time is long or short, the opening / closing operation of the grand prize opening 65 is executed only once, and the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 65 is executed a plurality of times. There is. Here, the round game is classified into a long open round game and a short open round game. In the long open round game, after the round game is started and the grand prize opening 65 is released, the number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 65 reaches a specified number (in this example, “10 balls”), or , When the opening time of the big winning opening 65 (if it is opened multiple times during one round, the total opening time of the opening several times) has passed the first prescribed time, the winning opening 65 is closed , This round game is over. The first predetermined time is a time width in which the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 65 may reach a predetermined number (10 balls), and in this example, “29 seconds” is set. In this example, in the long opening round game, one long opening operation may be performed, or one long opening operation and one short opening operation may be performed. That is, in the long opening round game, when the first specified time is reached by one long opening operation (29 seconds), one long opening operation (28.8 seconds) and one short opening operation (0. The first specified time may be reached by 2 seconds). Note that, as a modification, the single long opening operation may not always be 28.8 seconds, and may always be 29 seconds regardless of the presence or absence of the combination with the short opening operation. On the other hand, in the short open round game, after the round game is started and the big prize opening 65 is opened, the opening time of the big prize opening 65 has passed the second specified time (in this example, “0.2 seconds”). The grand prize opening 65 is closed, and this round game ends. The second specified time is a time range in which the game ball itself can not easily win the big winning opening 65, and in this example, “0.2 seconds” is set. Therefore, in the short opening round game, it is substantially impossible to obtain a prescribed number of winnings on the big winning opening 65. The short open round game may involve a plurality of short open actions in one round. In the following, "long opening round game" means that at least one long opening operation is included in one round, and whether or not a short opening operation is performed (a short opening operation may be included) . The "short opening round game" means including at least one or more short opening operations in one round, and does not include a long opening operation. Here, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 79 (B) and (C), the 12R long short open patterns 1 and 2 (12R long short open big hit 1 and 2) are all set to seven rounds ing.

  First, FIG. 79 (A) shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). In other words, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to 16 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. As described above, the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because the long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 79 (B) shows the 12R long and short open pattern 1. 12R long short opening pattern 1, long opening round game in the first to third round, short opening round game in the fourth round, long opening round game in the fifth to eighth round, short opening round in the ninth to twelfth round A game is executed. The 12R long short open jackpot 1 is a big hit corresponding to substantially 7 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in 7 round games out of 12 round games. In addition, since a specific round (the 5th round) is a long open round game as mentioned above, it is set as V round which the ball entering to the specific field 658 is easy or possible.

  FIG. 79C shows the 12R long / short open pattern 2. In 12R long / short open pattern 2, long open round games in the first to fourth rounds, short open round games in the fifth round, long open round games in the sixth to eighth rounds, short open rounds in the ninth to twelfth rounds A game is executed. The 12R long / short open big hit 2 is a big hit equivalent to 7 rounds because the big winning opening 65 is opened long in 7 round games out of 12 round games, like the above 12R long / short open big hit 1 . In addition, since a short open round game is performed as above-mentioned, a specific round (the 5th round) is set as a non-V round in which entering into the specific area 658 is difficult or impossible.

  First, FIG. 79 (D) shows a 7R long open pattern. In the 7R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). That is, the 7R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to seven rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. As described above, the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because the long open round game is executed.

Here, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 in the 12R long / short opening patterns 1 and 2 will be described in more detail. First, in each of the first to third rounds and the seventh to eighth rounds of the 12R long and short open patterns 1 and 2, the special winning opening 65 is opened long only once, and in each of the ninth to twelfth rounds. The special winning opening 65 is opened short only once. Therefore, in the 12R long / short opening patterns 1 and 2, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 coincides in each round. On the other hand, in the 12R long / short opening patterns 1 and 2, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 is different in each of the fourth to sixth rounds. Specifically, in the 12R long and short open pattern 1, one short open in the fourth round, one long open in the fifth round, one short open and one long open in the sixth round Is done. That is, in the 12R long and short open pattern 1, the big winning opening 65 opens and closes in the order of “short open → long open → short open → long open” in the sections from the fourth to the sixth round. On the other hand, in the 12R long / short opening pattern 2, one short opening and one long opening are performed in the fourth round, a short opening is performed in the fifth round, and one long opening is performed in the sixth round. . That is, in the 12R long and short open pattern 2, in the section from the fourth round to the sixth round, the special winning opening 65 opens and closes in the order of "short open → long open → short open → long open". That is, when comparing the 12R long and short opening patterns 1 and 2 and looking at each of the fourth to sixth rounds individually, the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65 is different, but the fourth to sixth rounds When the sections are totally viewed as a series of flows, the opening and closing operations of the special prize opening 65 are the same. In the drawing, for convenience of explanation, since the time width of each round is equally divided, the interval period is represented variously in a long and short, but in actuality, the interval period is set to be substantially the same. Therefore, as indicated by broken arrows in the figure, each operation (corresponding operation) in the section from the fourth to the sixth rounds is set at substantially the same timing on the time axis. There is. As a modification, in FIGS. 79 (B) and 79 (C), the above-mentioned opening pattern may be set up to the fifth round, and a short opening round game may be performed on all rounds after the sixth round (that is, substantially) May be finished in 5 rounds). In FIG. 79B, the opening operation in the sixth round is a combination of short opening and long opening, but is not limited to this, and only the long opening operation may be performed.

  Subsequently, the jackpot effect in the eighth embodiment will be described. In this example, as in the embodiments described above, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, various special effects as a big hit effect (big hit effect according to the big hit type) in the special game, various A movie image, instruction information for prompting striking to the big winning opening 65 (right hitting), the number of winning prize balls in the big hit, and the like are displayed. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a big hit (typically in the case of the first hit), in each round during the special game, what number round the current round is (more specific Round number display effect to notify the round number information that can be determined whether or not it is a round, and V acquisition to notify that the game ball has passed the specific area 658 and acquired a definite variation (that is, having won V) The execution of the display effect is not set. Alternatively, an object may be displayed that indicates the number of long open rounds that have been executed (executed), or an object that indicates the number of long open rounds that are scheduled to be performed. In the former case, the object is increased each time the long release round is executed, and in the latter case, the object is decreased each time the long release round is executed. In other words, the object does not increase or decrease if it is a short open round. On the other hand, when the second special symbol is a big hit (typically in the case of consecutive villas), the execution of the number-of-rounds display effect and V acquisition display effect is set in each round during the special game It is done.

  In this way, assuming that either of the 12R long and short opening patterns 1 and 2 is executed during the special game, the information regarding the probability transition transition such as the round number information and the V winning information is not notified as the big hit effect but by concealment state It can be made difficult to determine whether or not a V prize is won from the production mode during the special game. Also in the present example, various promotion effects may be executed during the special game, as in the above-described embodiment.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern table of the special symbol in the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, the gaming machine according to the present example is configured as a so-called ball size machine in which the probability change transition after the special game is determined by the game ball winning in the specific area 658 in the specific round during the special game. When the V game is not won in the specific area 658 in the special game (when the game state after the special game becomes the normal state), the normal variation pattern table is set as the special pattern variation pattern table. In the case where V is won in the specific area 658 (when the gaming state after the special game is a definite change state), the shortening change pattern table is set as the change pattern table of the special symbol. That is, also in this example, as a general rule, the variation pattern table selected after the special game may differ depending on the game state after the special game. In this way, the variation pattern table is set according to the game state after the special game (according to whether or not the specific area 658 is won during the special game), so that the game state is the normal state. The selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) may differ from each other in the case of the positive change state.

  Next, the effect mode in the eighth embodiment will be described. Also in this example, effect mode transition control is executed on the effect control board 200 side in a manner consistent with the gaming state (or the variation pattern selection state) managed on the main control board 100 side. Then, on the effect display device 70, an effect mode notification image (in this example, a background image serving as a back display of the decorative symbol) corresponding to the effect mode during the stay is displayed. Since they are set to be different, the player can recognize which presentation mode is currently staying from the type of the background image. In addition, by suggesting the type of effect mode to the player in this way, based on the type of effect mode during the stay, the type of game state and the type of variable effect content (variable effect pattern) during the pattern change Is suggested to the player. At this time, in this example, as the effect mode after the special game, regardless of whether the game state after the special game is a normal state or a probable change state, the mode is shifted to the common effect mode (secret effect mode). In other words, the concealment effect mode is an effect mode in which an effect is given in which the player is scolded with the current game state (internal game state) being a normal state or a probable state as a concealment state. In this example, when the concealment effect mode is set as the effect mode, “special background” is displayed as the background image. In this example, a variation effect pattern table is set for each effect mode during the stay, and even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is different, if the effect mode is the same, the effect contents are common to each other. The variation effect pattern to be selected can be selected. That is, even if the variation time selected on the main control board 100 side (the production scale corresponding thereto) varies depending on the gaming state, on the production control board 200 side, whether the gaming state is the normal state or not surely changes. In order to shift to the same effect mode regardless of the state, the background effect and the change effect with the same effect contents are selected. Therefore, not only during the execution of the special game, but also in the symbol variation game after the end of the special game, the concealment state relating to the presence or absence of the probability change transition will be continued, and the player from the production mode It becomes difficult to determine the state, and the game can be advanced while expecting that the state has shifted to the probable change state. As described above, in this example, whether or not there is a probability change transition is determined depending on whether or not the probability change transition is determined internally depending on the presence or absence of a V prize in a specific round. By making it difficult to discriminate, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation and interest regarding the probability change transition from the special game to the symbol variation game. In this transition to the concealment effect mode, as a big hit type, only a conditional specified big hit (12R long short open big hit 1) and a conditional normal big hit (12R long short open big hit 2) are considered as transition triggers. In addition, when the number of symbol fluctuations after the big hit has reached a predetermined number, it may be positively notified that the current gaming state is a probable variation state.

As described above, according to the eighth embodiment, in the operation pattern related to the conditional specific big hit (12R long and short open big hit 1) and the operation pattern related to the conditional normal big hit (12R long and short open big hit 2), all the rounds A series of opening and closing operations (operation sequence of long opening and short opening) of the winning opening 65 are made substantially the same mode, and it is determined which winning type is won and in which round a specific round is executed. By making it difficult to do so, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the probability change acquisition until the special game is over, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Ninth embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big prize opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball accuracy type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state after the special game ends. In addition, a definite change state may be continued until symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) is performed, and may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Similarly to the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is equipped with only a single big prize opening 65 (a ball-like attacker with a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA. ing. That is, the ninth embodiment is also configured such that the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the ninth embodiment adopts so-called preferential digestion in which the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the variation display of the first special symbol, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, it is configured to preferentially digest the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol while the operation retaining ball of the second special symbol is present, regardless of the presence of the operation retaining ball of the first special symbol. There is.

  First, the big hit type (big hit breakdown) in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 shows the big hit breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the ninth embodiment. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the description regarding “small hit” is omitted unless otherwise specified.

  The upper part of FIG. 80 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the ninth embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, a big hit attribute, the number of times of operation of a probability change / time saving function, and an operation pattern of a big winning opening are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol per symbol table, symbol group A (15R long short opening big hit 1), symbol group B (15R long short opening big hit 2), and symbol group C (3 types of symbol groups according to the type of big hit) 7R long and short open big hit) is set.

  The lower part of FIG. 80 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the ninth embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, a big hit attribute, the number of times of operation of a probability change / time saving function, and an operation pattern of a big winning opening are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per first special symbol, symbol group D (16R long open big hit 1), symbol group E (16R long open big hit 2), and symbol group F ( An 8R long opening big hit), a symbol group G (4R long opening big hit 1), and a symbol H (4R long open big hit 2) are set.

Also in this example, each of the above jackpots is classified as "conditional specified jackpot" or "conditionally normal jackpot" as a jackpot attribute. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 80, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of a conditional special big hit (equivalent to a probable big hit) is 50%, and the winning probability of a conditional normal big hit (equivalent to a non-probable big hit) is 50%. It is. Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 80, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a conditional specified big hit (corresponding to a probability variation big hit) is 100%. In the following, among the jackpot types of the second special symbol, “16R long open big hit 1” and “4R long open big hit 1” are collectively referred to as “big hit α”, and the other big hit types are “16R” The long open jackpot 2 "," 8R long open jackpot "and" 2 per 4R long open "are also collectively referred to as" big hit β ". Here, the jackpot β, which will be described in detail later, is a jackpot where “seven star charge” is executed as a jackpot effect regardless of whether it is inside or outside the limited period, and a special symbol (“A. A, A ", etc.) will be available. In addition, a special symbol may be displayed on the middle symbol row by only one special symbol (the left and right row symbol rows are arbitrary symbols). On the other hand, the jackpot α is a jackpot in which “seven star charge” is executed as a jackpot effect only within a limited period, and numerical symbols (odd symbols) are arranged as the jackpot symbol.

  In this example, the average number of rounds of special games to be executed by one big hit occurrence is set equal to the big win in the first special symbol lottery and the big win in the second special symbol lottery Yes. Specifically, while the average number of rounds of special games in the case of a big hit in the first special symbol lottery is "11 rounds", the special game in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol lottery The average number of rounds is “11 rounds”, and each average number of rounds is configured to be the same. In the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the average number of rounds of the special game is equal, but all the big wins of the first special symbol are set as "long open big hit" Since the big hit of the second special symbol is set as "long open jackpot", the second special symbol lottery is better than the first special symbol lottery, and the expectation value for winning balls (effective average number of rounds) Is set high.

  In this example, even if any jackpot type is won, if the game ball enters the specific area 658 in the specific round during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is changed. It becomes a state. The definite change state is not continued until the occurrence of the next big hit, but is limited to a period (130 times) until the number of changes after the end of the special game reaches the fixed change end number. On the other hand, regardless of which jackpot type is won, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 658 in the specific round during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game is the short-time state. Become. The time saving state is not continued until the occurrence of the next big hit, but is limited to a period (100 times) until the number of changes after the special game ends reaches the number of time closing ends. In addition, after the end of the special game, when the number of closing times (130 times or 100 times) has passed without generating the next big hit, the gaming state returns to the normal state.

  Subsequently, FIG. 81 is a time chart for describing an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the ninth embodiment. In this example, a total of five types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above-described jackpot types. That is, as shown in FIG. 80, in this example, if the specified number of rounds of special games corresponding to each jackpot is the same, the same operation pattern is set (the operation pattern is common for each specified number of rounds). is there). In the drawing, the state change of the special winning opening 65 in the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 81 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and the time width and ratio of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game are the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio. In the figure, “L” is added to the long open round game, and “S” is added to the short open round game.

In this example, regardless of which of the above five types of big hits, in the specific round in the special game, the presence or absence of a probability variable prize is determined based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 658 Is distributed. In addition, below, the other round except a specific round is also called a "normal round." In this example, the specific round is set to the third round regardless of which jackpot corresponds. In this specific round, the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are synchronized (linked), and the specific area 658 is opened when the special winning opening 65 is opened (after the time when the special winning opening 65 is opened). The specific area 658 is opened), and the specific area 658 is closed when the special winning opening 65 is closed (the specific area 658 is closed after the big winning opening 65 is closed). Therefore, basically, if the special winning opening 65 is long open, the specific area 658 is also long open, and if the special winning opening 65 is short open, the specific area 658 is also short open. In addition, in one special game, the number of times of execution of a specific round is not limited to one, and may be set a plurality of times.

  First, FIG. 81A shows a 15R long and short open pattern. In the 15R long / short open pattern, long open round games are executed in the first round and the third to sixth rounds, and short open round games are executed in the second round and the seventh to 15th rounds. That is, since the large winning opening 65 is long-opened in the five round games, the 15R long short opening big hit 1, 2 becomes a big hit equivalent to five rounds. In addition, since a long open round game is performed, the specific round (3rd round) is set as V round which is easy or possible to enter the ball into the specific area 658.

  FIG. 81 (B) shows a 7R long / short open pattern. In the 7R long short opening pattern, a long opening round game is executed in the first to second rounds and the fourth to sixth rounds, and a short opening round game is executed in the third round and the seventh round. That is, since the large winning opening 65 is long-opened in the five round games, the 7R long short open jackpot becomes a big hit equivalent to five rounds. In addition, since a short open round game is performed, a specific round (the 3rd round) is set as a non-V prize round in which entering the specific area 658 is difficult or impossible. The seventh round described above may involve nine short opening operations, in which case the number of short opening operations after the seventh round in the 15R long short opening pattern may be the same. it can.

  FIG. 81C shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long open pattern, long open round games are executed in all rounds (normal round, specific round). In other words, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to 16 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. In addition, since a long open round game is performed, the specific round (3rd round) is set as V round which is easy or possible to enter the ball into the specific area 658.

  FIG. 81D shows an 8R long open pattern. In the 8R long opening pattern, a long opening round game is executed in all rounds, as in the above-mentioned 16R long opening pattern. In other words, the 8R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to eight rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. Note that the specific round (third round) is set as a V-round, in which entry to the specific area 658 is easy or possible.

  FIG. 81 (E) shows a 4R long open pattern. In the 4R long release pattern, the long release round game is executed in all rounds, as in the 16R and 8R long release patterns described above. That is, the 4R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to substantially four rounds because the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. Note that the specific round (third round) is set as a V-round, in which entry to the specific area 658 is easy or possible.

  Here, the operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 when the first special symbol is a big hit, that is, the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65 in the 15R long short opening pattern and the 7R long short opening pattern will be described in more detail. First, in any of the operation patterns, the large winning opening 65 is opened long only once in each of the first round and the fifth to sixth rounds, and the large winning opening 65 is 1 in each of the seventh to fifteenth rounds. Opened only a short time. Therefore, in the 15R long short open pattern and the 7R long short open pattern, the open / close operation of the special winning opening 65 matches in each of the above-mentioned rounds. On the other hand, in each operation pattern, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 is different in each of the second to fourth rounds. Specifically, in the 15R long and short open pattern, one short open in the second round, one long open in the third round, one short open and one long open in the fourth round To be done. That is, in the 15R long and short opening pattern, the big winning opening 65 opens and closes in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” in the sections from the second to the fourth round. On the other hand, in the 7R long and short open pattern, one short open and one long open in the second round, a short open in the third round, and a long open in the fourth round are performed. That is, in the 7R long short open pattern, the big winning opening 65 opens and closes in the order of “short open → long open → short open → long open” in the sections from the second round to the fourth round. That is, when comparing each operation pattern, if each round from the second to the fourth round is seen individually, although the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65 is different respectively, the section from the second to the fourth round is continued In total, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 matches. . In the drawing, for convenience of explanation, since the time width of each round is equally divided, the interval period is represented variously in a long and short, but in actuality, the interval period is set to be substantially the same. Therefore, as indicated by the broken arrows in the figure, each operation (corresponding operation) in the sections from the fourth to sixth rounds described above is set at substantially the same timing on the time axis. There is.

  Therefore, a series of opening / closing operations (long opening) of the big winning opening 65 in the operation pattern related to the conditional special big hit (15R long / short open big hit 1, 2) and the operation pattern related to the conditional normal big hit (7R long / short open big hit). And the operation sequence of the short opening) are made to be in the same manner, making it difficult to determine which jackpot type has been won, and in which round a specific round was executed. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the acquisition of definite variation until the end of the Here, if the first special symbol is a big hit, as the big hit effect during that special game, at least the sixth round (the round in which the probable change promotion effect described later) is set, how many rounds the current round is The number of rounds that can be determined whether it is (or whether or not it is a specific round) and V winning information that indicates that the game ball has passed through the specific area 658 and has acquired a certain change are not notified, and the big winning mouth From the operation pattern of 65 and the above-described effect mode, the presence or absence of the probability change transition is set as the concealed state (described in detail later). Instead, an object indicating the number of executed long open rounds may be displayed, or an object indicating the number of long open rounds scheduled to be executed may be displayed. In the former case, the object is increased each time the long release round is executed, and in the latter case, the object is decreased each time the long release round is executed. In other words, the object does not increase or decrease if it is a short open round. As a modified example, as described above, the seventh round in the 7R long / short opening pattern may be configured to involve nine short opening operations, and in that case, the seventh round in the 15R long / short opening pattern Since it can be made the same as the number of short opening operations thereafter, a series of opening operations of the big prize opening 65 can be made substantially the same throughout all rounds.

Subsequently, a big hit symbol (a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols) in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 82 is a schematic view showing a big hit symbol table (decorative symbol per symbol table) in the ninth embodiment. As described above, the jackpot symbol is determined with reference to the jackpot symbol table. The jackpot symbol is basically composed of a combination of stop modes “*, *, *” in which three symbols of the same number or the same character are arranged (*: any decorative symbol). However, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4, even if the jackpot type is the same, the jackpot symbol may differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Here, the jackpot symbol (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol in this example is basically “1 · 1 · 1”, “3 · 3 · 3”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “7 · 7”.・ 7 ”,“ 9 ・ 9 ・ 9 ”,“ A ・ A ・ A ”,「 B ・ B ・ B 」,「 C ・ C ・ C 」 And “2 ・ 2 ・ 2”, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4”, “6 ・ 6 ・ 6”, “8 ・ 8 ・ 8”, etc. Differentiated. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, among the above odd symbols, “3 · 3 · 3” and “7 · 7 · 7” are also referred to as first odd symbols, “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5 -"5" and "9-9. 9" are also referred to as second odd symbols.

  First, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the 1R special lottery process wins 15R long / short open big hit 1, the second odd number such as “1 · 1 · 1” or “5 · 5 · 5” A symbol (probable variation symbol) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, “2 ・ 2 ・ 2”, “4 ・ 4 ・ 4”, etc. if the 15R long / short open big hit 2 or 7R long / short open big hit is won in the lottery process of the first special symbol Such an even symbol (uncertain symbol) is selected. After the indeterminate symbol is stopped and displayed, the certainty promotion promotion effect is executed in the special game (details will be described later). On the other hand, when the game state is in the probable state or in the short time state, if the 15R long / short open big hit 1, 2 is won, the second odd symbol such as “1 · 1 · 1”, “5 · 5 · 5”, etc. If a symbol is selected and a 7R long / short open jackpot is won, an even number of symbols (indeterminate symbols) such as “2, 2, 2”, “4, 4, 4”, etc. are selected. This is because if the first special symbol is a big hit in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the probability variation promotion effect is not executed (the possibility of probability variation transition is not concealed), and the probability variation transition is based on the type of the jackpot symbol. The purpose is to teach the player in advance the presence or absence of

  Next, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the 16R long open big hit 1 is won in the lottery process of the second special symbol, the first odd symbol such as “3, 3, 3” or “7, 7, 7” (Positive symbol) is selected. On the other hand, when the game state is in the probabilistic state or in the short-time state, if the above 16R long open big hit 1 is won, the first odd number such as “3.3.3”, “7.7.7” is selected by random lottery. When a symbol (probable variable symbol) is selected, and when a second odd symbol (probable variable symbol) such as "1, 1, 1", "5, 5, 5", or "9, 9, 9" is selected There is. At this time, if it is the first odd symbol, it is definitely notified that it is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), and if it is the second odd symbol, it is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) Is made secret and round promotion effect (success) is executed during the big hit. In addition, when the game state is a probable change state or a short-time state, even if the 4R long open big hit 1 is won in the lottery process of the second special symbol, as in the case where the 16R long open big hit 1 is won, “1 · 1 A second odd number design (probability variation design) such as “1”, “5 · 5 · 5”, “9 · 9 · 9” is selected, and a round promotion effect (failure) is executed during the big hit. In any game state, when the 16R long open big hit 2, 8R long open big hit 2 or 4R long open big hit 2 is won, that is, when the above-mentioned big hit β is won, “A · A · A character pattern (probable variation pattern) such as A "," BB, B "," CC, C "is selected.

Next, the big hit effect pattern in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a view schematically showing a jackpot effect pattern table in the ninth embodiment. The jackpot effect pattern table shows the correspondence between the jackpot type and the jackpot effect pattern. Basically, the jackpot effect pattern is determined based on the jackpot type. However, even if the jackpot type is the same, the jackpot effect pattern may differ depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot or a predetermined generation condition (for example, a villa condition). In this example, fierce battle bonuses A to B, phantom battle bonuses A to D, warrior bonuses A to C, and seven-star charges A to D are prepared as 13 types of big hit effect patterns. Here, in the figure, as one of the criteria for selection of the big hit effect pattern, the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the operating state of the special symbol game (high probability / low probability) and the normal symbol game operating state (open extension) (1) Low probability / non-open extension, (2) Low probability / open extension, and (3) High probability / open extension. In other words, the gaming state described in the figure is a gaming state when a big hit corresponding to each jackpot type occurs (a gaming state when the jackpot symbol corresponding to each jackpot type is stopped). In this example, "high probability / non-open extension" is not set as the gaming state.

  First, when a 15R long / short open big hit 1 is won in the first special symbol, “Phantom Fight Bonus A” is selected as the big hit effect pattern regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big win. In addition, when 15R long short opening big hit 2 is won, if the game state at the time of big hit is normal state, “strike bonus A” is selected as the big hit effect pattern, the game state at the time of big hit is definite change state or time saving If it is in the state, the "phantom bonus A" is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. When the 7R long short opening big hit is won, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal state, "strike bonus B" is selected as the big hit presentation pattern, the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a definite change state or time saving state In the case of the above, "phantom bonus B" is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. Here, when the gaming state is the normal state, the probabilistic promotion effect is executed with the fierce battle bonuses A and B selected when the 15R long / short open big hit 2 or 7R long / short open big hit is won. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probable change state or the short time state, the probable promotion effect is not executed with the phantom bonus A or B selected when the 15R long / short open big hit 2 or 7R long / short open big hit is won. That is, also in this example, if the game state is the normal state and the first special symbol is a big hit, the probability change promotion effect can be executed, but the game state is the probability change state. If the symbol is a big hit, the certainty promotion promotion effect is not executed. A specific example of this probable promotion promotion effect will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the case of winning the 16R long open jackpot 1 in the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state etc. at the time of the big hit, basically, as a big hit effect pattern "Moroshi bonus A" or "phantom bonus D" Is selected. At this time, as described above with reference to FIG. 82, if the jackpot symbol is the first odd symbol (such as “7, 7, 7”), “Musou Bonus A” is selected, and the jackpot symbol is the second symbol. If the symbol is an odd number (such as “1 · 1 · 1”), “Phantom Fight Bonus D” is selected. In other words, in the case of big hit with the first odd symbol, 16 rounds fixed effect is executed with the bonus bonus A, and when big hit with the second odd symbol, round promotion effect is executed with the fantasy bonus D . In this example, as can be seen from the selection rates (selection rates of the first odd symbol and the second odd symbol) shown in FIG. The rate at which A is selected is set higher. As a modified example, when the 16R long open big hit 1 is won in the normal state, the “Musou Bonus A” may be always selected, and the round promotion effect may not be executed. Rather than winning 1, the “phantom battle bonus D” may be less likely to be selected, and the probability of executing the tied round promotion effect may be reduced. On the other hand, if a camp is established under a predetermined condition (details will be described later) and the 16R long open big hit 1 is won within a limited period after the special game, “Seven Star Charge C” is selected as the big hit effect pattern. Be done. Further, when a special condition (spanning villa condition) regarding the big hit is established, “Musou Bonus B” or “Musou Bonus C” is selected as the big hit effect pattern. The contents of the consecutive conditions will be described later.

Further, in the case of winning the 16R long opening big hit 2 in the second special symbol, "seven star charge C" is selected as the big hit effect pattern regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit. In addition, when the 8R long opening big hit is won, “7 star charge B” is selected as the big hit effect pattern regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit. In addition, when the 4R long opening big hit 1 is won, basically, “Gant Fight Bonus B” is selected as the big hit effect pattern regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit. In addition, if you decide to hold 4R length open jackpot 1 within the limited period after the special game is established under predetermined conditions (details will be described later), "7 star charge A" is selected as the jackpot effect pattern Be done. In addition, when the 4R long open big hit 2 is won, “seven star charge A” is selected as the big hit effect pattern. In this way, each big hit belonging to big hit β (16R long open big hit 2, 8R long open big hit 4R long open big hit 2) is a big hit type in which only “seven star charge AC” is selected as the big hit production pattern.

  Subsequently, FIGS. 84 to 87 are schematic diagrams for explaining the contents of the jackpot effect pattern. In each figure, for each jackpot effect pattern, the correspondence between various effect contents and their generation timing is shown. Here, in the figure, the “open mode” represents the type of round game. That is, when a long open round game is set as the round game, “long open” is displayed, and when a short open round game is set as the round game, “short open” is displayed. Naturally, the “opening mode” in the drawing corresponds to the operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in FIG.

Further, in the figure, “prefetching possible” represents a period in which prefetching can be performed with respect to the currently held suspension ball information. In other words, within the prefetchable period, it means that the lottery of the on-hold consecutive villa effect and the execution of the effect can be performed. Therefore, in this example, the second on-hold in-line effect (on-hold in-line effect B) occurring during the special game is targeted as the on-off in-line effect. Whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive resort production is determined when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied in the prefetchable period. In this example, as described above, preferential digestion is adopted in which the action retaining ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested rather than the action retaining ball of the first special symbol, and the jackpot and identification according to the second special symbol Pending is the target of pending Uranso. And, in the on-hold consecutive villa, the gaming state when the preceding operation holding ball wins the big hit is in a probable change state (at the time of high probability / opening extension), that is, within the ST period after the special game (130 times) Occurs on the assumption that Therefore, when the game state is a probable change state (high probability / opening extension), the preceding operation holding ball has won a specific big hit (high profit big hit: 16R long open big hit 1 of the second special symbol) As a premise, a predetermined execution condition is established when there is one or more specific hold in the operation hold ball of the subsequent second special symbol. In this example, there is a case where a gaze effect for encouraging the establishment of the on-hold extended resort may occur even when all the subsequent operation holding balls are off-hold. However, in the present example, it is a display mode capable of determining whether the effect is a true effect or a Gasse effect if the effect result of the on-hold in-line consecutive effect is seen. In addition, the prefetching period is set in units of one round. Therefore, when it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the reserved renzo production in the round (one round) set as the pre-readable period, and it is decided to execute the reserved renzo production On the other hand, the on-hold consecutive villa production occurs in the round. In addition, even if there is a specific hold in the subsequent operation hold ball, if you do not win the lottery of the hold-in-resort directing in all the rounds for which the pre-readable period has been set (the hold in all rounds) In the case where the consecutive resort production has not been executed), the on-hold consecutive resort production (“7-star charge announcement” described later) is executed in the jackpot end demonstration. As a variation, if the lottery of the reserved renzo production is not won in all the rounds where the pre-readable period is set (if the renegade production in the hold is not executed in all rounds), the big hit It is good also as a structure which does not perform a pending | reserved-ream villa production also in an end demo (it does not perform a reserved-ream villa production during the big hit after all). It should be noted that in the jackpot end demonstration, the on-hold consecutive villa production is actually not executed even though a pre-readable period is set in at least one of the rounds. In the case where there is originally no prereadable period set for any round throughout all the rounds, there will be no pending in-games in the big hit end demo. As a modification, in the case of a jackpot in which the pre-readable period is not set throughout all the rounds, the on-premises continuous play effect may be executed in the jackpot end demonstration. In addition, as above-mentioned, since the object of reservation Uchi-Uranso production is a big hit and specific reservation of the 2nd special symbol, the pre-readable period is set only to the big hit presentation pattern of at least the 2nd special symbol. In addition, the prefetching period is set to a round after the specific round (third round). As described above, as described above, after a specific round has passed (at least after it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area 658).
Otherwise, it is uncertain whether the game state after the end of the special game will shift to a probable state (high probability state) or a short-time state (low probability state), and this is an indeterminate situation. This is to avoid the execution of the effect. In other words, depending on the game state (high probability state or low probability state) after the end of the special game, if the lottery result whether or not the subsequent operation holding ball currently existing in the special game will actually be a big hit fluctuates For this reason, by making the lottery of whether or not to execute the on-reserved renso production effect after the specific round, it is possible to notify the definitive notification of the on-reserved renso. Therefore, in this example, on the premise that the game ball has entered the specific area 658 in the specific round, that is, the transition to the definite change state is committed after the end of the special game, the on-hold in-line continuous play effect execution availability or not Is determined. Therefore, in addition to the fact that there is a specific suspension that is a big hit in the subsequent operation suspension ball in the present embodiment, the game state after the special game is determined to be a probability change state (high probability state) There is significance as an effect to inform That is, even if the pre-readable period is set in each round, if there is no entry into the specific area 658 in the specific round, the execution lottery for the on-hold on-line consecutive effect is not performed. A specific example of the on-hold consecutive resort production will be described later.

  Further, in the figure, “round number display” means that the current round number (round number information) is notified during the execution of the round game. In this example, the jackpot effect pattern that informs the player of the progress status of the special game by informing the current round number, and the progress status of the special game is concealed from the player without notifying the current round number. A jackpot effect pattern to be in the state is prepared. Further, in the figure, “V acquisition display” means notifying of occurrence of V winning (probable change transition) in a specific round. In this example, a jackpot effect pattern that informs the player of the probability change transition by notifying the occurrence of the V winning, and the jackpot that does not notify the occurrence of the V prize and makes the player concealed the presence or absence of the probability transition transition. A presentation pattern is prepared. In the jackpot effect pattern for notifying the V winning, the V winning can be notified in any one of a plurality of rounds indicated as “at the time of designation” in the drawing (the notification timing is the specification, lottery, etc.). Set as appropriate). Further, in the figure, “identification mark” is an identification display provided for a notification effect of an effect mode that is shifted to after a special game, a promotion effect during a special game, and an on-hold consecutive resort effect. In this example, fierce battle mission marks, phantom rush marks, seven-star charge marks, extra bonus marks, and the like are set as identification marks. Then, the specific content of each big hit production pattern is explained in full detail, referring to each figure.

FIG. 84 (A) shows the contents of the fierce battle bonus A. The hard fight bonus A is a jackpot effect that is executed when the first special symbol of 15R long open opening jackpot 2 is won in the normal state. The fierce battle bonus A includes an effect content (probability change promotion effect) that succeeds in the probability change promotion during the jackpot. This definite change promotion effect is set to the sixth round. Then, in the sixth round, it is suggested or notified that the probability change promotion has succeeded by changing the "hard fight mark" (displayed from the first to the fifth round) as the identification mark to the "phantom mark". A specific example of this probability change promotion effect will be described later. It should be noted that in the fierce battle bonus A, "round number display" and "V acquisition display" are not performed during the special game, and until the probability change promotion effect is performed in the sixth round, there is a probability change transition to the player Is concealed. Also, in the figure, “Gant Fighting Character Selection” is a vision fighting character appearing as a symbol variation effect in the fantasy fighting mode after the big hit, which serves as an opportunity for determining the effect format of the symbol variation effect. This is a period during which a production element) can be selected. As a result, the symbol variation effect after the end of the big hit is set to the effect display format corresponding to the selected phantom character. Therefore, the effect mode (for example, character A mode, character B mode, etc.) corresponding to the phantom battle character is developed as the detailed mode while the basic mode is the same fantasy battle rush mode. The phantom battle character selection period is set in the seventh to fifteenth rounds and the end demonstration. In this example, the section from the seventh round to the big hit end demo is set as the “takeover demo”. At this time, the seventh to fifteenth rounds are set as the rounds for opening the short, and by using the rounds for opening the short as a part of the phantom character selection period, the execution time of the ending demonstration is thus set. Saving. During the phantom character selection period, a favorite character can be selected from the plurality of characters displayed on the screen by the effect button 15. Further, in the hard fight bonus A, the pre-readable period is not set throughout all the rounds, and there is no possibility that the on-premises-on-the-fly effect occurs. This is because, as described above, the fierce battle bonus A, which is the big hit of the first special symbol, is not the target of the on-premises in-store effect.

  FIG. 84 (B) shows the content of the fierce battle bonus B. The fierce battle bonus B is a big hit effect that is executed when the 7R long and short open big hit of the first special symbol is won in the normal state. This fierce battle bonus B includes the content of the production (probability promotion promotion) that fails to be promoted during the jackpot. Similar to the above-mentioned hard battle bonus A, this odd change promotion effect is set to the sixth round. In the sixth round, “fierce fighting mark” (displayed from the first to fifth rounds) is not changed to “phantom fighting mark” as an identification mark, but “fierce fighting mark” is continuously displayed as it is. It is suggested or notified that the promotion failed. Also, in the fierce battle bonus B, as in the fierce battle bonus A described above, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are not performed during the special game, and the probable promotion effect is executed in the sixth round. Whether or not there is a probability change transition is hidden from the player. In addition, in the fierce battle bonus B, as in the fierce battle bonus A described above, the pre-readable period is not set through all the rounds, and the on-hold extended-zone effect does not occur.

  FIG. 85A shows the content of the phantom bonus A. The phantom battle bonus A is executed when the first special symbol 15R long short opening jackpot 1 is won regardless of the gaming state, or when the first special symbol 15R long short opening jackpot 2 is won in the definite change state or time saving state. It is a big hit production. Also in this phantom battle bonus A, the phantom battle character selection period is set in the seventh to fifteenth rounds and the end demonstration, as in the above-mentioned hard battle bonus A. That is, even in the fierce battle bonus A, the execution time of the end demonstration is saved by using the round at the time of short opening as a part of the phantom character selection period. In this example, the section from the seventh round to the jackpot end demo is set as “takeover demo”. Further, in the phantom bonus A, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are set in the first to sixth rounds, and it is possible to teach the progress of the game and whether or not there is a probability change transition. Yes. In addition, in vision battle bonus A, as with the above-mentioned hard fight bonus A and B, since it is scheduled as a big hit presentation with the first special symbol, the pre-readable period is not set through all rounds, and is pending There is no occurrence of a series of effects. In addition, as a modified example, a big hit (specific hold) of the first special symbol may be set as a target of the reserved resort. In that case, only the round at the time of full opening is set as the preread enable period, and the round at the short open is not set as the preread enable period. This is because there is no time allowance for executing the lottery processing of the on-hold consecutive villa effect and the effect display only in a short time when the short is opened.

  FIG. 85 (B) shows the content of the phantom bonus B. The phantom bonus B is a jackpot effect executed when the 4R long open jackpot 1 of the second special symbol is won. This phantom battle bonus B includes an effect content (round promotion effect) that fails in the round-up to acquire the latter 12 rounds during the jackpot. This round promotion effect is set in the fourth round. In this example, in the fourth round, the “phantom mark” (displayed from the first to the third round) is not changed to the “extra bonus mark” as the identification mark, but the “phantom mark” is continuously displayed as it is. Thus, it is suggested or notified that the round promotion has failed. A specific example of this round promotion effect will be described later.

FIG. 85 (C) shows the content of the phantom bonus C. The phantom battle bonus C is a jackpot effect that is executed when the first special symbol 7R long short opening jackpot is won in a definite change state or a short time state. In this phantom battle bonus C, unlike the above-mentioned strenuous battle bonus B, no definite change promotion effect is set in any round. In other words, even when the 7R long and short open big hit, when the transition to the fierce battle bonus B as a big hit effect, the positive change promotion effect is executed in the sixth round, the transition to the fantasy fight bonus C Sometimes, the probable promotion effect is not executed. That is, in the jackpot effect (phantom bonus B) that is scheduled to be a jackpot at the consecutive villas, there is little significance in providing a probability change promotion effect. In the fantasy battle bonus C, as in the fierce battle bonuses A and B and the fantasy battle bonus A described above, since it is scheduled as a big hit effect in the first special symbol, the prefetchable period is set through all rounds. There will be no rendezvous productions on hold. In addition, in this example, although the round number display is performed in each round, it is not limited to this, You may comprise so that the round number display may not be performed. Also, basically, when the short release round is interposed between the long release round and the long release round, it is desirable not to notify the number of rounds in each round.

  FIG. 85 (D) shows the contents of phantom battle bonus D. The phantom bonus D is a jackpot effect that is executed when the 16R long / short open big hit 1 of the second special symbol is won regardless of the gaming state. This phantom bonus D includes production content (round promotion production) that succeeds in the round-up to obtain the latter 12 rounds during the jackpot. In the phantom battle bonus D, the round promotion effect is set to the fourth to fifth rounds. Then, in the fourth to fifth rounds, the “phantom mark” (displayed from the first to third rounds) as the identification mark changes to the “extra bonus mark”, suggesting or notifying that the round promotion was successful. Is done. A specific example of this round promotion effect will be described later. In the figure, the “character reselection acceptance period” is a period for accepting reselection of a fantasy character in order to change the selected fantasy character. In addition, the “character reselection period” is a period during which reselection of the fantasy character is possible on the condition that reselection of the fantasy character is accepted within the character reselection acceptance period. Here, the phantom bonus D is a jackpot effect that is executed when the second special symbol is a jackpot, and is basically a jackpot effect at the time of consecutive villas, not at the time of first hit. For this reason, in the normal case, the phantom character is supposed to be selected when it is first hit (fierce battle bonus A or phantom bonus A), so here it is expressed as “reselection” instead of “selection”. Has been. At this time, the character reselection acceptance period is set to the seventh to eleventh rounds, and the phantom character selection period is set to the twelfth to sixteenth rounds. On the other hand, the pre-readable period is set up to the seventh to sixteenth rounds. That is, the prereadable period overlaps with the character reselection acceptance period and the illusion character selection period. However, if re-selection of the phantom fight character is accepted during the character re-selection acceptance period, that is, if the phantom fight character is re-selected, even if the look-ahead process (reservation in the rendezvous within the reservation) Even if the lottery process) is executed, the on-hold consecutive villa production is not executed regardless of whether the production lottery is successful or not. That is, within the phantom character reselection period (provided that reselection has been accepted), the on-hold consecutive villa production is not executed. In this way, by avoiding the overlap of the prefetchable period and the fantasy character selection period, it is possible to avoid the competition (simultaneous execution) between the rendezvous renso production and the fantasy character selection production, and the production effects of both are mutually Preventing dilution. On the other hand, if it is within the character reselection acceptance period, the on-reserved Renso production can be executed on the condition that the lottery process for the on-hold Renso production is won. This character reselection reception is simply whether or not to reselect the phantom fighting character, and the effect on the production is originally low. There is a low possibility that the stage effect will be diluted. In addition, as a modification, it may be configured such that the lottery process for the on-hold consecutive villa production is not performed during the phantom character selection period. Moreover, even if it is within a fantasy character reselection period, if it is after a phantom character is reselected, it may be possible to execute the on-hold Renren directed effect. In the phantom bonus D, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are set in the 1st to 16th rounds (rounds when fully opened), and the progress of the game and whether or not there is a probability change transition is set. It can be taught.

FIG. 86A shows the contents of the Warrior Bonus A. The Warrior Bonus A is a big hit effect that is executed when the 16R long / short open big hit 1 of the second special symbol is won in a situation where a predetermined consecutive resort condition (detailed later) is not established. In the Warrior Bonus A, the character reselection acceptance period is set to the seventh to eleventh rounds, and the phantom character reselection period is set to the twelfth to sixteenth rounds, similarly to the phantom bonus D. On the other hand, the pre-readable period is set up to the fourth to sixteenth rounds unlike the above-mentioned phantom battle bonus D. In other words, unlike the above-mentioned phantom bonus D, the Warrior Bonus A does not have a round promotion effect, so there is no risk of conflict between the round promotion effect and the in-hold Rensou effect, and the pre-readable period is round promotion effect. This is because there is no need to provide it later. In addition, part of the pre-readable period overlaps with the illusion character reselection acceptance period and the illusion character reselection period. As with the above-mentioned fantasy battle bonus D, during the phantom character reselection period, even if a pre-read process (lottery process for the on-hold Renso production) is executed, it will be held regardless of whether the production lottery is successful or not. Uchirensou directing is not executed. Also, in Musou Bonus A, “round number display” and “V acquisition display” are set in the 1st to 16th rounds (rounds when fully open), and the progress of the game and the presence or absence of probability change are taught. It is supposed to be able to

  FIG. 86 (B) shows the content of the matchless bonus B. The matchless bonus B is a jackpot effect that is executed when the first continuous condition is established in the fantasy battle rush mode. The establishment of the “first consecutive resort condition” means that the first 16R long open big hit after continuing the consecutive resort state for the first specified number of times (three times in this example) during a game with the same phantom character. It is when 1 is won (the first matchless bonus is won). That is, it occurs as the first matchless bonus after hitting the same phantom battle character three times. As described above, "Renso" means that, when a predetermined big hit occurs in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state continues again as the gaming state after the end of the special game. In this example, as described above, in addition to being in the specific gaming state, it is a condition to stay in the fantasy battle mode as the effect mode. Therefore, when demoted rush mode is demoted to another rendering mode (normal mode), the condition counter (first consecutive condition counter) is reset. In addition, even when the illusion fighting character is changed, the condition counter (the first consecutive condition counter) is reset. During the execution of the matchless bonus B, a special movie is reproduced as a first special effect. The Warrior Bonus B is basically the same effect setting as the Warrior Bonus A, except that the first special effect (special movie) is displayed. In the same round as the round, a character reselection acceptance period, a illusion character reselection period, a prereadable period, and the like are set.

FIG. 86C shows the contents of the matchless bonus C. The Warrior Bonus C is a jackpot effect that is executed when the second consecutive resort condition is satisfied in the phantom rush mode. Here, the establishment of the “second consecutive resort condition” means that after the number of consecutive resorts in the fantasy battle rush mode continues for the second specified number of times (19 in this example), the number of consecutive resorts starts after the 20th consecutive resort. It is when the 16R long opening jackpot is won 1 (the first matchless bonus is won). In other words, it occurs as the first incompetence bonus after having been linked 19 times in fantasy battle rush mode. While the matchless bonus C is being executed, the ending movie is played back as a second special effect. If the first consecutive resort condition and the second consecutive resort condition are satisfied at the same time, priority is given to the establishment of the second extended resort condition, and the rarity of the warrior bonus C (second special effect) As an ending movie). In that case, the first consecutive conditions are carried over until the next occurrence of the insane bonus. In other words, the establishment of the first extended villa condition is temporarily reserved by the establishment of the second extended villa condition. However, if a pairless bonus occurs at the next big hit, the first extended villa condition is re-established. As a result, it is treated as established, and the Musou Bonus B (special movie as the first special effect) is executed. The Warrior Bonus C is basically the same setting as the Warrior Bonus A, except that the second special effect (ending movie) is displayed. In the same round as the round, a character reselection acceptance period, a fantasy character reselection period, a prefetchable period, etc. are set. As a modification, in the above-mentioned Musou Bonus B and C, the character reselection acceptance period is not set or the reselection acceptance period is set. In order to emphasize the special movie and the ending movie, the display mode may be changed. In Musou Bonus B and C, the pre-readable period is not set, or even if the pre-readable period is set, the character reselection acceptance period and the phantom character reselection period are set in the seventh to the 16th rounds. In this case, the on-hold consecutive villa production may not be executed. In addition, if the 16R long open big hit 1 is won within the limited period, even if the above-mentioned extended resort conditions are satisfied, priority is given to the execution of “Seven Star Charge C” as the big hit effect pattern, and “Musou Bonus B” And, the execution of the "Income Bonus C" may be postponed.

  FIGS. 87 (A) to 87 (C) show the contents of seven star charges A to C. FIG. The 7 star charge A wins the 4R long open jackpot 2 and the 7 star charge B wins the 8R long open jackpot, the 7 star charge C runs the big hit with the 16 R long open jackpot 2 is there. That is, when the big hit β is won as the big hit type, the seven-star charge A to C is selected as the big hit effect. Even if it is a jackpot type other than the above, during the limited period in the second and subsequent phantom rush modes (Lenso stage), if you win the 4R long open jackpot 1 with the second special symbol, 7-star charge A Is selected, and if the second special symbol 16R long open big hit 1 is won, the 7-star charge C is selected. In other words, in this example, when a big hit is made with the second special symbol in the limited period, the seven-star charge A to C is always selected as the big hit effect pattern. In that case, a 7-star charge introduction effect is executed in the symbol variation related to the jackpot, and an HIT number announcement effect (described later) is obtained in the jackpot start demonstration in the jackpot effect (this seven-star charge AD). It is executed, and the total acquired HIT number addition presentation (described later) is executed in the round game and the big hit end demonstration. Therefore, across the time of occurrence of the big hit, it is generated as a series of effects in which the seven-star charge introduction effect, the acquired HIT number announcement effect, and the total HIT number addition effect are continuously connected (collectively referred to as “seven-star charge effect”). To do. A specific example of this seven star charge effect will be described later. Further, in the seven-star charge A to C, the pre-readable period is not set through all the rounds, and the on-hold consecutive villa production does not occur. This is because the 7-star charge effect is executed during the special game in the 7-star charge A to D. Therefore, it avoids the conflict (simultaneous execution) between the on-hold Renso effect and the 7-star charge effect, and both effects Because it prevents them from becoming thin. In the case of the seven star charges A to C, the "round number display" and the "V acquisition display" are not performed during the special game.

FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of the start demonstration effect. In FIG. 88, the relationship between the type of start demonstration effect (effect at the time of big hit start) for the jackpot effect pattern determined above and the effect scale is defined. In this example, the type of start demonstration effect is set for each jackpot effect pattern. When the big hit effect pattern is fierce battle bonuses A and B, “fierce battle bonus (common)” is selected as the type of start demonstration effect. When the big hit effect pattern is the phantom battle bonus A to D, “phantom battle bonus (common)” is selected as the type of the start demonstration effect. If the jackpot effect pattern is the Warrior Bonus A, “Musou Bonus Start (Normal)” is selected as the type of start demo effect, and if the jackpot effect pattern is the Warrior Bonus B, the type of start demo effect is “Musou”. If “bonus start (SP: special movie)” is selected and the jackpot effect pattern is the warrior bonus C, “warrior bonus start (ED: ending movie)” is selected as the type of start demo effect. Further, if the big hit effect pattern is a seven-star charge A, “starting HIT number increase effect (1 stage)” is selected as the type of the start demonstration effect, and if the big hit effect pattern is a seven-star charge B, the type of the start demonstration effect “Acquired HIT number increase effect (2 steps)” is selected, and if the big hit effect pattern is 7-star charge C, “Acquired HIT number increase effect (3 steps)” is selected as the type of start demonstration effect. Here, in this example, the time values of the jackpot start demo and the jackpot end demo described later are as follows. First of all, the execution time of the big hit start demo (the big hit start demo time) does not necessarily match the execution time of the start demo production (the start demo production time), and the execution time of the big hit end demo (the big hit end demo time) ends. It does not necessarily coincide with the execution time of the demonstration effect (end demonstration effect time). That is, the start demonstration effect time and the end demonstration effect time are one period (effect time) in the execution process of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration. The jackpot start demo time and jackpot end demo time are basically set in advance according to the type of jackpot. Moreover, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot start demonstration time may be different and the jackpot end demonstration time may be different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. In addition, the above demo time value basically has the tendency to become the shortest value when winning a big hit in the probability variation state, the tendency to become the longest value when winning a big hit in the normal state, and the big hit in the short time state. When winning, it tends to be an intermediate value.

  Subsequently, FIG. 89 is a schematic view showing an end demonstration effect table. In this example, the type of the end demonstration effect is determined with reference to the end demonstration effect table shown in FIG. In this example, the types of end demonstration productions are “handover demonstration”, “fighting rush entry”, “phantom rush entry A”, “phantom fight entry B”, “seven star end A”, “seven star end B”, “seven star announcement” "A" and "Seven Star Announcement B" are set. In FIG. 89, “Nanasei Announcement A” and “Nanasei Announcement B” are not set as the types of end demonstration production (see FIG. 90), but “Nanasei Announcement A” is “Phantom Fighting A”. In the situation where the reserved resorts are established, “Nanasei Announcement B” is executed in the situation where the “seven stars end A” is established and the reserved resorts are established. Therefore, “Seven Star Announcement A” and “Seven Stars Notification B” indicate that if a rendezvous in a rendezvous within a round occurs as a real rendition during the round in a probabilistic state, Although it did not occur as an event, it is an end demonstration effect that is actually executed when the on-hold range resort is established. Therefore, the 7-star announcements A and B themselves (the 7-star charge announcement effect described later) function as a reserved-in-rensou effect that announces the establishment of the in-hold-inn resort.

  The type of the end demonstration effect is basically determined on the basis of the jackpot type, the jackpot effect pattern, the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, etc. (However, with some exceptions shown below). Therefore, with the exception of the partial exception, the type of the end demonstration effect can be determined at the start of the jackpot effect regardless of the progress in the special game (presence or absence of the V prize). On the other hand, when the 7R long short opening jackpot is won in the first special symbol and the stride bonus B is selected as the jackpot effect pattern, even if the gaming state at the time of the jackpot is the same, the V winning in the special game Depending on the presence or absence, the content of the end demonstration effect may be different. Specifically, when 7R long short open jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability / non-open extension), a fierce battle bonus B is executed as the jackpot effect pattern, and if it is V prized during the special game, the end demo “Phantom rush entry B” is selected as the type of production, and “Phantom rush entry A” is selected as the type of end demonstration production if no V prize is awarded during the special game. That is, in this case, the type of the end demonstration effect is not determined unless it is after the end of the specific round (the presence or absence of the V prize is not determined). Therefore, in this example, 1) determine the type of demonstration effect to end at the timing after a specific round, or 2) in principle determine the type of demonstration effect to end at the timing of the big hit start, but With regard to exceptions, the type of end demonstration effect is determined at a timing after a specific round. However, as a modified example, if the big hit from the normal state belongs to the conditional specific big hit and there is no entry to the specific area 658 (unless the V prize is won), the type of the end demonstration production is a fierce battle entry. It is also good. In that case, what is normally the jackpot end demo time is "35 seconds" becomes "20 seconds".

Next, FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the end demonstration effect. In FIG. 90, the relationship between the type of the end demonstration effect selected in the above-mentioned end demonstration effect table, the contents of the effect, and the effect scale is defined. In this example, regardless of the type of the end demonstration effect, the mode rush effect of notifying the type of the effect mode (or effect stage) to be shifted after the end of the special game is executed. In the mode entry production, a fictitious mission entry production reporting the transition to the fictitious mission, a fantasy battle rush entry production reporting the transition to the fantasy battle rush mode, and a transition to the continuous stage in the fantasy battle mode There is a seven-star charge announcement production. Each mode entry effect is produced in such a manner that logos, characters, and identification marks corresponding to the type of the effect mode (or effect stage) are displayed on the screen. In addition, depending on the type of end demonstration effect, character selection effect for selecting an ally character (a stride character, a phantom battle character) in the above-mentioned effect mode may be executed. As described above, the character selection effect includes fierce character selection effect and illusion character selection effect. The character selection effect may be completed only in the execution period of the end demonstration or may be completed throughout the execution period from the round game to the end demonstration. In other words, part of the character selection effect is in the round game (when the first special symbol is a big hit, the short opening round, the second special symbol when it is a long opening round) May also be executed. Further, as described above, since "Seven Star Announcement A" and "Seven Star Announcement B" are executed triggered by the establishment of the pending Urannso, these effects function as a type of the pending Urann effects. Here, one of “6 seconds”, “20 seconds”, and “30 seconds” is set as the execution time (big hit end demonstration time) of the big hit end demonstration in this example. And even if the same big hit type is won, the length of the big hit end demonstration time may change according to the gaming state at the time of the big hit. Basically, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is low probability state, "35 seconds" as the big hit end demonstration time, if the gaming state at the time of the big hit is high probability state, as the big hit end demonstration time "6 Second "is set. However, when a predetermined big hit (7R long short open big hit of the first special symbol) is won in a low probability state, "20 seconds" may be set as the big hit end demonstration time. In addition, although the time scale "1 second" as omission production | presentation is set to each completion | finish demonstration effects, it is abbreviate | omitting in the figure.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “takeover demonstration”, the fantasy battle rush entry effect is executed for 6 seconds after the fantasy battle character selection effect is executed for 29 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of the takeover demonstration is 35 seconds. The “handover demonstration” starts from the seventh round during the special game, and is executed across the round game and the jackpot end demo. That is, in the seventh to fifteenth rounds (round at the time of short opening) in the above-mentioned intense battle bonus A or illusion battle bonus A, the illusionary character selection presentation is to be executed, but this round section is also taken over Is configured as part of

  If the type of the end demonstration effect is "strike", after the stride character selection effect is performed for 14 seconds, the stride mission effect is performed for 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Fighting rush” is 20 seconds. As described above, the illusion character selection effect may be performed not only during the big hit end demonstration but also during the round, but the fierce character selection effect is executed only during the big hit end demonstration. In addition, the production measure of intense fighting character selection production is set shorter than the production measure of illusion character selection production.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Phantom Entry A”, the phantom rush entry effect is executed for 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (representational measure) of "phantom entry A" is 6 seconds. As described above, in the phantom rush entry A, the phantom character selection effect is not set, and the effect scale is set in a short time. Note that even if no fantasy character selection effect is set for the phantom rush entry A, if some of the big hits (16R long open big hit 1) are won, before the big hit end demo is executed In the jackpot effect (Phantom Bonus D and Musou Bonus A to C), a phantom character selection effect is set using that round (during the long open round), Opportunities are secured.

When the type of the end demonstration effect is “phantom entry B”, after the illusion character selection effect is executed for 29 seconds, the illusion rush entry effect is executed for 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Phantom Strike B” is 35 seconds.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “seven star end A”, the total acquired hit number display is executed for 3 seconds, and then the fantasy battle rush entry effect is executed for 3 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (rendering scale) of “seven star end A” is six seconds. Thus, at the end of the seven stars, the phantom character selection effect is not set, and the effect scale is set in a short time.

  If the type of the end demonstration effect is “seven star end B”, the total acquired hit number display is executed for 3 seconds, and then the fantasy character selection effect is executed for 29 seconds, and the fantasy battle rush rush effect Is performed for 3 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (production scale) of “Seven Star End B” is 35 seconds.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 89, when the big hit α (16R long open big hit 1, 4R long open big hit 1) is won, and the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state) , “Phantom Entry A” is selected, and when it is in a low probability state (normal state or short time state), “Phantom Entry B” is selected. As described above, in the phantom rush entry A, the phantom character selection effect is not set, and compared with the phantom rush entry B, the execution time (effect scale) is set shorter. Similarly, when the big hit β (16R long open big hit 2, 8R long open big hit, 4R long open big hit 2) is won and the gaming state at the time of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state), When “Seven Star End A” is selected and the low probability state (normal state or short time state) is selected, “Seven Star End B” is selected. As described above, the phantom character selection effect is not set at the seven-star end A, and its execution time (effect scale) is set shorter than that at the seven-star end B. In this example, if you win a jackpot in such a probable state, after the round game, you will end the jackpot end demo early and immediately start the symbol variation to keep the promiscuous state maintained. The state can be digested smoothly and the operating efficiency of the gaming machine can be improved.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “Seven Star Notification A”, the Seven Star Charge Notification Effect is executed for 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time (rendering scale) of the “Seven Star Announcement A” is six seconds.

  When the type of the end demonstration effect is “seven star notice B”, after the total acquired HIT number display is executed for three seconds, the seven star charge announcement effect is executed for three seconds. Therefore, the execution time (rendering scale) of the “Nana star announcement B” is 6 seconds.

  Here, “Seven Stars Notification A” and “Seven Stars Notification B” are used when the game state at the time of the big hit is a probable change state (high probability / open extension), triggered by the establishment of a pending reservation in the special game. It will be replaced as an alternate rendition of the selected "Ghost in A" and "Seven Star A". For this reason as well, in this example, as described above, it is possible to execute the reserved game in the reserved game during the special game only when the big win is won in the probability change state (high probability / open extension). I understand. Therefore, even if the “pre-readable period” is set in each of the jackpot presentation patterns described above, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is not a probable change state (high probability / open extension), the look-ahead process (reserved in-residence stage production) The lottery process) is not executed, or even if it is executed, the on-hold consecutive resort production is not displayed.

  Subsequently, the effect mode in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a transition diagram of the effect mode in the ninth embodiment. In this example, 1) a normal mode, 2) a fierce mission mode, and 3) a fantasy battle rush mode are set as three types of effect modes. The contents of each effect mode will be described later.

First, when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / non-opening extension), the “normal mode” is set as the effect mode. That is, the normal mode is an effect mode that suggests or informs that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability / non-opening extension). Although illustration is omitted, while staying in the normal mode, a plurality of effect stages having different effect contents are prepared, and it is possible to move back and forth between the effect stages triggered by a predetermined number of times of digestion or stage selection lottery.

  When a big hit occurs when the effect mode is the normal mode, the effect mode after the end of the special game may differ depending on the type of the big hit. Specifically, in the normal mode, when winning a 7R long short open jackpot with the first special symbol, if V winning does not occur in the special game (if there is no definite transition), the effect mode after the special game As the "strike battle mission mode" is set, if a V prize occurs (if a definite transition is made), the "phantom rush mode" is set as the effect mode after the special game. That is, in the case of the 7R long short opening big hit, if the game state immediately after the special game is in the time reduction state, it shifts to the "strike battle mission mode", and if it is the positive change state, it shifts to the "phantom rush mode" . In addition, in the normal mode, if you win the first special symbol 15R long short opening big hit 1 or 15R long short opening big hit 2, regardless of the presence or absence of V winning in the special game (presence or absence transition transition), after the special game “Phantom Rush Mode” is set as the production mode. As described above, when the first special symbol in the normal mode hits the jackpot, the production mode after the special game is "strike mission mode" and "phantom rush mode" depending on the jackpot type and presence or absence of V prize establishment. The transition is controlled to one of the following.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is the "normal mode", if the second special symbol makes a big hit, regardless of the type of the big hit regardless of the presence or absence of V winning in the special game (presence or absence of transition of probability variation) Instead, the "phantom rush mode" is set as the effect mode after the special game.

  Next, the “fierce fighting mission mode” is an effect mode that suggests or notifies that the gaming state is a short time state (low probability state / open extended state). When the production mode is "hard fight mission mode", if it becomes a big hit in the lottery process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, regardless of the big hit classification, V winning establishment in the special game is established Regardless of the presence / absence (presence / absence of probability change transition), the “phantom rush mode” is set as the effect mode after the special game. In this example, based on the occurrence of a big hit, the transition from the fierce mission mode to the normal mode or the retransition from the fierce mission mode to the fierce mission mode is not set immediately after the special game. In the fierce battle mission mode, when the next big hit does not occur and the number of times the special symbol changes more than 100 times, that is, when the time saving state (low probability state / open extension state) ends, the normal mode is set. Transition.

Subsequently, the “phantom rush mode” is a mode that indicates or notifies that the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / open extension) or a short time state (low probability / open extension). While staying in the “phantom rush mode”, a battle-based effect (details will be described later) in which an ally character and an enemy character battle with each other may be executed as a reach effect during the symbol change. Whether the jackpot type is the first special symbol or the second special symbol when the effect mode is "phantom rush mode", whether or not the jackpot type is the presence or absence of V winning in the special game ( Regardless of whether or not there is a definite change transition, the "phantom rush mode" is set again as the effect mode after the special game. Here, when transitioning from the fantasy battle rush mode to the fantasy battle rush mode again, that is, in the case of the second or later transition to the fantasy battle rush mode, four symbol variations immediately after the end of the special game are performed. Within the extended period (referred to as “limited period”), the user stays at the “renso” stage set in the phantom rush mode. That is, the "limited period" in this example means the first four rotations in the second or subsequent fantasy battle rush mode. When staying at “Renso Stage”, the production contents are basically the same as when staying in “Phantom Rush Mode”. However, during the special game based on the previous big hit, the pending Uchirenso effect (the truth production) is executed, and within the limited period immediately after the end of the special game, the subsequent big hit based on the pending Uchisenso (second special When the symbol big hit) occurs, a special background is displayed on the screen during the period of staying at the Renso stage (the period from the end of the special game to the big hit fluctuation). In this example, a rainbow-colored band image is displayed at the left and right ends of the screen as the special background (see FIG. 96). In this rainbow image, for example, a message of "in preparation for seven star charge" is displayed, and it is suggested to the player that an immediate hit effect (seven star charge effect) occurs within four rotations which is a limited period. Also good. In addition, as a seven star charge production outside the limited period, there is also a production mode other than the above-mentioned immediate hit production (for example, a seven star charge appears in a resurrection production after a battle defeat, a relatively long production scale). Here, as described above, the pending inner row effect is executed when the lottery is won within the pre-readable period set in each round during the special game and during the above round There is a case where it is executed during the big hit end demonstration without. Therefore, depending on the situation of the operation holding ball at least at the time of big hit start or big hit end, the possibility of being executed during the special game being played is changed, and within the limited period immediately after the end of the special game At least a part of the symbol variation effect may differ in terms of whether or not the above-mentioned special background (band image) is displayed in (the continuous stage).

  In “Renso Stage”, when the next big hit does not occur and the number of changes in the special symbol exceeds 4 times, that is, when the limited period is over, the “Renso Stage” is exited. It will return to the "Gantastic rush mode" of the time. In “Phantom Rush Mode”, when the next big hit does not occur and the number of changes in the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number (time-short state: 100 times, probability variation state: 120 times), that is, the time-short state or probability variation state is When finished, it shifts to the "normal mode". In addition, the transition from "Gant Fight Rush Mode" to "Fighter Mission Mode" is not set. As a modified example, when a big hit is made in the “phantom fighting rush mode”, if there is no entry into the specific area 658 in a specific round, the configuration may be shifted to the “fierce fighting mission mode”.

Subsequently, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a view schematically showing a variation pattern table of the special symbol in the ninth embodiment. In this example, 1) a normal variation pattern table, 2) a shortened variation pattern table, and 3) a special variation pattern table are prepared as special pattern variation pattern tables. The normal variation pattern table is a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability / non-open extension). The shortened variation pattern table is a variation pattern table that is selected when the gaming state is a short-time state (low probability / open extension) or a probable change state (high probability / open extension) (except for a limited period described later). . The special variation pattern table indicates that the game state is a short-time state or a certain variation state and the limited number of times (4 times the number of symbol variations corresponding to the maximum number of actuated balls of the second special symbol (four)) immediately after the special game is over It is a fluctuation pattern table in which selection is permitted only for a period of time over the fluctuation display of). In addition, the limited period in this example is set in the period corresponding to the above-mentioned consecutive stage. That is, on the main control board 100 side, consistency with the production mode managed on the production control board 200 side is maintained by the transition of the variation pattern selection state, and thus, the limited period and the extended villa stage stay period are maintained. Correspondence is taken. Further, in this example, the game state after the special game is different depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area 658 in the specific round in the special game, so that the game state is selected according to the game state. The variation pattern table may also be different. Here, each variation pattern table can be different depending on the result of the lottery (big hit / miss) and the big hit type. Each variation pattern table is different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that even if the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired, different variation patterns can be selected. It is configured. At this time, as shown in the figure, the variation pattern number is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but an effect control command (change start from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200). Command) includes information that can specify whether the variation pattern is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In each figure, “selectivity” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining a variation pattern according to a special symbol variation pattern random value Is set, and the variation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the special symbol variation pattern random value belongs to.

  FIG. 92A shows a variation pattern table for the big hit. In the figure, the upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a shortened variation pattern table, and the lower (A3) is a special variation pattern table. In the figure, all variation patterns are listed so that common points and differences with other variation pattern tables can be clearly understood.

  As shown in (A1) in the figure, in the normal variation pattern table (for big hit), if the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PX4 (normal reach) or the variation pattern PX5 regardless of which big hit type. (Super reach 1) is selected. Also, when the big special hit is the second special symbol, if the big hit type is the big hit α, the fluctuation pattern PX4 (normal reach) or the fluctuation pattern PX5 (super reach 1) is selected, and the big hit type is the big hit β. For example, the fluctuation pattern PX4 (normal reach) or the fluctuation pattern PX6 (super reach 2) is selected. In this normal fluctuation pattern table (for the big hit), the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach mode is not selected, and when it becomes the big hit in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern of the reach mode is always selected.

  As shown in (A2) in the figure, in the shortened fluctuation pattern table (for big hits), if the big hit is made in the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach 3) is selected for any type of big hit. Be done. Also, when the big special hit is the second special symbol, if the big hit type is big hit α, the fluctuation pattern PX7 (super reach 3) is selected, and if the big hit type is big hit β, the fluctuation pattern PX8 (super Reach 4) is selected. In this shortened variation pattern table (for big hits), the variation pattern of the non-reach mode and the normal reach mode is not selected. It is selected.

  As shown in the figure (A3), in the special variation pattern table (for big hit), the variation pattern PX7 (Super reach 3) is selected regardless of which big hit type when it becomes the big hit with the first special symbol. Is done. Also, when the big special hit is the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PX1 (super shortening fluctuation) is selected for any type of big hit. In this special variation pattern table (for big hit), if it becomes a big hit with the first special symbol within the limited period, while the variation pattern of the super reach aspect is selected, it became big hit with the second special symbol In this case, the variation pattern of the ultrashort variation is selected regardless of the jackpot type.

  Next, FIG. 92B shows a variation pattern table for deviation. In the figure, (B1) in the upper row is a normal variation pattern table, (B2) in the middle row is a shortened variation pattern table, and (B3) in the lower row is a special variation pattern table. In the figure, all variation patterns are listed so that common points and differences with other variation pattern tables can be clearly understood.

  As shown in (B1) in the figure, in the normal variation pattern table (for removal), when the first special symbol is shifted, variation pattern PH2 (shortening variation), variation pattern PH3 (normal variation), variation pattern PH4 Either (normal reach) or fluctuation pattern PH5 (super reach 1) is selected. If the second special symbol is shifted, any one of the fluctuation pattern PH2 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PH3 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PH4 (normal reach), and the fluctuation pattern PH6 (super reach 2) is selected. Ru.

As shown in (B2) in the figure, in the shortened variation pattern table (for loss), the variation pattern PH3 (normal variation) is selected when there is a displacement in the first special symbol. Also, when the second special symbol is shifted, fluctuation pattern PH1 (very shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PH2 (shorting fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PH3 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PH4 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PH7 (super One of reach 3) and fluctuation pattern PH8 (super reach 4) is selected.

  As shown in (B3) in the figure, in the special variation pattern table (for loss), the variation pattern PH3 (normal variation) is selected when there is a shift in the first special symbol. In the case of a shift in the second special symbol, a variation pattern PH1 (very short variation) or a variation pattern PH2 (short variation) is selected.

  In addition, you may be comprised so that a different fluctuation pattern table may be selected according to the action | operation pending ball | bowl number (0-4) of a special symbol, when the result of a no-goods lottery becomes a loss. That is, by using a variation pattern table according to the number of reserved balls for special symbols, the proportion of relatively short variation times is increased as the number of activated balls is increased, and the number of reserved operations is small. It is possible to increase the rate at which relatively long fluctuation times are selected. In addition, said fluctuation | variation pattern table (a normal fluctuation | variation pattern table, a shortening fluctuation | variation pattern table, a special fluctuation | variation pattern table) is a table when there are 0-4 operation reservation balls.

  Next, the variation effect pattern in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram schematically showing a variation effect pattern table in the ninth embodiment. In this example, multiple types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern are stored, and a special pattern variation pattern (variation time) can be selected from these multiple types of variation effect pattern tables. The variable effect pattern table is selected. Also, in each variation effect pattern table, one or more variation effect patterns are associated with each variation pattern of the special symbol. A random value (number of determination values) is assigned to the variation pattern that is different from the big hit variation pattern so that one of a plurality of types of variation effect patterns can be selected. As described above, the variation effect pattern defines a variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of variation to the end of variation of the decorative symbol. The timing etc. which generate a preliminary announcement production etc. in each step are also prescribed as a time schedule. Moreover, about this variation effect pattern, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect mode (or effect stage) during stay is different, Variation presentation patterns having different presentation contents can be selected. That is, the variation effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode (or effect stage) during the stay. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the variation effect pattern table for long shortening variation and super reach is shown, and the variation effect pattern table for other types is omitted. However, as shown in FIG. 93, in this example, multiple types of variation effect pattern tables are represented as a single variation effect pattern table. In each drawing, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but in actuality, a determination value (range of random values) for determining a changing effect pattern according to a changing effect pattern random value. Is set, and the variation pattern is determined based on which determination value the variation effect pattern random value belongs to.

  Specifically, the fluctuation presentation pattern PXR11 in the fantasy rush mode is associated with the jackpot fluctuation pattern PX1 (very short fluctuation). As described above, the variation pattern PX1 is a variation pattern that is allowed to be selected only within the limited period, and the variation effect pattern PXR11 corresponding to the variation pattern PX1 is selected only when staying at the extended resort stage that is the limited period. Be done. When the variation effect pattern PXR11 is selected, an immediate effect (seven star charge introduction effect) is executed as the variation effect. The instant hit effect in this example is an effect in which the seven star charge mark is displayed immediately after the start of symbol fluctuation and becomes a big hit.

  Moreover, the fluctuation effect patterns PX51 to 53 in the normal mode are associated with the big hit fluctuation pattern PX5 (super reach 1). When the change effect patterns PXT51 to 53 are selected, a story-type reach effect (a big hit reach effect in which a story associated with the characters A to C is developed) is executed as the change effect.

  Further, fluctuation presentation patterns PXT 61 to 63 in the normal mode are associated with the jackpot fluctuation pattern PX6 (super reach 2). When the variation presentation patterns PXT 61 to 63 are selected, the story-based reach presentation described above is performed as the variation presentation, and then a seven star charge introduction presentation (a presentation where a seven star charge mark appears) is performed.

  Also, with the fluctuation pattern PX7 (Super Reach 3) of the big hit, a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are associated with each of the effect modes. That is, the selected variation effect pattern is different depending on the effect mode during the stay. Specifically, when the production mode is the fierce battle mission mode, the variation production patterns PXM71 to 73 are associated with each other. When the change effect patterns PXM 71 to 73 are selected, a mission success effect (success in missions A to C) is executed as the change effect. Here, the mission effect is an effect that presents to the player a command having the content that the effect should exhibit a specific aspect as a condition for the result of the lottery determination to be a big hit. In the fierce battle mission effect in this example, as the command, if the fierce fighting character selected by the player can defeat the enemy character, the mission success (big hit) will occur, and if the enemy character can not be defeated, the mission will fail (drop). is there. On the other hand, when the production mode is the phantom rush mode, the variation production patterns PXR71 to 73 are associated with each other. When the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 are selected, a battle victory effect (winning the enemy characters A to C) is executed as the variation effect. In the illusion rush production in the present example, if the illusion character selected by the player can defeat the enemy character as a battle-based effect (battle reach effect), the battle wins (big hit), and if the enemy character can not be defeated, the battle This is a defeat.

  The big hit variation pattern PX8 (super reach 4) is associated with a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for each effect mode. That is, the selected variation effect pattern is different depending on the effect mode during the stay. Specifically, when the production mode is the fierce battle mission mode, the variation production patterns PXM81 to 83 are associated with each other. When the variation presentation pattern PXM 81 to 83 is selected, as the variation presentation, a mission failure presentation (a failure in missions A to C) is executed, and then a seven star charge introduction presentation (a presentation where a seven star charge mark appears) is executed. Ru. On the other hand, when the production mode is the phantom rush mode, the variation production patterns PXR81 to 83 are associated with each other. When the variation production pattern PXR 81 to 83 is selected, the battle defeat production (defeated to the enemy characters A to C) is executed as the fluctuation production, and then the seven star charge introduction production (production where the seven star charge mark appears) is executed. Be done.

  Next, the variation pattern PH1 (PHR11) in the fierce battle mission mode or the phantom rush mode is associated with the variation pattern PH1 (super shortened variation). When the variation effect patterns PHM11 and PHR11 are selected, a non-reach off effect (super shortened variation effect) is executed as the variation effect.

  The fluctuation effect pattern PHT51 to 53 in the normal mode is associated with the deviation fluctuation pattern PH5 (super reach 1). When the variation presentation patterns PHT 51 to 53 are selected, a story-based reach presentation (outgoing reach presentation in which a story attributed to the characters A to C is developed) is executed as the variation presentation.

Further, the fluctuation effect patterns PHT61 to 63 in the normal mode are associated with the deviation fluctuation pattern PH6 (super reach 2). When the variation effect patterns PHT61 to 63 are selected, the story-based reach effect is executed as the variation effect.

  In addition, the variation pattern PH7 (super reach 3) is associated with a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for each effect mode. Specifically, when the production mode is the fierce battle mission mode, the variation production patterns PHM71 to 73 are associated with each other. When the variation presentation patterns PHM 71 to 73 are selected, a mission failure presentation (a failure in missions A to C) is executed as the variation presentation. On the other hand, when the production mode is the phantom rush mode, the fluctuation production patterns PHR71 to 73 are associated with each other. When the change effect pattern PHR 71 to 73 is selected, battle defeat effect (defeated to the enemy characters A to C) is executed as the change effect.

  Further, the variation pattern PH8 (super reach 4) is associated with a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for each effect mode. Specifically, when the production mode is the fierce battle mission mode, the variation production patterns PHM81 to 83 are associated with each other. When the variation presentation patterns PHM 81 to 83 are selected, a mission failure presentation (a failure in missions A to C) is executed as the variation presentation. On the other hand, when the production mode is the phantom rush mode, the variation production patterns PHR81 to 83 are associated with each other. When the variation effect patterns PHR81 to 83 are selected, a battle defeat effect (defeated by the enemy characters A to C) is executed as the variation effect.

  In this configuration, selection processing of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation effect pattern in and outside the limited period will be described.

  First, the case of a big hit in the second special symbol will be described. In this example, as described above, the big hit of the second special symbol is roughly divided into the big hit α and the big hit β. In the following, for convenience of explanation, 16R long open big hit 1 as big hit α and 8R long open big hit as big hit β will be described as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (A2), when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state (outside the limited period), when the 16R long open big hit is 1 in the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern PX7 (Super Reach 3 ) Is selected. At this time, in the present example, it is assumed that the illusion rush mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the probability variation state or the time saving state. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 93, when the phantom rush mode is set, any one of the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 is selected as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PX7. When any of the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 is selected, a “battle victory effect” is executed as a symbol variation effect in which the phantom hero character wins the enemy character in the battle.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 92 (A2), when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state (outside the limited period), if the 8R long open big hit is obtained in the second special symbol, the variation pattern PX8 (super Reach 4) is selected. Similarly to the above, in this example, it is assumed that the phantom rush mode is set as the production mode in correspondence with the probability variation state or the short time state. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 93, when the phantom rush mode is set, any of the variation effect patterns PXR81 to 83 is selected as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PX8. Then, when one of the change effect patterns PXR81 to 83 is selected, the seven star charge is performed immediately after the "Battle defeat effect" in which the ally character in the battle loses the enemy character as the symbol change effect is executed. The “Seven Star Charge Introduction Effect” is executed, where the mark suddenly appears.

  As described above, in this example, when the jackpot is won outside the limited period in the definite change state or the short time state, the selected variation pattern and the variation presentation pattern may differ depending on the big hit type (big hit α or big hit β). . Then, if one big hit type (big hit α) is won outside the limited period, although the battle system effect is executed in the variable display, the seven star charge introduction effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the other big hit type (big hit β) is won outside the limited period, a battle-type effect and a seven-star charge effect are executed with the change display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (A3), when within the limited period immediately after the special game, the variation pattern PX1 (super-shortened) in the case of the 16R long opening big hit 1 or 8R long opening big hit in the second special symbol. Fluctuation) is selected. In this example, it is assumed that the illusion rush mode (series stage) is set as the effect mode corresponding to the limited period. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 93, when the phantom rush mode (renso stage) is set, the variation effect pattern PXR11 is selected as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PX1. Then, when the variation effect pattern PXR11 is selected, the "Seven Star Charge Introduction Effect" in which the seven star charge mark suddenly appears immediately after the start of the symbol variation display is executed as the so-called "immediately pervious effect" in the symbol variation effect. Be done.

  As described above, in this example, when the jackpot is won within the limited period in the definite change state or the short time state, the selected variation pattern and the variation presentation pattern become the same regardless of the big hit type (big hit α or big hit β). obtain. Then, within the limited period, even if any of the big hit types (big hit α or big hit β) is won, the seven-star charge introduction effect is executed with the change display.

  Therefore, outside the limited period in the definite change state or the time reduction state, when winning one big hit type (big hit α) among the big hit types of the second special symbol, “7 star charge introduction effect in the symbol fluctuation display ”Is not executed, but when the other big hit type (big hit β) is won, the“ seven star charge introduction effect ”is executed in the symbol variation display. On the other hand, within the limited period in the probabilistic state or short-running state (rensou stage), regardless of which type of big hit (big hit α or big hit β) is won, “Charge introduction effect” is executed.

  Next, the case of a big hit in the first special symbol will be described. As shown in FIG. 92 (A2), when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state (outside the limited period), if the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PX7 (super reach 3) is selected. Ru. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (A3), when the gaming state is within the limited period in the probabilistic state or the short-time state, the variation pattern PX7 (super reach) also occurs when the first special symbol is a big hit. 3) is selected. At this time, in the present example, similarly to the above, it is assumed that the illusion rush mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the probability variation state or the time saving state. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 93, when the phantom rush mode is set, any one of the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 is selected as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PX7. When any of the variation effect patterns PXR71 to 73 is selected, a “battle victory effect” is executed as a symbol variation effect in which the phantom hero character wins the enemy character in the battle.

As described above, in this example, when the gaming state is a definite change state or a short time state, regardless of whether it is within the limited period or outside the limited period, when the big hit with the first special symbol, the symbol variation display Thus, the seven-star charge introduction effect is not executed (instead, the battle effect is executed). In addition, as a modification, when it becomes a big hit with the first special symbol within a limited period in a definite variation state or a short time state, a special effect that is not revealed is executed outside the limited period. You may As the special effect, for example, a special enemy character that is not set in the battle effect outside the limited period may be allowed to appear. Conversely, while this special effect is executed when a big hit with the first special symbol outside the limited period in the definite variation state or the time saving state, it is executed with the second special symbol outside the limited period in the definite variation state or the short time state You may comprise so that it may not be performed when it is a big hit.

(Operation: Ninth Embodiment)
Next, to make it easy to understand the ninth embodiment, the characteristic operation of this gaming machine will be described.

  First, an example of the effect of the probable change promotion effect in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic view showing an example of the probability variation promotion effect in the ninth embodiment.

  In this example, as the first promotion effect, the probability change promotion effect in the fierce battle bonus A and the probability change promotion effect in the fierce battle bonus B are targeted. As described above, when the gaming state is the normal state, the striding bonus A is a jackpot effect pattern when the 15R long short opening jackpot 2 is won with the first special symbol, and the striding bonus B is the gaming state is usually It is a big hit production pattern when winning the 7R long and short open big hit with the first special symbol when in the state. Here, the fierce battle bonus A includes an effect content that succeeds in the probability change promotion, and an intense battle bonus B includes an effect content that fails in the probability change promotion. Note that (A) to (D) in the figure are the common effects (normal effects and turning effects) of the fierce battle bonuses A and B, and (E) to (F) in the figure are the productions of the hard fight bonus A (success effects) And (G) to (H) in the figure are the renderings of the fierce battle bonus B (the renderings of failure). Therefore, in hard fight bonus A, effects are developed in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (D) → (E) → (F) in the figure, and in hard fight bonus B, in the figure (A The effects are developed in the order of (B) → (C) → (D) → (G) → (H).

  As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the big hit symbol “2, 2, 2” is stopped and displayed in the variation variation of the decorative symbol, and the big hit occurs. In this example, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the conditional normal big hit (equivalent to non-probable change big hit) is won by the stop display of the even number symbol (indeterminate symbol). Further, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), with the start of the special game, a big hit start demonstration is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 94C, in the first round, a circular mark image (identification mark) is displayed at the center of the screen. The mark image has a front and back, with a "hard fight mission mark" on the front side and a "phantom rush mark" on the back side. This mark image (identification mark) suggests the type of the special round (third round) in the special game at the same time as suggesting the effect mode scheduled to shift after the end of the special game. In other words, the fierce battle mission mark suggests that the specific round is set as a non-V round, and that there is a high possibility of shifting to the fierce battle mission mode after the special game ends. Further, the phantom rush mark indicates that the specific round is set as the V round, and there is a high possibility that the phantom rush rush mode is entered after the special game ends. In the figure, a “fierce fighting mission mark” on the front side is displayed as a default image. Although not shown, the mark image does not change in the second to fifth rounds, and the “fierce fighting mission” mark on the surface side is continuously displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (D), in the sixth round, the probability change promotion effect starts, and the mark image starts to rotate. The rotation of the mark image increases the sense of expectation for the probability change promotion.

As shown in FIG. 94 (E), when the mark image is stopped on the back side and the “phantom rush mark” on the back side is displayed, it is notified that the probability change promotion has succeeded. In that case, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), in the big hit end demonstration, the illusion rush rush effect is executed, and it is informed that the special battle is to be shifted to after the end of the special game.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), when the mark image stops on the surface side and the “fierce fighting mission mark” on the surface side is displayed, it is notified that the probability change promotion has failed. In that case, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), in the big hit end demonstration, a fierce battle mission entry effect is executed, and it is notified that the transition to the fierce battle mission mode is made after the special game is finished.

  However, since the type of jackpot (that is, whether or not to execute the V round) is determined in advance at the time of the lottery, the performance development (production result) according to the type is determined. In other words, if you win 15R long / short open big hit 1 (conditional special big hit), it has been determined in advance that the probability change promotion will be successful, and if you win 7R long / short open big hit (conditional normal big hit) It is determined in advance that the probability change promotion fails. As a modification, depending on the presence or absence of entering the specific area 658, if there is entering the ball transition to the fantasy rush mode, if it is not entering the transition to the fierce mission mode, etc. It may be configured so that only “conditional specific big hit” or “conditional normal big hit”) does not depend on the probability change promotion success / failure.

  Next, an example of the effect of the round promotion effect in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic view showing an example of the round promotion effect in the ninth embodiment.

  In this example, as the second promotion effect, a round promotion effect in the phantom bonus D and a probability change promotion effect in the phantom bonus B are targeted. As described above, the phantom battle bonus D is a big hit presentation pattern when winning the 16R long opening jackpot 1 in the second special symbol, and the fantasy fighting bonus B is the 4R long opening jackpot 1 in the second special symbol It is a big hit production pattern when winning. Here, the phantom battle bonus D includes production contents that succeed in the round promotion, and the phantom bonus B includes production contents that fail in the round promotion. In the figure, (A) to (D) are effects common to the phantom bonus B and D (normal effects and roaring effects), and (E) to (F) in the figure are effects of the phantom bonus D ( (G) to (H) are effects of the phantom bonus D (failure effects). Therefore, in the fantasy battle bonus D, the effects are developed in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (D) → (E) → (F). The effects are developed in the order of (A) → (B) → (C) → (D) → (G) → (H).

  As shown in FIG. 95 (A), the jackpot symbol “1 · 1 · 1” is stopped and displayed in the variation variation of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot is generated. In this example, there is a high possibility of winning the 4R long open jackpot (possibility of not winning the 16R long open jackpot, which is a high profit jackpot) in the stop display of the second odd symbol (probability variation). It is suggested. Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), with the start of the special game, a big hit start demonstration is displayed. In addition, in the big hit start demonstration, it is suggested that the possibility of winning 4R length open big hit is also high by the fact that “phantom bonus” is displayed as the big hit production pattern (16 R long open hit is elected If so, it ’s likely that “Musou Bonus” is displayed).

  As shown in FIG. 95C, in the first round, a circular mark image (identification mark) is displayed at the center of the screen. This mark image has front and back sides, a “phantom rush mark” on the front side, and an “extra bonus mark” on the back side. In the figure, a “phantom rush” mark on the front side is displayed as a default image. Although not shown, the mark image does not change in the second to third rounds, and the “phantom rush mark” on the front side is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 95 (D), the promotion effect is started in the fourth round, and the mark image starts to rotate. By rotating the mark image, a sense of expectation for round-up (acquisition of the latter half 12 rounds) is increased.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (E), when the mark image stops on the back side and the “extra bonus mark” on the back side is displayed, it is notified that the round promotion (round up) is successful. . That is, it is determined that the special game will continue after the fifth round without ending in the fourth round. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), in the fifth round, the text information “Musou Perfect” is displayed, and in fact, profits equivalent to the case where “Musou Bonus” is won (16R: 2400). It is informed that (equivalent to the departure) is possible. In the sixth and subsequent rounds after the promotion effect ends, the phantom bonus D progresses with the same content as the warrior bonus A (see FIGS. 85 and 86).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), when the mark image stops on the front side and the “phantom rush” mark on the front side is displayed, the round promotion (round-up) may have failed. Informed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), after the end of the fourth round, the fifth round is not started, and the big hit ends through the big hit end demonstration.

  However, in actuality, since the type of jackpot (that is, whether or not the latter half of the 12th round is continued) is determined in advance at the time of the winning or failing lottery, the stage development (the stage result) according to the type is determined. That is, it is determined in advance that the round promotion success will be successful when the 16R long opening big hit 1 is won, and it is previously determined that the round promotion failure will be successful when the 4R long opening big hit 1 is elected There is. In this regard, with regard to the second promotion effect (round promotion effect), the presence or absence of the V prize in the specific area 658 does not relate to the effect result (promotion success / failure), but the first promotion effect (probability change promotion effect) ), It is preferable that the presence / absence of the V prize in the specific area 658 is related to the production result (promotion success / failure).

  Next, an example of the effect of the on-hold consecutive villa effect in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a reserved in-resort resort production in the ninth embodiment.

  Whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive resort production is determined by lottery during the above-described prefetchable period. Each pre-readable period is set for each round of special games. In each round, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa production is determined, and if the execution of that production is decided, Generate on-hold Renso production. Therefore, for every one round (prefetchable period), the process from the effect lottery to the effect execution pertaining to the on-hold on-the-run consecutive effect is completed. In the following production example, it is assumed that a high profit jackpot (16R long open jackpot 1) is won and “Musou Bonus A” is developed as a jackpot production pattern. In this incomparable bonus A, prefetchable periods are set in the fourth to sixteenth rounds. However, as described above, when the phantom character re-selection effect is executed in the 12th to 16th rounds, it is avoided that the phantom character selection effect and the in-hold Renso effect compete in the same round. In order to do this, the on-premises-on-line effect is not performed in the 12th to 16th rounds. In this example, it is assumed that “specific hold (big hit hold)” exists in one or more subsequent operation hold balls existing at the start of the special game.

As shown in FIG. 96A, a circular mark image (identification mark) is displayed at the center of the screen in the first round in the special game. The mark image has a front and back, and a "phantom rush mark" is attached on the front side and a "seven star charge mark" is attached on the back side. In the figure, a “phantom rush mark” on the front side is displayed as a default image. In this example, although not shown, in each of the fourth to fifth rounds of the above-described pre-readable period, it is determined that non-execution (non-election) of on-premises continuous play effect is made in the pre-reading process. Do. Therefore, at the end of the fifth round, the “phantom rush mark” on the front side is continuously displayed on the mark image.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (B), in the sixth round, when execution (winning) of on-hold in-line effect is determined in the prefetch process, the mark image starts to rotate as the on-off in-line effect.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (C), in the case where the on-hold on-line consecutive effect occurs as a true effect (decision on on-off in-line continuous change), the “7 star charge mark” on the back side is displayed. On the other hand, although not shown in the drawings, when the on-hold consecutive villa effect is generated as a Gase effect, a “phantom rush mark” on the front side is displayed. In addition, when the on-hold consecutive resort production is executed in a certain round and it occurs as a true production (seven star charge mark), the pre-reading process is not performed in the remaining rounds. On the other hand, in the case where the pending Uchirenso effect is produced as a staging (phantom rush mark), the prefetching process is executed again in the remaining rounds, and the pending Uchiranso is repeated any number of times until it occurs as a true effect. Production can occur. In other words, in the prefetching period, the prefetching process can be executed in each round until a real effect that confirms the establishment of the on-hold extended resort is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (D), when the final round is over, characters of “seven star charge activation” are displayed in the big hit end demonstration. In this example, since the pending Uchirenso effect (the true effect) is generated during the round, “7 star charge notification” is selected as the type of the end demonstration effect, and “7 star charge notification effect” is displayed on the screen as the 7 star charge notification effect described above. The text “Seven Star Charge” is displayed. Then, after the end of the special game, the fantasy battle rush mode is set as the effect mode. In addition, stay at the Renso stage for a limited period (4 times) immediately after the end of the special game. In this example, at the end of the special game, it is assumed that there are four operation holding balls of the second special symbol, and the fourth of them is the specific hold (the next big hit targeted for a hold inside announcement). Suppose that there is.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (E), when the special game is over, variable display of symbols is started on the consecutive stage. When staying at the Renso stage, rainbow-colored band images are displayed at both ends of the screen as a special effect during the display of changes in symbols, and the next big hit may occur during a limited period (within 4 rotations). It will be noticed.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (F), the first variation display after the special game is “out of”. In this example, although not shown in the figure, the symbol variation display in the second to third times is also “out”. If it is within the limited period, special effects (band images) will continue to be displayed not only during the big hit change (the next big hit change subject to the on-hold consecutive resort announcement) but also during the extraordinary fluctuation. Be done. In other words, until the next big hit occurs, the display of the band image is continued throughout the entire period of the consecutive resort stage.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (G), as a result of the specific hold designated as the target of the hold internal announcement being stored being digested, “the seven star charge mark” suddenly appears on the screen immediately after the start of the fourth variable display. Thus, by displaying again the mark image similar to that at the time of the on-hold consecutive resort announcement, it is possible to make the player intuitively understand that a big hit will occur in the current variation display. In addition, the display of the “Seven Star Charge Mark” this time is also used as the above-mentioned Seven Star Charge introduction effect, and it will be continuously connected to the winning HIT number announcement effect of the big hit start demonstration (omitted in the figure). . As a modification thereof, the "Seven Star Charge Mark" may be continuously displayed even in the case of the big hit end demonstration and the fluctuation up to the change related to the specific suspension.

As shown in FIG. 96 (H), the big hit symbol “7, 7, 7” is stopped and displayed in the variation display, and the next big hit occurs. Note that this big hit variation (big hit variation within a limited period) is configured as a quick hit effect that is completed in a few seconds without a reach state after the symbol starts to fluctuate.

  Next, an example of a seven-star charge effect in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a seven-star charge effect in the ninth embodiment.

  Seven star charge production is performed in the (1) seven star charge introduction production performed in the big hit fluctuation, (2) the acquired HIT number announcement production performed in the big hit start demonstration, and (3) from round game to the big hit end demonstration The total acquired HIT number addition effect. Note that the number of acquired HITs (the number of awarded balls) shown in the figure is the total number of winning balls obtained based on the winning in the special winning opening 65 in the special game during the so-called continuous state. . The 7-star charge effect is displayed in the form of a change when triggered by winning the jackpot β with the second special symbol, or when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol while staying at the Renso stage (limited period). It is an effect that is executed substantially continuously from the inside to the end of the special game.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (A), while the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, a "seven star charge mark" is displayed as a seven star charge introduction effect. When the jackpot is won, the battle effect is executed in the variable display, and after the ally character loses the enemy character, the “seven star charge mark” appears in the form of the resurrection effect. On the other hand, when the big hit is won while staying at the above-mentioned Renso stage, as already explained using FIG. "Mark" appears.

  As shown in Fig. 97 (B), "13600 HIT" is displayed on the front side of the "Nanasei Charge Mark" as the total earned HIT (acquired number of winning balls) obtained so far, and it is won by the big hit this time. “+0 HIT” is displayed as the initial value of the number of possible acquired HITs. In this example, "1 HIT" is counted for "one" winning ball. Although not shown in the figure, it is assumed that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display and the jackpot is generated.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (C), (D), and (E), with the start of the special game, the earned HIT number announcement effect is executed in the jackpot start demonstration. The acquired HIT number notification effect is an effect of notifying the number of winning balls obtainable by the present big hit (number of withdrawal balls) as the acquired HIT number. The number of acquired HITs increases in a maximum of three stages according to the specified number of rounds of the special game executed this time.

  When the prescribed round number of the special game is 4 rounds (4R long opening big hit), as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the number of acquired HIT this time is only one step from “+0 HIT” to “+600 HIT” Ascends (4R × 10 counts × 15 = 600 HIT).

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (C) to (D), when the prescribed round number of the special game is 8 rounds (when it is 8R long open big hit), the number of acquired HITs from “+0 HIT” to “+600 HIT” , “+600 HIT” to “+1200 HIT” in two steps (8R × 10 counts × 15 pieces = 1200 HIT).

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (C) to (E), when the prescribed round number of the special game is 16 rounds (when it is 16R long open big hit), the number of acquired HITs from “+0 HIT” to “+600 HIT” as shown in FIGS. , Rising from “+600 HIT” to “+1200 HIT” and from “+1200 HIT” to “+2400 HIT” in three stages (16R × 10 counts × 15 = 2400 HIT). In the following description, it is assumed that the number of acquired HITs is “+2400 HIT”.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (F), when the round game is started, the total acquired HIT number addition effect is executed. Specifically, every time a game ball wins a big winning opening 65, “+15 HIT” is moved from the acquired HIT number to the total acquired HIT number (15 winning balls per count).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), when the so-called over winning is achieved, the number of HIT acquired this time does not include the over winning portion (only 10 counts which is the specified number per round is included) Therefore, instead of moving the numerical value, information “+15 HIT” is newly displayed. At the same time, a special sound effect is output, and the value is added to the total number of acquired HITs. The “over winning” refers to a winning exceeding the prescribed number (10 balls) for the big winning opening 65.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (H), when all the rounds are completed, the total winning HIT number is enlarged and displayed in the jackpot end demonstration, and the result of the total payout (the number of winning prize balls) is announced. After that, although not shown in the figure, as a fantasy battle rush entry effect, the “Phantom Rush” logo is enlarged and displayed on the screen to notify the transition to the fantasy battle rush mode.

  Next, the execution process of the character selection effect in the big hit in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the execution process of the character selection effect in the ninth embodiment.

  Regarding the execution process of the character selection effect, (A) in the figure shows the case where the first special symbol is won in the 7R long and short open big hit in the normal state, and the transition to the short time state after the special game ends is shown in (B). In the normal state (or short time state), when the 15R long and short open big hit 1 is won with the first special symbol, and the transition to the probable state after the special game ends, (C) in the figure shows the short time state ( Or, in the normal state), when winning the 16R long open big hit 1 in the second special symbol and shifting to the probability change state after the end of the special game, (D) in the figure shows the 16R length in the second special symbol in the probability change state. This shows a case where the winning big hit is won and the game is re-entered into the probability change state after the special game is completed. In each figure, the time axis is set from left to right, and the jackpot start demonstration, round game, and jackpot end demo are shown in order from left to right. Each diagram conceptually shows the state of execution of the jackpot effect, and each time width and ratio do not correspond to the actual time width and ratio. That is, in this example, in FIGS. 4A to 4D, different time widths are actually set to the same time width as appropriate so that the time scale of the character selection effect can be easily compared.

First, the 7R long short open jackpot of the first special symbol belongs to the condition usually big hit as the big hit attribute. When 7R long short opening big hit when the gaming state is normal state (low probability · non-opening extension), basically, it is not possible to win V in the specific round in the special game, the gaming state after the end of the special game is short time It becomes a state (low probability, open extension). At this time, in the above special game, “strike bonus B” is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. In addition, "strike bonus (common)" is selected as the type of start demonstration effect, and "strike entry" is selected as the type of end demonstration effect. As described above, in the case where the type of the end demonstration effect is “strike in force”, the execution time (rendering measure) is N = 20 (seconds). And, in this big hit end demonstration (hard battle entry), fierce character selection production is set. On the other hand, in the round game (strike bonus B), the fight character selection effect is not set. Therefore, the fierce character selection production is carried out during the big hit end demonstration (hard fight entry). At this time, in the fierce battle character selection effect, although illustration is omitted, four kinds of fierce battle characters (friend characters) are displayed in a horizontal row, and the display mode of the selected image is displayed every constant time during the operation valid period of the effect button 15. By sequentially switching, it is possible to select any one of the plurality of intense fighting characters according to the operation timing of the effect button 15. Then, the 15R long short opening big hit 1 of the first special symbol belongs to the conditional specified big hit. When the gaming state is normal state (low probability · non-opening extension) and becomes 15R long short opening big hit 1, basically, it is V prize winning in the specific round in the special game, the game state after the special game end Is a definite change state (high probability, open extension). At this time, in the special game described above, “phantom bonus B” is selected as a jackpot effect pattern. In addition, as a type of start demonstration effect, “Gentooic bonus (common)”, and as a type of end demonstration effect, “transfer demo” is selected. As described above, when the type of the end demonstration effect is “handover demonstration”, the execution time (effect scale) is Y = 35 (seconds). As described above, the handover demonstration is executed across the round game (the seventh to fifteenth rounds) and the big hit end demonstration. The effect measure in the round game (the seventh to the fifteenth round) is 29 (seconds), and the effect measure in the big hit end demonstration is 6 (seconds). And in the 7th-15th rounds (short opening round game) in this succession demonstration, illusion character selection production is set. In addition, since the transfer demo is an effect that is continuously executed across the seventh round to the big hit end demo, the end demo effect (the transfer demo) triggered by the big hit end demo command from the main control board 100 side Is not executed, but is executed starting from the seventh round. Therefore, the jackpot end command from the main control board 100 is ignored. For other end demonstration effects, the end demonstration effects are executed in response to a jackpot end demonstration command from the main control board 100.

  Next, the 16R long open big hit 1 of the second special symbol belongs to the conditional special big hit. When the gaming state is short-time state (low probability / opening extension), when the 16R long opening big hit is 1, basically, V wins in a specific round in that special game, and the gaming state after the special game ends It becomes a definite change state (high probability, open extension). At this time, in the special game described above, “Musou Bonus A” or “Phantom Fight Bonus D” is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. In the following description, it is assumed that "Income Bonus A" is selected. Also, “Musou Bonus (Normal)” is selected as the type of the start demonstration effect, and “Phantom Plunge B” is selected as the type of the end demonstration effect. As described above, when the type of the end demonstration effect is “phantom entry B”, the execution time (rendering measure) is N = 35 (seconds). And, in this big hit end demonstration (phantom entry B), the illusion character selection effect is set. In this example, as described above, the end demonstration (phantom entry B) is started in response to the big hit end demo command from the main control board 100, so that the fantastic character selection effect is also performed during the big hit end demonstration. Only executed. At this time, in the illusion character selection effect, although not shown, 15 kinds of illusion characters (ally characters) are prepared one by one, and the screen of the selectable illusion characters is selected by switching the screen with the left and right keys. In response to the operation of the effect button 15, any one of a plurality of phantom characters can be selected. In this way, the fierce battle character selection effect and the phantom battle character selection effect are set such that the effect content and the effect scale are different from each other. In addition, some (4 types) of 15 types of phantom fighting characters are also used as fierce fighting characters.

  On the other hand, when the game state is a definite change state (high probability, open extension) and it becomes 16R long opening big hit 1, basically, it is V prize winning in the specific round in the special game, the game after the special game end The state is a probability change state (high probability, open extension). At this time, in the special game described above, “Musou Bonus A” or “Phantom Fight Bonus D” is selected as the jackpot effect pattern. In the following description, it is assumed that "Income Bonus A" is selected. Further, “Musou Bonus (Normal)” is selected as the type of start demonstration effect, and “Phantom Battle A” is selected as the type of end demonstration effect. As described above, when the type of the end demonstration effect is “phantom entry A”, the execution time (rendering measure) is N = 6 (seconds). And, in this big hit end demonstration (hard battle entry), the fierce character selection presentation is not set. On the other hand, phantom character selection effects are set in the 11th to 16th rounds during the round game. Accordingly, the phantom character selection effect is executed only during the round game (Musou Bonus A).

  The main effects achieved in the ninth embodiment are summarized as follows.

  First, in the operation pattern according to the conditional specified big hit (15R long short open big hit 2) and the operation pattern according to the conditional normal big hit (7R long short open big hit), it is large until the predetermined round after the specific round By making a series of opening / closing operations (operation sequence of long opening and short opening) of the winning opening 65 substantially the same mode, which jackpot type has been won, a specific round is executed in which round, Since it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the V prize has actually been won, it is possible to maintain the expectation for the probability change until the predetermined round, and the effect when the probability change promotion effect occurs in the predetermined round The effect can be further enhanced, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Secondly, even if the same jackpot type is won, the tendency of performance differs between the limited period immediately after the end of the special game and outside the limited period. Although there is a low possibility that a specific effect (seven star charge introduction effect) included in the symbol fluctuation production of low profit jackpot in the symbol fluctuation production of profit jackpot is unlikely to appear, when staying within a limited period, high profit jackpot and Because there is a high possibility that a specific effect (7-star charge introduction effect) will appear in any symbol variation effect of low profit jackpot, while adopting a common effect in part regardless of the jackpot type and the number of fluctuations period Also, it is possible to create an unprecedented variety of gaming characteristics by adding a sharpening of effects within and outside a limited period, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of gaming.

  Thirdly, when a character selection effect is selected that selects an effect format that is changing during the execution of a special game, the execution of the in-reserved renso effect is prohibited in the execution round of the character selection effect. By avoiding the situation in which the rendezvous in the same round and the character selection production compete in the same round, the production effects of both productions can be prevented from diluting each other. It becomes possible to improve.

  Fourth, when a round promotion effect is executed during the execution of a special game, a pre-readable period is set for a round after the execution round of the round promotion effect, and the reservation in the same round By avoiding a situation in which the production and the round promotion production compete, it is possible to prevent the production effects of both productions from being diluted with each other, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Fifth, in the normal state, by winning the conditional normal big hit (7R long and short open big hit) with the first special symbol in the normal state, when shifting to the short time state after the end of the special game, the second special symbol in the short time state By winning the conditionally specific big hit (16 long open big hit 1), the execution time (rendering scale) of the big hit end demonstration is different in the case of transitioning to a definite change state after the end of the special game, Depending on the scene or situation at the time of transition to the gaming state, it is possible to prevent the monotonization of the taste of the game by giving various changes to the contents of presentation and time lapse when transitioning from the special game to the symbol variation game. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol lottery in a situation where there is a specific hold in the subsequent action holding ball, the game state at the time of the big hit is simply the easy entry state. Not only when the probability of winning or failing lottery of the second special symbol is in a high probability state, that is, on the premise that it is in the probability variation consecutive resort, it is possible to execute the on-hold consecutive resort production, It is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for the generation of the on-hold Renren production.

Sixth, based on the type of jackpot and the game state when the jackpot occurs, regardless of whether the transition destination of the production mode varies depending on whether or not there is a V-winning during a special game, and whether or not there is a V-winning during a special game It is possible to give diversity and unexpectedness to the transition mode of the production mode by mixing the cases where the transition destination of the production mode is made the same, and as a result, to improve the fun of the game Is possible.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  Like the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment depends on whether or not the gaming ball wins in a specific area (so-called "V area") in the big winning opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball check type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to a definite changing state after the end of the special game. In addition, a definite change state may be continued until symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) is performed, and may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Further, the gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is equipped with only a single big winning opening 65 (a ball probability attacker having a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA, as in the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. ing. In other words, the tenth embodiment is configured such that the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  First, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 shows the big hit breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the tenth embodiment.

  The upper part of FIG. 99 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the tenth embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, a big hit attribute, the number of times of operation of a probability change / time saving function, and an operation pattern of a big winning opening are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per 1st special symbol, the symbol group A (16R long open big hit), the symbol group B (12R long short open big hit 1), and the symbol group C (12R) as three types of symbol groups according to the type of big hit. Long and short opening jackpot 2) is set.

  The lower part of FIG. 99 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the tenth embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening are respectively associated with the symbol random value per special symbol (this book). In the example, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the symbol table per second special symbol, a symbol group D (16R long open big hit) and a symbol group E (7R long short open big hit) are set as two types of symbol groups corresponding to the type of big hit.

  Subsequently, FIG. 100 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the tenth embodiment. In the present example, a total of four types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above-described jackpot types. In the drawing, the state change of the special winning opening 65 in the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 100 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and the time widths and ratios of the opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game are the actual time. It does not correspond to width and ratio. In this example, regardless of which of the above five types of big hits, in the specific round in the special game, the presence or absence of a probability variable prize is determined based on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 658 Is distributed. The specific round is set to the fifth round regardless of which jackpot is applicable. In the figure, “L” is added to the long open round game, and “S” is added to the short open round game.

FIG. 100A shows a 16R long open pattern. In the 16R long opening pattern,
In all rounds (normal round, specific round), a long open round game is executed. In other words, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit equivalent to 16 rounds since the big winning opening 65 is opened long in any round game. Note that the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because a long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 100 (B) shows the 12R long / short open pattern 1. In the 12R long / short open pattern 1, long open round games are executed in the first to fifth rounds, and short open round games are executed in the sixth to twelfth rounds. That is, since the large winning opening 65 is long-opened in the five round games, the 12R long short opening big hit 1 is a big hit equivalent to five rounds. Note that the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because a long open round game is executed.

  FIG. 100 (C) shows the 12R long / short open pattern 2. In 12R long short open pattern 2, a long open round game is executed in the first to fourth rounds and the sixth round, and a short open round game is executed in the fifth round and the seventh to twelfth rounds. That is, since the large winning opening 65 is long-opened in the five round games, the 12R long short opening big hit 2 becomes a big hit equivalent to five rounds. Note that the specific round (third round) is set as a non-V round in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area 658 because the short open round game is executed.

  FIG. 100D shows the 7R long and short open pattern. In the 7R long / short open pattern, long open round games are executed in the first to fifth rounds, and short open round games are executed in the sixth to seventh rounds. That is, since the large winning opening 65 is long-opened in the five round games, the 7R long short open jackpot becomes a big hit equivalent to five rounds. Note that the specific round (fifth round) is set as a V round that allows easy or possible entry into the specific area 658 because a long open round game is executed.

  Thus, in this example, the 16R long open big hit is a big hit of “substantial 16 rounds”, while the other big hits (12R long short open big hit 1, 2, 7R long short open big hits) are “substantial 5 rounds”. A big hit.

Here, as shown in FIG. 99, in this example, in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, either the long open big hit or the long short open big hit is won as the big hit type. As described above, the long open jackpot is a jackpot in which only a long open round game exists as a round game in the special game. The long and short opening big hit means a big hit where a long opening round game and a short opening round game are mixed as a round game in the special game. At this time, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the long open jackpot is 10%, and the winning probability of the long open jackpot is 90%. On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, the winning probability of the long open jackpot is 60%, and the winning probability of the long open jackpot is 40%. For this reason, the winning probability of the long and short open big hit is set higher in the case of winning the big win in the first special symbol lottery than in the case of making the big win in the second special symbol lottery. Here, in this example, in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, when a long and short open big hit is won, a short open round game is executed in at least one normal round in the special game. Ru. Therefore, in the case of a big hit type (long and short open big hit) with one or more short opening round games in a normal round, the case of becoming a big hit in the first special symbol lottery is more than the case where it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery. , The winning probability is set high. In other words, basically, the ratio of the short-open round game being executed at least once in the normal round is higher in the case of the big win in the first special symbol than in the case of the big win in the second special symbol. It has become. In addition, in this example, it can become a short open round game not only in a normal round but in a specific round. That is, as described above, when the 12R long / short open big hit 2 is won, a specific round in the special game (12R long / short open pattern 2) is set as the short open round game. In this example, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set as long and short open big hits as the big hit type, but the long and short open big hit is set only for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set. It is good also as composition which does not set up long open short jackpot (that is, only long open big hit is set).

  In addition, in this example, the average number of rounds of special games to be executed by one big hit occurrence is set equally between the case of becoming a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the case of becoming a big hit in the second special symbol lottery There is. Specifically, the average number of rounds for a special game in the case of a big win in the first special symbol lottery is “12.4 rounds”, whereas the special number in the case of a big win in the second special symbol lottery The average number of rounds of the game is “12.4 rounds”, and each average number of rounds is configured to be the same. Therefore, the type of big hit in the first special symbol lottery (16R long open big hit, 12R long short open big hit 1, 2) and the type of big hit in the second special symbol lottery (16R long open big hit, 7R long short open hit) Although the expected value of winning ball is different, the number of round games executed (the number of rights to be able to enter the big winning opening 65) obtained on occurrence of one big hit is the same on average.

  In addition, as can be seen from the above description, when the first special symbol is a big hit, a big hit with a short open round game in the normal round (12R long short open big hit 1, 2) and a short hit in the normal round It is distributed to big hits (16R long open big hits) without an open round game. In the following, for the convenience of explanation, the big hit (12R long short open big hit 1, 2) with the short open round game in the normal round "long open short hit big hit X", the big round without the short open round game in the normal round (16R long Opening jackpot) is called "long opening jackpot Y". As shown in FIG. 100, in the case of winning the long and short open big hit X (12R long short open big hit 1, 2) among plural types of big hit types, a short open round game can be executed in a normal round in the special game However, the short opening round game is set to at least a round after a specific round (ie, after the sixth round) among a plurality of normal rounds.

  Here, when the long and short open big hit X is won with the first special symbol, the big hit bonus X is selected as the big hit effect pattern in the special game. When the jackpot bonus X is selected, a character selection effect is executed in the jackpot end demonstration. The character selection effect is an effect of selecting a character appearing in the effect mode after the end of the special game, like the character selection effect in the ninth embodiment described above. At this time, when the big hit bonus X is executed, the execution time (end demo time) of the end demo is “Tx”. On the other hand, when a long open big hit Y is won in the first special symbol, “big hit bonus Y” is selected as the big hit effect pattern in the special game. When the big hit bonus Y is selected, a character selection effect is executed in the big hit end demonstration. At this time, when the jackpot bonus Y is executed, the execution time (end demonstration time) of the end demonstration is “Ty”. Here, the end demonstration time Tx of the big hit bonus X and the end demonstration time Ty of the big hit bonus Y are set as different time values. In this example, the end demo time Tx of the big hit bonus X is shorter than the end demo time Ty of the big hit bonus Y (Tx <Ty). At this time, in the end demonstration of the jackpot bonus Y, the entire process of producing the character selection effect is executed, whereas in the end demo of the jackpot bonus X, only a part (second half) of the effect process of the character selection effect is executed. Be done. That is, in the special game, the first half of the character selection effect is executed during the short opening round game (sixth to twelfth rounds) in the special game, and the second half of the character selection effect is It is executed during the end demonstration just after the short opening round. The first half and the second half of the character selection production are configured as a series of productions having continuity, and there is no difference between the big hit Bonus X and the big hit bonus Y.

  As described above, in the present example, the end demonstration time Tx is set to be shorter than the end demonstration time Ty, but by using the effect measure of the round game, the effect measure of the character selection effect is secured. That is, when the long open big hit Y is accompanied by only the long open round game in the special game, the character selection effect is completed only by the big hit end demo, while when the long open short hit big hit X, the special game In order to accompany the long opening round game and the short opening round game (because the short opening round game is executed in the second half round), during the short opening when it is difficult or impossible to enter the big winning opening 65 The character selection effect is completed across the short open round game and the jackpot end demo by making effective use. As a result, even if the long and short open big hit X and the long open big hit Y are different from each other in the end demonstration time during the big hit, it is possible to execute a common character selection effect on the same time scale. By shortening the end demonstration time, it is possible to prevent the extension of the entire big hit presentation.

  Note that the character selection effect of the big hit bonus X and the character selection effect of the big hit bonus Y do not necessarily have to be completely the same in the contents of the effect, and part of the effects may be different. For example, the types of characters that can be selected by the player are different at least in part, and the background display during the presentation and the method for selecting the characters are also different.

  As described above, according to the tenth embodiment, the first special symbol than the second special symbol lottery is set while the average number of rounds in the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set to be the same. To increase the ratio of winning short and long open jackpots (big hits with short open round games) and to increase the proportion of short open round games played in both special rounds and regular rounds in the special game Therefore, by adjusting the actual number of rounds and the actual number of rounds, it is possible to differentiate the profits that can be obtained by the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and to create a well-rounded game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, a gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment has basically the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to parts having the same configuration. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  Like the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment depends on whether or not the gaming ball wins in a specific area (so-called "V area") in the big winning opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball check type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to a definite changing state after the end of the special game. In addition, a definite change state may be continued until symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) is performed, and may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Also, the gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment is equipped with only a single big prize opening 65 (a ball-like attacker having a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA, similarly to the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. ing. That is, the eleventh embodiment is also configured such that the big prize opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  First, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In FIG. 101, the big hit breakdown of the special symbol lottery in the eleventh embodiment is shown.

The upper part of FIG. 101 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol table per first special symbol in the eleventh embodiment. In the first special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, a big hit attribute, the number of times of operation of a probability change / time saving function, and an operation pattern of a big winning opening are respectively associated with a special symbol per symbol random number In the example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the symbol table per 1st special symbol, the symbol group A (12R long / short open big hit 1), symbol group B (12R long / short open big hit 2), and symbol group C (4 8R long / short open big hit 1) and symbol group D (8R long / short open big hit 2) are set. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 101, in the first special symbol lottery, the winning probability of a conditional special big hit (corresponding to a probable big hit) is 60%, and the winning probability of a conditional normal big hit (equivalent to a non-probable big hit) is 40%. It is.

  The lower part of FIG. 101 is a view schematically showing a symbol table per second special symbol in the eleventh embodiment. In the second special symbol per symbol table, a symbol group, jackpot attribute, the number of operations of the probability variation / short-time function, and the operation pattern of the big prize opening are respectively associated with the symbol random value per special symbol (this book). In the example, for convenience, the description of the stop symbol is omitted). In the symbol table per second special symbol, symbol group E (16R long open big hit) and symbol group F (4R long open big hit) are set as two types of symbol groups corresponding to the type of big hit. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 101, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a conditional specified big hit (corresponding to a probability variation big hit) is 100%.

  The first special symbol jackpot type includes 12 rounds of 12R long / short open jackpots (they are also collectively referred to as “12R jackpots”), and the number of rounds of special games is 8 rounds. There are 8R long and short open big hits 1, 2 (collectively referred to as “8R big hit”). That is, two types of jackpots are prepared for each specified number of rounds. Here, among the 12R big hit, 12R long short open big hit 1 belongs to the conditional specific big hit that a specific round is configured as V round (long open round game), 12R long short open big hit 2 is a specific round non-V round It belongs to a conditional regular jackpot configured as (short open round game). In addition, among 8R big hits, 8R long short open big hit 1 belongs to the conditional specific big hit that a specific round is configured as V round (long open round game), 8R long short open big hit 2 is a specific round non-V round ( Belonging to the condition usually a big hit configured as short open round game). At this time, if 12R big hit, the probability of being a conditional special big hit is “45 / (45 + 35) × 100 = 56%”, and if 8R big hit, the probability of being a conditional specific big hit is “15 / (15 + 5) × 100 = 75% ”. Therefore, the specific round is V round (long open round game) in the case where the 8R big win is won and the 8R special game is executed, compared to the case where the 12R big win is won and the 12R special game is executed. The ratio is set high. As a result, even when winning a jackpot type with a small number of special game prescribed rounds, the expectation of probability change is set higher than when winning a jackpot type with a large number of special game prescribed rounds. Therefore, equalization of profits is attempted. As a variation, if the first special symbol is a big hit, the average number of real rounds for a conditional special big hit is set to be less than the average number of real rounds for a conditional normal big hit May be. In other words, if it is a conditional big hit, the actual number of rounds (expected value of the winning ball) may be set larger because the V winning in the specific round is difficult or impossible.

On the other hand, the 2nd special symbol jackpot type includes a 16R long open jackpot (collectively referred to as “16R jackpot”), in which the specified number of rounds of special games is 16 rounds, and a specified round number of special games of 4 rounds. There is a certain 4R long opening big hit (collectively referred to as "4R big hit"). In the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, regardless of any big hit type (16R big hit, 4R big hit), the specific round belongs to the conditional specific big hit configured as V round (long open). In addition, since the big hits (16R big hit, 4R big hit) of the second special symbol are all long open big hits, only the long open round game is set in all rounds (the short open round game is not set). Therefore, in this example, only when a big hit is made with the first special symbol, a short open round game is set for each round of the special game. In addition, you may set a short open round game in each round of the special game also when it becomes big hit with the 2nd special symbol, in that case, rather than when it becomes a big hit with the 2nd special symbol, In the case of a big win with one special pattern, it is desirable that the ratio of the short open round game to be executed in each round of the special game is set higher.

  FIG. 102 is a schematic diagram for explaining the execution process of the special game. In this example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the fourth round is set as the specific round, and rounds other than the fourth round are set as the normal round. First, as shown in FIGS. 102 (A) and 102 (B), no matter which 12R big hit (12R long / short open big hit 1, 2) is won, in that special game, a total of 12 round games are 8 times. Therefore, the actual number of rounds (the number of rounds in which a prize ball can be actually acquired) is “8 rounds”. That is, in the case of 12R big hit, “12 rounds” is set as the specified number of rounds for the special game, but the actual number of rounds that can actually win a prize ball is “8 rounds”. Note that the actual number of rounds is determined by the number of long open round games that are set to be easy or possible to enter the big prize opening 65. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 102 (C) and (D), regardless of which 8R big win (8R long / short open big hit 1, 2) is won, in the special game, a total of 8 round games are 4 times. Therefore, the actual number of rounds (the number of rounds in which a prize ball can be actually acquired) is “4 rounds”. That is, in the case of 8R big hit, “8 rounds” is set as the specified number of rounds for the special game, but the actual number of rounds that can actually win a prize ball is “4 rounds”. Therefore, if the first special symbol is a big hit, the average number of rounds of the special game is 7.2 rounds, so the minimum prescribed round number “8 rounds” is larger than the maximum prescribed round number “12 rounds”. It can be said that the number of rounds is close to.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 102 (E) and (F), the big hit (16 R big hit, 4 R big hit) of the second special symbol is all set as long open big hit, so long open round in the special game Only games are executed. Therefore, the actual round number of the special game when 16R big hit is "16 rounds", and the real round number of the special game when 4R big hit is "4 rounds". Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, the average value of the actual number of rounds is "11.2 rounds", so the maximum number of prescribed rounds "16 rounds" than the smallest prescribed number of rounds "4 rounds" It can be said that the number of rounds is close to.

  As described above, according to the eleventh embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery, the expected prize winning value is lower (substantial round) than in the case of winning the 12R jackpot with the higher expected winning prize value (large number of actual rounds). The number of 8R jackpots (with a small number) is set to be higher than the first special due to the higher probability (probability of expected change) that the big winning opening and the specific area will be long open in the specific round in that special game. It is possible to equalize the profits obtained when winning a jackpot in the design, and it is possible to eliminate unfairness according to the type of jackpot, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game It becomes. Also, multiple types of big wins with different number of rounds (4R <8R <12R <16R) are provided, and in the case of winning big wins in the first special symbol lottery and in the case of winning big wins in the second special symbol lottery, While the internal average number of rounds that can be earned in special games is the same, the actual average number of rounds that can actually win prize balls is differentiated to differentiate the profits earned by both players It becomes possible to create gameplay.

[12th embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and in the following, parts having similar configurations are given the same reference numerals. Descriptions are omitted and mainly different parts are described.

  As with the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment depends on whether or not the game ball wins a specific area (so-called “V area”) in the big prize opening during execution of the special game. Thus, it is configured as a so-called ball check type gaming machine that determines whether or not the gaming state shifts to a definite changing state after the end of the special game. In addition, a definite change state may be continued until symbol variation of a predetermined number of times (ST number of times) is performed, and may be continued until the next big hit occurs.

  Similarly to the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine of the twelfth embodiment is equipped with only a single big prize opening 65 (a ball-like attacker having a specific area 658) in the gaming area PA. ing. That is, also in the twelfth embodiment, the large winning opening 65 having the specific area 658 is opened in all rounds. The configuration of the special winning opening 65 has already been described in the above-described second embodiment, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  In the embodiments so far, the specific area 658 is opened (long open or short open) in the specific round, and the specific area 658 is always closed in the normal round. On the other hand, in this example, the specific area 658 can be opened (long open or short open) not only in the specific round but also in the normal round. In this example, even if the specific area 658 is released, the specific area 658 is switched between valid and invalid according to the opened round, and only the balls entering the specific area 658 in the effective round (valid period) are valid. While entering the specific area 658 in the round to be invalidated (ineffective period) is treated as invalid. Here, the effective period is a period in which the specific area 658 is made effective, that is, the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area switch 657 is made effective. The invalidation period is a period in which the specific area 658 is invalidated, that is, the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area switch 657 is invalidated. Therefore, the round in which the specific area 658 is valid (effective period) is the “specific round”, and the round in which the specific area 658 is invalid (ineffective period) is the “normal round”. Therefore, the specific round in this example refers to a round in which the distributing member (the blade member 655) is opened and closed and the specific region 658 is effective (effective period). On the other hand, even in the normal round, a round in which the distributing member (the blade member 655) opens and closes may be provided. In that case, unlike the above-described specific round, even if a game ball enters the specific area 658, the specific area 658 is invalidated (invalid period), that is, the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 657. Is preferred. Therefore, as a general rule, the transition to probability change by entering the game ball into the specific area 658 is only the specific round in which the specific area 658 is valid, and the game ball is specified even if the specific area 658 is invalid. Even if it is possible to enter the area 658, the entry of the gaming ball is not validated, and does not become a trigger for a probability change transition. Further, in any of the specific round and the normal round in this example, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 657 may be effective. In this case, the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 657 in the specific round, and will be described later. It is preferable to turn on the probability variation reservation flag to be turned on and, while detecting the gaming ball by the specific area switch 657 in the normal round, turn off the probability variation reservation flag described later. In the following, only the first special symbol game is described, and the second special symbol game is omitted, but the configuration described below may be applied to the second special symbol game.

  In this example, as a jackpot type of the first special symbol, it has 1) long short open big hit A, and 2) long short short big hit B. In addition, the number of execution rounds of the special game (prescribed round number) by each jackpot is N times (in this example, "N ≧ 3"). The long open short hit A belongs to the "conditional specific big hit" as a big hit attribute, and the long short open big hit B belongs to the "conditional big hit" as a big hit attribute.

Subsequently, FIG. 103 is a time chart for explaining an operation pattern of the special winning opening 65 in the twelfth embodiment. In this example, a total of two types of operation patterns are prepared corresponding to the above jackpot type. Specifically, "long and short open pattern A" is associated with the long and short open jackpot A, and "long and short open pattern B" is associated with the long and short open jackpot B. In the figure, the state change of the special winning opening 65 during the special game is shown in time series from left to right. Each operation pattern shown in FIG. 103 conceptually shows the execution state of each round game, and each time width and ratio of opening time and closing time (including interval time) of each round game is an actual time. It does not correspond to the width and ratio.

  FIG. 103 (A) shows a long and short open pattern A, and FIG. 103 (B) shows a long and short open pattern B. FIG. In each drawing, in addition to the opening / closing operation mode of the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 in each round, the presence / absence of a game ball entering the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 is shown as an example. In this example, the specific region 658 is opened in the first to third rounds among the plurality of rounds, and the specific region 658 is always closed in the fourth and subsequent rounds. Therefore, in the following, the description of the fourth and subsequent rounds will be omitted except for a special case. In this example, the second round is set as a specific round, and the other first round and third round are set as normal rounds. Therefore, as described above, the specific area 658 is "valid" in the second round (specific round), and the specific area is "invalid" in the first and third rounds (normal round).

Therefore, in this example, the following correspondences (1) to (3) are established.
(1) Entry of the game ball into the specific area 658 in A round (first round) does not become a trigger of definite change transition.
(2) The entry of the game ball into the specific area 658 in the B round (the second round) is a trigger for a probability change transition.
(3) The entry of the game ball into the specific area 658 in the C round (the third round) does not become a trigger for the probability change transition.

  In the long / short open pattern A, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the first round is set as a short open round game, the second round is set as a long open round game, and the third round is set as a short open round game. In this example, in the first to third rounds, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 and the opening / closing operation of the specific area 658 are synchronously controlled, and the opening period of the special winning opening 65 and the opening of the specific area 658 are controlled. The period is configured to overlap in time. In the long and short open pattern A, since the short open round game is executed in the first and third rounds (normal rounds), it is difficult or impossible to enter the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658. Since the long open round game is executed in the second round (specific round), it is easy or possible to enter the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, in the second round, the gaming ball can be made to enter the specific area 658. At this time, since the second round is set as the valid period of the specific area 658, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 657 is treated as valid, and at this time, the probability variation reservation flag is turned on, and after the special game ends. The gaming state becomes a high probability state (probability change state).

In the long / short open pattern B, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the first round is set as a long open round game, the second round is set as a short open round game, and the third round is set as a short open round game. In this example, in the first to third rounds, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65 and the opening / closing operation of the specific area 658 are synchronously controlled. The time period is configured to overlap in time. In this long / short open pattern B, since the short open round game is executed in the second round (specific round) and the third round (normal round), it is difficult or impossible to enter the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658. Although possible, since the long open round game is executed in the first round (normal round), it is easy or possible to enter the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, a game ball can be entered into the specific area 658 in the first round. At this time, since the first round is set as an invalid period of the specific area 658, the detection of the gaming ball by the specific area switch 657 is treated as invalid, the definite variation reservation flag remains off, and after the special game is over The gaming state becomes a low probability state (normal state or short time state).

  Here, the opening and closing operations of the long and short open patterns A and B in the first to third rounds are compared. In the long and short opening pattern A, one short opening in the first round, one long opening in the second round, and two short openings in the third round are performed. That is, in the long / short opening pattern A, the winning prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened / closed in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → short opening” in the first to third rounds. On the other hand, in the long / short opening pattern B, one short opening and one long opening in the first round, one short opening in the second round, and one short opening in the third round are performed. That is, in the long / short opening pattern B, the winning prize opening 65 and the specific area 658 are opened / closed in the order of “short opening → long opening → short opening → short opening” in the first to third rounds. That is, when comparing each of the first to third rounds to compare the long and short open patterns A and B, the opening and closing operations of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are different, but the first to first rounds are different. When the sections up to three rounds are totally viewed as a series of flows, the opening and closing operations of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 coincide with each other. Accordingly, in the long and short opening patterns A and B, through all rounds, the series of opening / closing operations (the operation sequence of long opening and short opening) of the special winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 are made substantially the same, By making it difficult to determine which jackpot type has been won and in which round a specific round was executed, it is possible to maintain the expectation for probability change until the end of the special game Become.

  As described above, according to the twelfth embodiment, there are a specific round in which the specific area 658 is valid and a non-specific round (normal round) in which the specific area 658 is invalid, and a game to the specific area 658 in any round. While it is possible to enter the ball substantially, only the entrance to the specific area 658 in the specific round is triggered by the probability change transition, and further, the big winning opening 65 and the specific area 658 of the specific area and the normal round are By matching the opening / closing operation mode, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which jackpot type (opening / closing pattern) is won based on the opening / closing operation mode and whether or not there is a ball entering a specific area. Regardless of whether the area has transitioned to the effective period or the ineffective period, the player has acquired a definite change by entering the specific area 658. While waiting can proceed special game, as a result, it is possible to improve the flavor Xing of the game.

  In the correspondences (1) to (3), the A round, the B round, and the C round are exemplified as the first round, the second round, and the third round. However, “B = A + 1” and “C = If the relationship of "B + 1" is satisfied, specific numerical values of A, B and C can be set arbitrarily. That is, the above-mentioned correspondences (1) to (3) are not set to the first half (first to third rounds) in a plurality of special games, and the second half (for example, fourth to sixth rounds or the sixth round) 14 to 16th round, etc.).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the above correspondence relationships (1) to (2) are satisfied, that is, since the specific area is invalid in the A round (first round), the game ball is inserted into the specific area. While the ball does not trigger a definite transition, the specific area becomes effective in the B round (the second round), so the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area triggers the definite transition. While reversing the correspondence relationships (1) to (3), for example, enabling a specific area in A round (first round), while entering the game ball into the specific area as a trigger for positive change transition In the B-round (second round), the specific area may be invalidated, and the game ball may not enter the specific area as a trigger for the probability change transition. At that time, the big hit attribute of long and short open big hit A, B is also reversed, long short short open big hit A conditionally belongs to a regular big hit, long long short open jackpot B belongs to a conditional specified big hit. In that case, the operation pattern for the conditional special jackpot and the operation pattern for the conditional normal jackpot are reversed. That is, the conditional special jackpot operating pattern is a long / short opening pattern B, and the conditional normal jackpot operating pattern is a long / short opening pattern A. Therefore, if the above-described correspondence relationships (1) to (2) are satisfied, the operation pattern of the conditional specific jackpot (in this case, the “long-short release pattern A” falls under) C round (third round) If the above-mentioned correspondences (1) and (2) are reversed while the opening operation (short opening operation) is performed twice or more times, the operation pattern of the conditional specific big hit (in that case In “long / short open pattern B”), two or more open operations (short open operations) are executed in the A round (first round). As a modification, the above-described correspondence (3) is not applied, and only the correspondences (1) and (2) are applied.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the V acquisition notification (notification that the probability change has been acquired by the V winning within the valid period) is performed in a round after the specific round (the third round and thereafter in this example). You may In addition, an effect may be provided to indicate whether the specific area is "effective" or "ineffective" in each round, and the player's expectation may be further felt.

[Common modification example]
Next, a gaming machine according to a common modification of the first to twelfth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this common modification basically has the same configuration as that of any of the above-described first to twelfth embodiments, and hereinafter the same configuration. The same symbols are given to the parts that are possessed, the explanation is omitted, and mainly the different parts are explained.

(Common modification 1)
In this modification 1, when a big hit with the second special symbol in the non-deterministic state (time saving state, easy ball entering state), the execution of the pending inside consecutive effects effect than when the big hit with the second special symbol in the positive change state The configuration is configured such that the probability is low, or the on-hold consecutive resort production is not executed. As described above, in the indeterminate state and the indeterminate state, the transition to the different effect modes is made, so the tendency of the effect during the symbol change is different. Therefore, in the non-deterministic change state, it becomes a big hit with the second special symbol, and considering the case of transitioning to the definite change state after the end of the special game, the non-deterministic change through the event of pending Uranzou (occurrence of two big hits) Seamlessly connecting symbol variation production in the state, the special game above, the symbol variation production in the definite change state, and the special game later, and assembling it as a series of continuous effects (production with consistent story nature) Is difficult. Therefore, even if the second special symbol in the non-determination state will be a big hit, and there is a possibility that the pending inner row will be decided, there is a high possibility that the pending inner row is not fully effective. Lower the execution probability of or As an example, in the production mode (battle mode) in the probabilistic state, a special jackpot symbol dedicated to the production mode (a jackpot symbol “fist / fist / fist”) is set, and the stoppage display of this particular jackpot symbol is performed. Considering the case where special continuous production (battle-type special continuous production) is started when the on-hold continuous resort is finalized, when the production mode in the short time state (non-battle mode), Even under the circumstances where the occurrence of this is not possible, the specific jackpot symbol does not appear, and if the special continuous performance is not generated, the connection between the front and rear jackpots and the consistency of the performance can be achieved. Because.

(Common Modification 2)
In the above-described first embodiment, even if any of the plural types of big hits (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 2R big hit) falls under any of the big wins, the fixed period immediately after the end of the special game (second special Only limited period over the fluctuation display of the number of times (4 rotations) of the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the maximum number (4) of the operation holding balls of the symbol), it shifts to the limited frequency state (high probability special fluctuation state γ), and the limited frequency table The variation pattern of the special symbol is configured to be selected with reference to (special variation pattern table). On the other hand, in the second modification, the special game is ended only when it corresponds to a specific big hit (high profit big hit: 16R big hit) among multiple types of big hits (16R big hit, 8R big hit, 2R big hit). It transfers to a limited frequency state only for a fixed period (4 rotations) immediately after, and it is comprised so that the variation pattern of a special symbol may be selected with reference to a limited frequency table. In the limited frequency state, when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a specific big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation (for example, fluctuation time = 2 seconds) is selected. At this time, as described above, a specific big hit (high profit big hit) among multiple types of big hits in the case of the second special symbol when it becomes the big hit than when it is the big hit in the first special symbol The probability of becoming is high. Therefore, basically, the case of becoming a big hit with the second special symbol (in the case of consecutive villas) is more of that special game than when it becomes the big hit with the first special symbol (in the case of the first hit) It can be said that it is easy to shift to the limited frequency state immediately after the end. Then, in the limited frequency state, the shortening variation pattern (for example, variation time = 2 seconds) is selected on the main control substrate 100 side, and various symbol variation effects corresponding to the shortening variation pattern are selected on the presentation control substrate 200 side. Is to be selected.

  Here, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (especially, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that is scheduled to be digested four times after the big hit (after the end of the special game) is generated before the big hit starts. There are cases where it occurs after the start of jackpot. Specifically, when the game ball enters the second starting port during the symbol variation display and the action holding ball of the second special symbol occurs, the number of action holding balls of the second special symbol is four (maximum The game ball may enter the second starting opening during execution of the special game under the condition of less than the holding number), and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol may occur. In addition, in the situation where the number of active reserve balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (maximum number of reserves) at the end of the special game, the change of the second special symbol after the end of the special game When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 62, there is a case where the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol occurs. At this time, as described above, whether or not to execute the on-hold consecutive villa effect (special continuous effect) is determined at the start of the big hit, so in order to generate the on-hold consecutive villa effect (special continuous effect), at least the big hit It is assumed that there is a specific hold at the start. For this reason, when a specific hold is generated before the big hit starts with reference to the time of the big hit, the on-hold consecutive villa production B (special continuous production) can be generated, but the specific hold is generated after the big hit starts. In the case, it is not possible to generate the pending in-line consecutive effect B (special continuous effect). As a result, if a specific hold occurs before the big hit starts, a special symbol variation effect will occur within the limited period (four rotations) immediately after the special game ends, If a specific hold occurs after the start, the special symbol change effect will not occur within the limited period (four revolutions) immediately after the end of the special game. Also, as described above, the limited period of 4 rotations corresponds to the maximum number (4) of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol.

Therefore, when the suspension within the group is established by the specific suspension being triggered before the big hit starts, the symbol variation related to the specific suspension corresponds to the shortening variation (for example, variation time = 2 seconds) in the limited frequency state To generate the special symbol variation effect (for example, a series of movie images and symbol variation and occurrence of big hit inconspicuously generated), and the first special game, the symbol variation effect, and the second special game are consistent. Seamlessly connect in a storytic way. On the other hand, when specific suspension is triggered after the big hit is started, and there is a hold inside arrangement, special symbol fluctuation effect (special continuous performance) does not occur in the symbol change related to the specific suspension, but shortening fluctuation in limited frequency state By generating an immediate hit effect (a mode in which the occurrence of a big hit is emphasized) corresponding to (for example, the variation time = 2 seconds), the delay until the big hit is prevented is prevented. That is, in the second modification, even if the timing of occurrence of the specific suspension is before or after the start of the big hit, if the specific big hit symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern selection state after the special game is Since the transition is made to the limited frequency state, the contents of the subsequent big hit variation effect can be made different according to the timing of occurrence of the specific hold with the occurrence of the shortening variation in the limited frequency state. In addition, in this modification, at the time of the judgment of the executability of a reservation Uchi-San effect (special continuous production), it was set at the time of the big hit start, but it is not limited to this; Medium timing may be used.

(Common modification 3)
Further, in the above-described first to twelfth embodiments, the configuration in which only one type of off symbol is provided as the special symbol stop symbol is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of off symbol are provided. May be. At this time, for example, only when a specific loss symbol is selected as the prior determination result, the on-hold consecutive villa effect (gase effect) may be generated. In addition, in the seventh to twelfth embodiments described above, a configuration (one attacker type) having only a single big prize opening 65 having a specific area in the game area PA is adopted. Not limited, as in the second embodiment described above, a configuration (two-attacker format) including a large winning opening 64 having no specific area and a large winning opening 65 having a specific area is adopted. May be.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modification, and can be appropriately improved without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, components obtained by appropriately combining the components described in the above embodiment and the modification, or some of the components described in the above embodiment and the modification may be deleted or converted by a known technique or the like These are also included in the scope of the present invention. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the two types of on-hold consecutive villas A and B having different generation times have been described as examples. The generation of the on-hold renso production A is not sufficient, and it may be the specification that the on-hold renso is confirmed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be a specification that is determined by Zhuang, or may be a specification that is decided by Pending Zhuang B by the fact that predetermined conditions are satisfied only by the occurrence of the pending U conjunction R effect B. Moreover, in the said embodiment, even if it is the structure performed only when one or more specific reservation exists in the subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl, specific reservation in a subsequent operation reservation ball | bowl is carried out. Even if it does not exist (as a so-called gas effect), the configuration may be executed. Further, in the present invention and the above embodiment, “not executed” may include a low execution probability (occurrence frequency), and “low execution probability” includes not being executed. May be

PM Pachinko game machine PA game area 1 outer frame 2 front frame 5 glass frame 20 game board 61 first starting opening 62 second starting opening 64 first large winning opening 65 second large winning opening 70 effect display device 71 first special symbol Display 72 Second special symbol display device 100 Main control board 130 Hold control means 135 Prior judgment means 140 Special symbol lottery processing means 141 Special symbol pass / fail judgment means 142 Special symbol stop symbol judgment means 143 Special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment means 150 Special game Control means 156 Special symbol display control means 160 Motorized character control means 165 Game state control means 200 Effect control board 220 Effect control means 223 Look-ahead notice control means 225 Fluctuation effect determination means 300 Image control board 657 Specific area switch 658 Specific area

Claims (1)

A game board in which a game area is formed,
A first starting port provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls;
A second starting opening provided in the game area, the game ball changing to an open state in which the ball can enter easily and a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter;
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a random number value triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening;
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number value triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening;
A first advisability judging means for executing a first spruce determined based on the random number value acquired by the first random number acquisition means,
A second advisability judging means for executing a second spruce determined based on the random number value acquired by the second random number acquisition means,
A large winning opening that is provided in the game area and is opened according to the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination and allows a game ball to enter;
Special game execution means for executing a special game that repeats a unit game with opening of the big prize opening a plurality of times when the result of the first success / failure determination or the result of the second success / failure determination is a big hit;
A low probability state in which the result of the first success / failure determination and the result of the second success / failure determination are big hits with a predetermined probability, and the result of the first success / failure determination and the result of the second success / failure determination are the predetermined probability. Lottery state control means for performing control to shift to a low probability state or a high probability state, having a high probability state in which a big hit occurs with a higher probability than the above, and
Entry that has a normal entry state and an entry easy state that makes it easier to enter the second start port than the normal entry state, and performs control to shift to the normal entry state or the easy entry state State control means,
A first hold storage means for storing the obtained random number value as hold information up to a predetermined upper limit number until the first success or failure determination permission condition is satisfied when the random number value is obtained by the first random number obtaining means; ,
A second hold storage means for storing the obtained random number value as hold information up to a predetermined upper limit number until the second random number obtaining means acquires the random number value until the second yes / no decision permission condition is satisfied; ,
An effect display device in which a symbol indicating the result of the success or failure judgment is displayed in a variable manner and a predetermined effect is displayed,
Symbol fluctuation effect content determining means for determining an effect display process of the symbol fluctuation effect for causing the effect display device to display the symbols in a variable manner;
In the situation where the result of the above-mentioned judgment of success or failure based on the random number value according to a certain holding information is a big hit, the specific holding information in one or more holding information which is scheduled to be digested after the execution of the special game concerning the random number Provision of previewing notice control means for deciding whether or not to execute a pending internal connection effect to suggest or notify the possibility of the presence of
When the special game is executed because the result of the second success / failure determination becomes a big hit in the specific game state, during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute the in-hold extended zone effect.
In a case where a special game is executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is a big hit in the specific game state, an effect format of a symbol variation effect scheduled after the special game is ended during the execution of the special game The effect type selection effect that can be selected is executed,
When an effect type selection effect is executed during the execution of a unit game for a predetermined number of times in a special game that is executed when the result of the second success / failure determination becomes a big hit in the specific game state, While a unit game is in progress, the pending inside row effect is not executed ,
A special game that is executed when the result of the first success / failure determination is a big win includes the first special game as a type of special game that is executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is a big hit. Including a second special game as a type,
The execution period of the special game includes a start demo period that is a waiting period from the start of execution of the special game to the start of execution of the first unit game, and an end of execution of the unit game that is the last time from the start of execution of the first unit game. A unit game execution period until the end, and an end demo period that is a waiting period from the end of execution of the last unit game to the end of execution of the special game,
End demo period when transitioning to a low-probability state and easy-to-enter state after the end of the first special game executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes a big hit in the low-probability state and the normal entry state The first time is set as
End demo period when transitioning to a high-probability state and easy-to-enter state after the end of the second special game executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is a big hit in a low-probability state and easy-to-enter state The second time, which is longer than the first time, is set as
When the second special game is executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is a big hit in the low probability state and the easy entry state, it is scheduled to be digested after the execution of the second special game is completed. Even if specific hold information exists in one or a plurality of hold information, the second special game is not executed during the execution of the second special game. On the other hand, the second in the high probability state and the easy entry state When the second special game is executed because the result of the determination of whether or not the game is successful, the specific hold information is included in one or a plurality of hold information scheduled to be digested after the execution of the second special game. If there is , the pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute the on-hold Rensou effect during the execution of the second special game .

Images